White Papers

ManualsBrandsDell ManualsAccess PlatformsOS9

Table Of Contents

Dell EMC Networking Command Line

Reference Guide for the Z9100–ON System

9.14.1.5

May 2019

Rev. A00

Summary of content (1713 pages)

PAGE 1
Dell EMC Networking Command Line Reference Guide for the Z9100–ON System 9.14.1.5 May 2019 Rev.
PAGE 2
Notes, cautions, and warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your product. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. © 2018 - 2019 Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Dell, EMC, and other trademarks are trademarks of Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries.
PAGE 3
Contents Chapter 1: About this Guide.........................................................................................................40 Objectives........................................................................................................................................................................... 40 Audience..............................................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 4
banner login........................................................................................................................................................................ 86 banner motd........................................................................................................................................................................87 boot-type.........................................................................................................................................
PAGE 5
show reset-reason...........................................................................................................................................................140 show software ifm...........................................................................................................................................................142 show system.....................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 6
clear counters ip access-group.............................................................................................................................. 187 feature acloptimized..................................................................................................................................................188 feature aclrange.........................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 7
description...................................................................................................................................................................247 match as-path............................................................................................................................................................248 match community..................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 8
Chapter 7: Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD)................................................................ 308 bfd all-neighbors............................................................................................................................................................. 308 bfd disable......................................................................................................................................................................... 310 bfd enable (Configuration)..
PAGE 9
bgp bestpath router-id ignore................................................................................................................................344 bgp client-to-client reflection................................................................................................................................ 344 bgp cluster-id.............................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 10
neighbor remove-private-as................................................................................................................................... 389 neighbor route-map..................................................................................................................................................390 neighbor route-reflector-client...............................................................................................................................
PAGE 11
CAM Profile Commands................................................................................................................................................ 445 cam-acl (Configuration).......................................................................................................................................... 445 cam-acl-egress..........................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 12
clear ets counters..................................................................................................................................................... 480 show interface ets..................................................................................................................................................... 481 DCBX Commands...........................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 13
debug ip dhcp server................................................................................................................................................528 debug ipv6 dhcp .......................................................................................................................................................529 default-router.............................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 14
ip domain-list.............................................................................................................................................................. 564 ip host.......................................................................................................................................................................... 565 clear host...............................................................................................................................................
PAGE 15
Chapter 19: GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP)........................................................................... 605 clear gvrp statistics........................................................................................................................................................606 debug gvrp........................................................................................................................................................................607 disable.........................
PAGE 16
encapsulation dot1q..................................................................................................................................................650 errdisable recovery cause........................................................................................................................................ 651 errdisable recovery interval.....................................................................................................................................
PAGE 17
show port-channel-flow........................................................................................................................................... 717 Enhanced Validation of Interface Ranges..................................................................................................................719 ip http source-interface.................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 18
show show show show show show show show ip management-route.......................................................................................................................................... 772 ipv6 management-route..................................................................................................................................... 773 ip protocols..........................................................................................................................................
PAGE 19
distribute-list out............................................................................................................................................................. 821 distribute-list redistributed-override.......................................................................................................................... 822 domain-password.......................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 20
Chapter 27: iSCSI Optimization................................................................................................. 869 advertise dcbx-app-tlv.................................................................................................................................................. 869 iscsi aging time................................................................................................................................................................ 870 iscsi cos.................
PAGE 21
debug fefd.................................................................................................................................................................. 908 fefd............................................................................................................................................................................... 909 fefd disable...........................................................................................................................................
PAGE 22
ip msdp mesh-group...................................................................................................................................................... 950 ip msdp originator-id....................................................................................................................................................... 951 ip msdp peer......................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 23
tc-flush-standard............................................................................................................................................................985 Chapter 35: Multicast................................................................................................................987 IPv4 Multicast Commands............................................................................................................................................ 987 clear ip mroute...............
PAGE 24
threshold metric.......................................................................................................................................................1022 track interface ip routing....................................................................................................................................... 1024 track interface line-protocol.................................................................................................................................
PAGE 25
mib-binding................................................................................................................................................................1067 network area.............................................................................................................................................................1068 passive-interface.................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 26
ipv6 ospf hello-interval........................................................................................................................................... 1129 ipv6 ospf priority...................................................................................................................................................... 1130 ipv6 router ospf.........................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 27
show ip pim summary.............................................................................................................................................. 1178 show ip pim tib..........................................................................................................................................................1180 IPv6 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands...........................................................................................................................
PAGE 28
vlan vlan vlan vlan bridge-priority.........................................................................................................................................................1219 forward-delay........................................................................................................................................................ 1220 hello-time.........................................................................................................................................
PAGE 29
service-class buffer shared-threshold-weight................................................................................................. 1264 test cam-usage........................................................................................................................................................ 1265 threshold.................................................................................................................................................................... 1267 trust.........
PAGE 30
rmon alarm...................................................................................................................................................................... 1308 rmon collection history................................................................................................................................................. 1310 rmon collection statistics..................................................................................................................................
PAGE 31
enable sha256-password.......................................................................................................................................1353 enable restricted......................................................................................................................................................1354 enable secret............................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 32
dot1x max-eap-req.................................................................................................................................................. 1392 dot1x port-control................................................................................................................................................... 1393 dot1x quiet-period....................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 33
show role................................................................................................................................................................... 1433 show userroles......................................................................................................................................................... 1434 userrole.........................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 34
snmp-server host.....................................................................................................................................................1473 snmp-server location.............................................................................................................................................. 1476 snmp-server packetsize.........................................................................................................................................
PAGE 35
show storm-control multicast.................................................................................................................................... 1533 show storm-control unknown-unicast..................................................................................................................... 1534 storm-control broadcast (Configuration)...............................................................................................................
PAGE 36
SupportAssist Server Commands............................................................................................................................. 1569 proxy-ip-address......................................................................................................................................................1569 enable.........................................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 37
show uplink-state-group..............................................................................................................................................1607 uplink-state-group........................................................................................................................................................ 1608 upstream..............................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 38
peer-link port-channel..................................................................................................................................................1646 peer-routing.................................................................................................................................................................... 1647 peer-routing-timeout.........................................................................................................................................
PAGE 39
authentication-type................................................................................................................................................. 1681 clear counters vrrp..................................................................................................................................................1682 debug vrrp.................................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 40
1 About this Guide This guide provides information about the Dell EMC Networking operating system (OS) command line interface (CLI). This book also includes information about the protocols and features supported in Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 41
Information Icons This guide uses the following information symbols: NOTE: The Note icon signals important operational information. CAUTION: The Caution icon signals information about situations that could result in equipment damage or loss of data. NOTE: The Warning icon signals information about hardware handling that could result in injury.
PAGE 42
2 CLI Basics This chapter describes the command line interface (CLI) structure and command modes. The Dell EMC Networking operating software commands are in a text-based interface that allows you to use the launch commands, change command modes, and configure interfaces and protocols.
PAGE 43
User "admin" on line vty0 ( 123.12.1.123 ) User "admin" on line vty1 ( 123.12.1.123 ) User "Irene" on line vty3 ( 123.12.1.321 ) DellEMC#conf When another user enters CONFIGURATION mode, Dell EMC Networking OS sends a message similar to the following: % Warning: User "admin" on line vty2 "172.16.1.210" is in configuration In this case, the user is “admin” on vty2.
PAGE 44
When entering commands, you can take advantage of the following timesaving features: ● Commands are not case-sensitive. ● Enter partial (truncated) command keywords. For example, you can enter int teng 1/1/1 for the interface tengigabitethernet 1/1/1 command. ● Use the TAB key to complete keywords in commands. ● Use the up Arrow key to display the last enabled command. ● Use either the Backspace key or Delete key to erase the previous character.
PAGE 45
Using the no Command To disable, delete or return to default values, use the no form of the commands. For most commands, if you type the keyword no in front of the command, you disable that command or delete it from the running configuration. In this guide, the no form of the command is described in the Syntax portion of the command description.
PAGE 46
Enabling Software Features on Devices Using a Command Option The capability to activate software applications or components on a device using a command is supported on this platform. Starting with Release 9.4(0.0), you can enable or disable specific software features or applications that need to run on a device by using a command attribute in the CLI interface. This enables effective, streamlined management and administration of applications and utilities that run on a device.
PAGE 47
show feature Verify the status of software applications, such as VRF, that are activated and running on a device. Syntax show feature Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(0.0) Updated the command to display the IPV6acloptimized feature on the S6100– ON and Z9100–ON. 9.12(1.
PAGE 48
CLASS-MAP Mode To create or configure a class map, use CLASS-MAP mode. For more information, see Policy-Based QoS Commands. To enter CLASS-MAP mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the class-map command, and then enter the class map name. The prompt changes to include config-classmap. You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command.
PAGE 49
2. Enter the ecmp-group command then enter the ECMP group ID. The prompt changes to include conf-ecmp-groupecmp-group-id. You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command. EIS Mode To enable or configure Egress Interface Selection (EIS), use EIS mode. To enter EIS mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the management egress-interface-selection command. The prompt changes to include conf-mgmt-eis. You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command.
PAGE 50
To enter INTERFACE mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the interface command and then enter an interface type and interface number that is available on the switch. NOTE: In Dell EMC Networking OS, the stack unit number and interfaces start from 0. But in Dell EMC Networking OS Open Networking platforms, the stack unit number and interfaces start from 1. The prompt changes to include the designated interface and slot/port[/subport] number.
PAGE 51
2. Enter the address-family ipv6 unicast command. The prompt changes to include conf-router_isisaf_ipv6. LLDP Mode To enable and configure Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP), use LLDP mode. For more information, see Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP). To enter LLDP mode: 1. To enable LLDP globally, verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. To enable LLDP on an interface, verify that you are logged in to INTERFACE mode. 2. Enter the protocol lldp command.
PAGE 52
MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE (MSTP) Mode To enable and configure MSTP, use MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode. For more information, see Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP). To enter MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the protocol spanning-tree mstp command. The prompt changes to include conf-mstp. You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command. OPENFLOW INSTANCE Mode To enable and configure OpenFlow instances, use OPENFLOW INSTANCE mode.
PAGE 53
1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the protocol gvrp command. The prompt changes to include config-gvrp. You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command. RAPID SPANNING TREE (RSTP) Mode To enable and configure RSTP, use RSTP mode. For more information, see Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP). To enter RSTP mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the protocol spanning-tree rstp command. The prompt changes to include conf-rstp.
PAGE 54
To enter ROUTER OSPFV3 mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the ipv6 router ospf {process-id} command. The prompt changes to include conf-ipv6-router_ospf. You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command. ROUTER RIP Mode To enable and configure Router Information Protocol (RIP), use ROUTER RIP mode. For more information, see Routing Information Protocol (RIP). To enter ROUTER RIP mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2.
PAGE 55
To enter VRRP mode: 1. To enable VRRP globally, verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Enter the vrrp-group command, and then enter the VRRP group ID. The prompt changes to include conf-ifinterface-type-slot/port-vrid-vrrp-group-id.
PAGE 56
3 File Management This section contains command line interface (CLI) commands needed to manage the configuration files, as well as other file management commands.
PAGE 57
secondary Enter the keyword secondary to specify the secondary Dell EMC Networking OS image. ftp: Enter the keyword FTP: to retrieve the image from an FTP server. ftp:// userid:password@hostip/filepath. nfsmount Enter the keyword nfsmount: to retrieve the image from a mounted NFS file system. nfsmount://filepath system: Enter the keyword system: to retrieve the image from the system. usbflash Enter the keyword usbflash: to retrieve the image from the USB flash memory. usbflash://filename.
PAGE 58
usbflash: Use the keyword usbflash: to change the current directory to the inserted USB. directory name and path Enter the directory name and path as follows: directory name ([[flash://]directory_path]) NOTE: The cd command without any arguments will change the current directory to flash: Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 59
scp: Enter the keyword scp: to copy from the remote file system, IPv4, or IPv6, (scp://userid:password@hostip/filepath). startup-config Enter the keywords startup-config to copy from the startup configuration. tftp: Enter the keyword tftp: to copy from the remote file system, IPv4, or IPv6, (tftp://hostip/filepath). usbflash: Enter the keyword usbflash: to copy the file to or from the external USB flash.
PAGE 60
When you load the startup configuration or a configuration file from a network server such as TFTP to the running configuration, the configuration is added to the running configuration. This does not replace the existing running configuration. Commands in the configuration file has precedence over commands in the running configuration. Dell EMC Networking OS supports copying the running-configuration to a TFTP server, an FTP server, or a remote NFS file system.
PAGE 61
Related Commands ● cd – changes the working directory. delete Delete a file from the flash. After deletion, files cannot be restored. Syntax Parameters delete {flash: | nfsmount: | usbflash:} [no-confirm] flash: To delete a file or directory on the internal flash, enter flash:// then the filename or directory name ([flash://]filepath). nfsmount: To delete a file or directory on the NFS-mounted file system, enter nfsmount:// then the mount point and the file path (nfsmount://filepath).
PAGE 62
Parameters flash: For a directory on the internal Flash, enter flash:// directory name. nfsmount: For a file or directory on an NFS-mounted file system, enter nfsmount:// then the mount point and file path. NOTE: While displaying a file directory on a remote NFS file system, it is mandatory to specify the mount-point that indicates the working directory on the NFS file system. You cannot display details corresponding to the root directory of the remote NFS file system.
PAGE 63
nfsmount: 1463410688 bytes total (585719808 bytes free) DellEMC# Related Commands ● cd — changes the working directory. format Erase all existing files and reformat the file system. After the file system is formatted, files cannot be restored. Syntax format {flash: | usbflash:} Defaults None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 64
usbflash: Defaults For a directory on the external USB flash, enter usbflash:// directory name. None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 65
Example Related Commands Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series. DellEMC# mkdir nfsmount:/nfs-mountpoint/guest DellEMC# ● rmdir — remove a directory. mount nfs Mounts an NFS file system to a device. Syntax mount nfs rhost:path mount-point [username password] Parameters Enter the following location keywords and information: rhost:path Enter the remote hosts’s path directory. mount-point Enter the folder name in the local file system.
PAGE 66
Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
PAGE 67
Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on S-Series 7.5.1.0 Introduced on C-Series E-Series Original command show boot system Displays information about boot images currently configured on the system. Syntax Parameters Defaults show boot system stack-unit{stack-unit—id | all} all Enter the keyword all to display the boot image information for all stack units. stack-unit-id Enter the stack-unit-id to display boot image information for a stack-unit.
PAGE 68
show bootvar Display the variable settings for the boot parameters. Syntax show bootvar Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 69
Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 70
show os-version Display the release and software image version information of the image file specified. Syntax show os-version [file-url] Parameters Defaults file-url (OPTIONAL) Enter the following location keywords and information: ● For a file on the internal flash, enter flash:// followed by the filename. ● For a file on an FTP server, enter ftp://user:password@hostip/ filepath. ● For a file on a TFTP server, enter tftp://hostip/filepath. ● For a file on the USB port, enter usbflash://filepath.
PAGE 71
BOOTSEL IMAGE INFORMATION : ----------------------------------------------------Type Version Target checksum boot selector 3.23.0.2 Control Processor passed FPGA IMAGE INFORMATION : ------------------------------------------Card FPGA Name Version stack-unit 1 Z9100-ON CPLD 1 3 stack-unit 1 Z9100-ON CPLD 2 2 stack-unit 1 Z9100-ON CPLD 3 2 stack-unit 1 Z9100-ON CPLD 4 2 stack-unit 1 Z9100-ON MSS FPGA 0.15 stack-unit 1 Z9100-ON MSS IAP 1.43 stack-unit 1 Z9100-ON OOB-FPGA 0.
PAGE 72
File Management hardwaremonitor for hardware-monitor action-on-error settings hypervisor for the current hypervisor configuration igmp for the current IGMP configuration interface for the current interface configuration interface port-channel for the current port-channel interface configuration. interface tunnel for all configured tunnels. For a specific tunnel, enter the tunnel ID. The range is from 1 to 16383.
PAGE 73
resolve for the current DNS configuration rip for the current RIP configuration rmon for the current RMON configuration route-map for the current route map configuration sflow for the current sFlow configuration snmp for the current SNMP configuration spanning-tree for the current spanning tree configuration static for the current static route configuration status for the file status information supportassist for the current SupportAssist configuration tacacs+ for the current TACACS+ co
PAGE 74
Version Description 9.0.0.0 Added support for the VLT option. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added the hardware-monitor option. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Expanded to include the last configuration change, start-up last updated (date and time), and who made the change. 6.5.4.0 Added the status option.
PAGE 75
Example Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 76
Command Fields Example (Z9100– ON) 76 Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.
PAGE 77
System image file is "system://B" System Type: Z9100-ON Control Processor: Intel Rangeley with 3 Gbytes (3203289088 bytes) of memory, core(s) 4. 16G bytes of boot flash memory. 1 38 18 5 34-port TE/TF/FO/FI/HU G (Z9100-ON) Ten GigabitEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s) Forty GigabitEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s) Hundred GigabitEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s) upgrade system Upgrade the Dell EMC Networking OS image. To upgrade the boot flash or boot selector image, use the upgrade boot command.
PAGE 78
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for NFS mount. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0(0.0) Added support for IPv6 for the file-url parameter. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. Added support for the SSD on the Z9000 only. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.
PAGE 79
○ feature udf-acl ○ feature aclrange ○ feature ipv6acloptimized ○ feature acloptimized Example DellEMC# upgrade system tftp://10.11.8.12/dv-rainier-13 a: 00:39:32 : Discarded 1 pkts. Expected block num : 51. Received block num: 50 !00:39:36 : Discarded 1 pkts. Expected block num : 65. Received block num: 64 !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!....... ...........!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! 93924044 bytes successfully copied System image upgrade completed successfully.
PAGE 80
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell EMC Networking OS version history for this command. Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0(0.
PAGE 81
Usage Information You can enter this command in the following ways: ● verify md5 flash://img-file ● verify md5 flash://img-file ● verify sha256 flash://img-file ● verify sha256 flash://img-file Example Without Entering the Hash Value for Verification using SHA256 DellEMC# verify sha256 flash://FTOS-SE-9.5.0.0.bin SHA256 hash for FTOS-SE-9.5.0.0.
PAGE 82
4 Control and Monitoring This section contains command information to configure and monitor the system, including Telnet, file transfer protocol (FTP), and trivial file transfer protocol (TFTP).
PAGE 83
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • show inventory show login statistics show memory show processes cpu show processes ipc flow-control show processes memory show reload-type show reset-reason show software ifm show system show tech-support ssh-peer-stack-unit stack-unit location-led telnet telnet-peer-stack-unit terminal length traceroute undebug all virtual-ip warmboot-failure-action write alias Configure shorter alias names for single-line command input.
PAGE 84
● User can configure up to nine arguments to the aliases—1 to 9. Repetition of arguments are allowed and the system does not allow discontinuous arguments.
PAGE 85
Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
PAGE 86
banner login Set a message of the day banner to appear after logging on to the system. Syntax banner login {acknowledgement | keyboard-interactive | c line c} Enter no banner login to delete the banner text. Enter no banner login keyboardinteractive to automatically go to the banner message prompt (does not require a carriage return). Parameters keyboardinteractive Enter the keyboard-interactive keyword and then press Enter (carriage return) to retrieve the message banner prompt.
PAGE 87
keyboard-interactive Press enter key to get prompt LINE c banner-text(max length 255) c, where 'c' is a delimiting character DellEMC(conf)#no banner login ? acknowledgement Disable positive acknowledgment required after login prompt keyboard-interactive Prompt will be displayed by default If you configure the acknowledgement keyword, the system requires a positive acknowledgement from the user while logging in to the system. $ telnet 10.11.178.16 Trying 10.11.178.16... Connected to 10.11.178.16.
PAGE 88
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command Usage Information After entering the banner login command, type one or more spaces and a delineator character. Enter the banner text then the second delineator character. When the user is connected to the router, if a message of the day banner is configured, it displays first.
PAGE 89
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● cam-acl {default | l2acl number ipv4acl number ipv6acl number , ipv4qos number l2qos number l2pt numb er ipmacacl number ecfmacl number [vmanqos | vman-dualqos number } Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 2 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 1 VmanQos : 0 EtsAcl : 0 FcoeAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 nlbclusteracl: 0 ipv4udfmirracl: 0 ipv4mirracl: 0 Allocate space to each CAM region. Enter the CAM profile name then the amount of CAM space to be allotted.
PAGE 90
Usage Information For the new settings to take effect, save the new CAM settings to the startup-config (write-mem or copy run start) then reload the system. The total amount of space allowed is 16 FP Blocks. System flow requires three blocks and these blocks cannot be reallocated. The ipv4acl profile range is from . When configuring space for IPv6 ACLs, the total number of Blocks must equal 9. The ipv6acl allocation must be a factor of 3 (0,3,6,9).
PAGE 91
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.
PAGE 92
Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 93
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command. do Allows the execution of most EXEC-level commands from all CONFIGURATION levels without returning to the EXEC level. Syntax Parameters Defaults do command command Enter an EXEC-level command.
PAGE 94
● disable ● exit ● config Example DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)# do clear counters Clear counters on all interfaces [confirm] DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)# DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)# do clear logging Clear logging buffer [confirm] DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)# DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)# do reload System configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: n Proceed with reload [confirm yes/no]: n enable Enter EXEC Privilege mode or any other privilege level configured.
PAGE 95
Usage Information Users entering EXEC Privilege mode or any other configured privilege level can access configuration commands. To protect against unauthorized access, use the enable password command to configure a password for the enable command at a specific privilege level. If no privilege level is specified, the default is privilege level 15. NOTE: If you are authorized for the EXEC Privilege mode by your role, you do not need to enter an enable password.
PAGE 96
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Replacement command for the S4820T. Replaces the enable xfp-powerupdates command. 8.3.11.4 Replacement command for the Z9000. Replaces the enable xfp-powerupdates command 8.3.10.0 Replacement command for the S4810 only. Replaces the enable xfp-powerupdates command.
PAGE 97
Related Commands Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and E-Series. E-Series Original command. ● exit — returns to the lower command mode. exec-timeout Set a time interval that the system waits for input on a line before disconnecting the session.
PAGE 98
Usage Information Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command. To remove the time interval, enter exec-timeout 0 0. Example Dell con0 is now available Press RETURN to get started. DellEMC> exit Return to the lower command mode.
PAGE 99
Related Commands Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command. ● end — returns to EXEC Privilege mode. ftp-server enable Enable FTP server functions on the system. Syntax Parameters Defaults ftp-server [vrf vrf-name] enable vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF to enable the FTP server to listen to that VRF instance.
PAGE 100
Example morpheus% ftp 10.31.1.111 Connected to 10.31.1.111. 220 DellEMC(1.0) FTP server ready Name (10.31.1.111:dch): dch 331 Password required Password: 230 User logged in ftp> pwd 257 Current directory is "flash:" ftp> dir 200 Port set okay 150 Opening ASCII mode data connection size date time name -------- ------ ------ -------512 Jul-20-2004 18:15:00 tgtimg 512 Jul-20-2004 18:15:00 diagnostic 512 Jul-20-2004 18:15:00 other 512 Jul-20-2004 18:15:00 tgt 226 Transfer complete 329 bytes received in 0.
PAGE 101
Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command. Usage Information After you enable FTP server functions with the ftp-server enable command, Dell EMC Networking recommends specifying a top-level directory path. Without a top-level directory path specified, the Dell EMC Networking OS directs users to the flash directory when logging in to the FTP server. Related Commands ● ftp-server enable — enables FTP server functions on the E-Series.
PAGE 102
Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command. hostname Set the host name of the system. Syntax hostname name Parameters Defaults name Enter a text string, up to 32 characters long. Dell Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 103
Parameters Defaults encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following numbers: ● 0 (zero) for an unecrypted (clear text) password ● 7 (seven) for a hidden text password password Enter a string up to 40 characters as the password. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 104
● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a port-channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then the port-channel ID.
PAGE 105
Defaults No user name is configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON.
PAGE 106
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series and Z9000. Use this command to make the FTP clients VRF-aware.
PAGE 107
ip telnet server vrf Configures the TELNET server on either a specific VRF or a management VRF. Syntax ip telnet server vrf {vrf-name | any | management} To undo the TELNET server configuration, use the no ip telnet server [vrf vrf-name] command. Parameters Defaults vrf-name Enter the vrf-name to specify the VRF that is used by the TELNET server. any Enter the keyword any to enable server from any VRF.
PAGE 108
● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 109
ip tftp source-interface Assign an interface’s IP address in outgoing packets for TFTP traffic. Syntax ip tftp source-interface interface To return to the default setting, use the no ip tftp source-interface interface command. Parameters Defaults interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 110
ip tftp vrf Configures an TFTP client with a VRF that is used to connect to the TFTP server. Syntax ip tftp [vrf vrf-name] To undo the TFTP client configuration, use the no ip tftp [vrf vrf-name] command. Parameters Defaults vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF to specify the VRF that is used by the TFTP client. Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 111
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.
PAGE 112
login concurrent-session Configures the limit of concurrent sessions for each user on console and virtual terminal lines. Syntax login concurrent-session {limit number-of-sessions | clear—line enable} no login concurrent-session {limit number-of-sessions | clear—line enable} Parameters Defaults limit number-of- sessions Sets the number of concurrent sessions that any user can have on console and virtual terminal lines. The range is from 1 to 12 (10 VTY lines, one console, and one AUX line).
PAGE 113
Escape character is '^]'. Login: admin Password: Current sessions for user admin: Line Location 2 vty 0 10.14.1.97 3 vty 1 10.14.1.97 Clear existing session? [line number/Enter to cancel]: When you try to create more than the permitted number of sessions, the following message appears, prompting you to close one of your existing sessions. Close any of your existing sessions to log in to the system. $ telnet 10.11.178.14 Trying 10.11.178.14... Connected to 10.11.178.14. Escape character is '^]'.
PAGE 114
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820, S5000, S6000, S6000-ON, and Z9500. Only the system and security administrators can configure login activity tracking and view the login activity details of other users. If you enable user login statistics, the system displays the last successful login details of the current user, the details of any failed login attempts by others, and if the current user’s permissions have changed since the last login.
PAGE 115
motd-banner Enable a message of the day (MOTD) banner to appear when you log in to the system. Syntax motd-banner To disable the MOTD banner, use the no motd-banner command. Defaults Enabled on all lines. Command Modes LINE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.
PAGE 116
NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. 116 count Enter the number of echo packets to be sent. The default is 5. ● number: from 1 to 2147483647 ● continuous: transmit echo request continuously datagram size Enter the ICMP datagram size. The range is from 36 to 15360 bytes. The default is 100. timeout Enter the interval to wait for an echo reply before timing out. The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds. The default is 2 seconds.
PAGE 117
● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 118
Usage Information When you enter the ping command without specifying an IP/IPv6 address (Extended Ping), you are prompted for a target IP/IPv6 address, a repeat count, a datagram size (up to 1500 bytes), a timeout (in seconds), and for Extended Commands. The following table provides descriptions for the ping command status response symbols displayed in the output. Example (IPv4) Symbol Description ! Each exclamation point indicates receipt of a reply. .
PAGE 119
● rescue — enter the Rescue mode and access the file system Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Added the optional dell-diag and onie parameters. Introduced the no-confirm option. Usage Information 9.8(2.
PAGE 120
The following example shows how to reload the system into ONIE mode: DellEMC#reload onie Proceed with reload [confirm yes/no]: yes The following example shows how to reload the system into ONIE prompt and enter the install mode directly: DellEMC#reload onie install Proceed with reload [confirm yes/no]: yes reload-type Allows you to configure the boot-type for the next reload.
PAGE 121
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 122
utc Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword utc to include the UTC time format (ignoring local time zone) in the timestamp. ● datetime [localtime] ● datetime Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(1.5) Added support for UTC time format. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 123
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command-Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced on all the Dell EMC Networking OS platforms. Usage Information ● Alias definitions display up to 40 characters, and detailed output can be seen using the details option.
PAGE 124
Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(1.0) Introduced on the S5048F–ON. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON.
PAGE 125
Defaults all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to display traffic statistics on all the interfaces receiving traffic, sorted based on the traffic. cp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cp to display traffic statistics on the specified CPU. all Command Modes EXEC Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 126
--------------No CPU traffic statistics. DellEMC# show debugging View a list of all enabled debugging processes. Syntax show debugging Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example 126 This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 127
show environment View system component status (for example, temperature or voltage). Syntax Parameters show environment [all | fan | pem | stack-unit unit-id | thermal-sensor ] all Enter the keyword all to view all components. fan Enter the keyword fan to view information on the fans. The output of this command is chassis-dependent. pem Enter the keyword pem to view only information on power entry modules.
PAGE 128
Speed in RPM -- Power Supplies -Unit Bay Status Type FanStatus FanSpeed(rpm) Power AvgPower AvgPowerStartTime -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 1 up AC up 6960 48 31 14/4/2017 17:24 1 2 up AC up 6656 40 26 14/4/2017 17:24 -- Unit Environment Status -Unit Status Temp Voltage ---------------------------------* 1 online 50C ok * Management Unit -- Thermal Sensor Readings (deg C) -- Unit Bcm_Int CpuOnBoard Bcm56960 SysInt0 SysInt1 Cpu_Int -----------------
PAGE 129
Usage Information Example (Z9100– ON) Version Description 9.11(0.0) Added support to display 10GBASE-T information on the S4048, S4048T, S6000, S6000-ON, S6100, Z9500, S6010, and Z9100. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 130
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 Media Media Media Media Media Media Media Media Media Media Media not not not not not not not not not not not present present present present present present present present present present present or or or or or or or or or or or accessible accessible accessible accessible accessible accessible accessible accessible accessible accessible accessible DellEMC# Related Commands ● show interfaces — displays the interface configuration.
PAGE 131
To view the successful and failed login details of a specific user in the last 30 days or the custom defined time period, use the show login statistics user user-id command. If you have system or security administrator rights, you can view the login statistics of other users. If you do not have system or security administrator rights, you can view your login statistics but not the login statistics of others. NOTE: By default, these commands display the details for the last 30 days.
PAGE 132
Unsuccessful login attempt(s) since the last successful login: 0 Unsuccessful login attempt(s) in last 30 day(s): 0 Successful login attempt(s) in last 30 day(s): 1 -----------------------------------------------------------------The following is sample output of the show login statistics unsuccessful-attempts command. DellEMC#show login statistics unsuccessful-attempts There were 3 unsuccessful login attempt(s) for user admin in last 30 day(s).
PAGE 133
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced this version of the command for the S-Series. The output for show memory displays the memory usage of LP part (sysdlp) of the system.
PAGE 134
Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Added the keywords management-unit [details]. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series.
PAGE 135
CPU utilization of sysdlp for five seconds: 20%/0%; one minute: 17%; five minutes: 18% PID Runtime(ms) Invoked uSecs 5Sec 1Min 5Min TTY Process 0xba61e020 300870 30087 10000 15.00% 16.33% 16.17% 0 KP 0xba4e4020 35720 3572 10000 4.00% 1.42% 1.35% 0 ifagt_1 0xbb206020 27380 2738 10000 1.00% 0.92% 1.07% 0 tExcTask 0xba576020 500 50 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 envmgr 0xba592020 400 40 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 lcMgr 0xba5b3020 40 4 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 dla 0xba5d5020 190 19 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.
PAGE 136
Process 0x00000000 system 0x000001ac sysdlp 0x0000019a sysd 0x000003a5 clish 0x000001ad lacp 0x000004ba clish 0x000000c9 nvmgr 0x000000e0 igmp 0x00000132 vrrp 0x0000028d ovsdbsvr 0x000000a9 arpm 0x00000253 otm 0x00000206 tnlmgr 0x00000012 mount_mfs 0x0000024d xstp DellEMC# Related Commands 45040 4504 10000 13.12% 13.20% 12.94% 0 25750 2575 10000 2.78% 2.48% 3.40% 0 10650 1065 10000 0.60% 1.16% 2.50% 0 860 86 10000 0.40% 0.22% 0.28% 0 520 52 10000 0.20% 0.30% 0.
PAGE 137
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 138
ACL0 ACL0 LACP0 DHCP0 DHCP0 DHCP0 DIFFSERV0 SNMP0 IFMGR0 ACL0 IPMGR0 IFMGR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 10 25 25 25 25 10 10 25 25 25 25 show processes memory Display memory usage information based on processes running in the S-Series or Z-Series system. Syntax show processes memory {management-unit | stack unit {unit-id | all | summary}} Parameters management-unit Enter the keyword management-unit for CPU memory usage of the stack management unit.
PAGE 139
show processes memory output Field Description CurrentFree: Total system memory available SharedUsed: Total used shared memory SharedFree: Total free shared memory PID Process ID Process Process Name ResSize Actual resident size of the process in memory Size Process test, stack, and data size Allocs Total dynamic memory allocated Frees Total dynamic memory freed Max Maximum dynamic memory allocated Current Current dynamic memory in use The output for the show process memory command d
PAGE 140
294 ospf 5468160 503808 724204 662560 78208 61644 288 dsm 6778880 1159168 39490 16564 39490 22926 287 rtm 5713920 602112 442280 198768 376024 243512 284 rip 4562944 258048 528 0 528 528 281 lacp 4673536 266240 221060 0 221060 221060 277 ipm1 4837376 380928 83788 0 83788 83788 273 acl 5005312 512000 239564 149076 123616 90488 272 topoDPC 117927936 0 0 0 0 0 271 bcmNHOP 117927936 0 0 0 0 0 270 bcmDISC 117927936 0 0 0 0 0 269 bcmATP-RX 117927936 0 0 0 0 0 268 bcmATP-TX 117927936 0 0 0 0 0 267 bcmSTACK 11792793
PAGE 141
Usage Information Example — Userinitiated reboot with the reload command Example — System reboot due to the upgrade command Example — System reboot for unknown reasons Version Description 9.14(0.0) Introduced on the S5048F-ON. 9.13(0.0) Introduced on the S3048–ON, S3100 series, S4048–ON, S4048T–ON, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, C9010, MXL, M-IOA, and FN-IOM.
PAGE 142
--------------------Type Cause Time ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------stack-unit 1 Reboot by Software 11/05/2017-09:04 stack-unit 2 Reboot by Software 11/05/2017-09:04 stack-unit 3 Cold Reset N/A stack-unit 4 N/A N/A stack-unit 5 N/A N/A stack-unit 6 N/A N/A show software ifm Display interface management (IFM) data.
PAGE 143
Example Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced for the C-Series and S-Series.
PAGE 144
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4(0.0) Added support for the disabled-ports parameter . 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.4 The brief parameter no longer displays the current Reload mode. To display Reload mode, us show reload-type command. Modified the show system stack-unit command outpu support Piece Part ID (PPID).
PAGE 145
-- Fan Status -Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan1 Speed Fan2 Speed ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 1 up up 6241 up 6456 1 2 up up 6342 up 6520 1 3 up up 6271 up 6383 1 4 up up 6281 up 6499 1 5 up up 6311 up 6425 Speed in RPM show tech-support Display a collection of data from other show commands, necessary for Dell EMC Networking technical support to perform troubleshooting.
PAGE 146
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. Without the page or stack-unit option, the command output is continuous. To interrupt the command output, use Ctrl-z. The save option works with other filtering commands. This allows you to save specific information of a show command. The save entry must always be the last option.
PAGE 147
Example(show tech-support) NOS#show tech-support ----------------------------------- show version ------------------------------Real Time Operating System Software Operating System Version: 2.0 Application Software Version: 9.14(0.0) Build Time: Sun Jul 1 13:18:39 2018 Build Path: /work/swbuild01_1/build01/E9-14-0/SW/SRC Networking OS uptime is 3 minute(s) System image file is "system://B" System Type: Z9100-ON Control Processor: Intel Rangeley with 3 Gbytes (3203289088 bytes) of memory, core(s) 4.
PAGE 148
Z9100-ON MSS FPGA : 2.1 Z9100-ON MSS IAP : 2.1 Z9100-ON OOB-FPGA : 1.0 ------------------------------------ show clock ------------------------------04:43:44.047 UTC Mon Jul 2 2018 Example(show tech-support stack-unit) DellEMC#show tech-support stack-unit 1 ------------ show version ------------Dell Real Time Operating System Software Dell Operating System Version: 2.0 Dell Application Software Version: 9-8(1-270) Copyright (c) 1999-2015 by Dell Inc.
PAGE 149
Parameters Defaults -l username (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword -l then your user name. The default is the user name associated with the terminal. Not configured. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 150
telnet Connect through Telnet to a server. The Telnet client and server in Dell EMC Networking support IPv4 and IPv6 connections. You can establish a Telnet session directly to the router or a connection can be initiated from the router. Syntax telnet {host | ip-address | ipv6-address prefix-length | vrf vrf instance name} [/source-interface] Parameters host Enter the name of a server. ip-address Enter the IPv4 address in dotted decimal format of the server.
PAGE 151
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. Added support for source-interface for link-local IPv6 addressing. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series (IPv6). Increased the number of VLANs to 4094 (was 2094). 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series (IPv4). 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF. 7.6.1.
PAGE 152
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the S-Series. terminal length Configure the number of lines displayed on the terminal screen. Syntax terminal length screen-length Parameters Defaults screen-length Enter a number of lines. Entering zero causes the terminal to display without pausing. The range is from 0 to 512. 24 lines Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 153
vrf instance (Optional) E-Series Only: Enter the keyword vrf then the VRF Instance name. ip-address Enter the IP address of the device in dotted decimal format. ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address, in the x:x:x:x::x format, to which you are testing connectivity. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
PAGE 154
Example (IPv4) DellEMC# traceroute www.Dell EMC Networking.com Translating "www.Dell EMC Networking.com"...domain server (10.11.0.1) [OK] Type Ctrl-C to abort. ----------------------------------------------Tracing the route to www.Dell EMC Networking.com (10.11.84.18), 30 hops max, 40 byte packets ----------------------------------------------TTL Hostname Probe1 Probe2 Probe3 1 10.11.199.190 001.000 ms 001.000 ms 002.000 ms 2 gwegress-sjc-02.Dell EMC Networking.com (10.11.30.126) 005.000 ms 001.000 ms 001.
PAGE 155
Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 156
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series Original command. Usage Information You can configure both IPv4 and IPv6 virtual addresses simultaneously, but only one of each. Each time this command is issued, it replaces the previously configured address of the same family, IPv4 or IPv6.
PAGE 157
terminal Enter the keyword terminal to copy the current running configuration to the terminal. This command is similar to the show running-config command. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 158
5 802.1X 802.1X is a port-based Network Access Control (PNAC) that provides an authentication mechanism to devices wishing to attach to a LAN or WLAN. Until the authentication, only extensible authentication protocol over LAN (EAPOL) traffic is allowed through the port to which a client is connected. After authentication is successful, normal traffic passes through the port. The Dell EMC Networking OS supports remote authentication dial-in service (RADIUS) and active directory environments using 802.
PAGE 159
• • • • • dot1x dot1x show show show supplicant-timeout tx-period dot1x cos-mapping interface dot1x interface dot1x profile debug dot1x Display 802.1X debugging information. Syntax Parameters debug dot1x [all | auth-pae-fsm | backend-fsm | eapol-pdu] [interface interface] all Enable all debugs in dot1x. auth-pae-fsm Enable Authentication PAE FSM debugs in dot1x. backend-fsm Enable Backend Auth FSM debugs in dot1x. eapol-pdu Enable EAPOL frame trace in dot1x.
PAGE 160
To delete the authentication failure VLAN, use the no dot1x auth-fail-vlan vlan-id [maxattempts number] command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN Identifier. The range is from 1 to 4094. max-attempts (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords max-attempts followed number of attempts desired before authentication fails. The range is from 1 to 5. The default is 3.
PAGE 161
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 162
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. The prerequisites for enabling MAB-only authentication on a port are: ● Enable 802.1X authentication globally on the switch and on the port (the dot1x authentication command). ● Enable MAC authentication bypass on the port (the dot1x mac-auth-bypass command).
PAGE 163
Related Commands ● dot1x authentication (Interface) — enable dot1x on an interface. dot1x authentication (Interface) Enable dot1x on an interface. Enable dot1x both globally and at the interface level. Syntax dot1x authentication To disable dot1x on an interface, use the no dot1x authentication command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 164
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3100 series, S4048–ON, S4048–ON, S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, the Configuration Terminal Batch mode on C9010, Z9100–ON, and Z9500. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the C9000 Series.
PAGE 165
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.
PAGE 166
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 167
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3100 series, S4048–ON, S4048–ON, S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, the Configuration Terminal Batch mode on C9010, Z9100–ON, and Z9500. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the C9010. The mac command configures a list of supplicant MAC addresses for a dot1x profile represented with a profile-name. You can configure up to 6 MAC addresses in a single mac command.
PAGE 168
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.4.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. To disable MAC authentication bypass on a port, enter the no dot1x mac-auth-bypass command. dot1x max-eap-req Configure the maximum number of times an extensive authentication protocol (EAP) request is transmitted before the session times out. Syntax dot1x max-eap-req number To return to the default, use the no dot1x max-eap-req command.
PAGE 169
Parameters Defaults number Enter the number of supplicants that can be authenticated on a single port in Multi-auth mode. The range is from 1 to 128. The default is 128. 128 hosts can be authenticated on a single authenticator port. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 170
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.6.1.
PAGE 171
Related Commands ● dot1x static-mab ● mac dot1x quiet-period Set the number of seconds that the authenticator remains quiet after a failed authentication with a client. Syntax dot1x quiet-period seconds To disable quiet time, use the no dot1x quiet-time command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter the number of seconds. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 60. 60 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 172
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 173
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. dot1x server-timeout Configure the amount of time after which exchanges with the server time-out.
PAGE 174
Ideally, the dot1x server-timeout value (in seconds) is based on the configured RADIUS-server timeout and retransmit values and calculated according to the following formula: dot1x servertimeout seconds > (radius-server retransmit seconds + 1) * radius-server timeout seconds. Where the default values are as follows: dot1x server-timeout (30 seconds), radius-server retransmit (3 seconds), and radius-server timeout (5 seconds). Example DellEMC(conf)# radius-server host 10.11.197.
PAGE 175
Auth-Fail Max-Attempts: Critical VLAN: Critical VLAN id: Mac-Auth-Bypass: Mac-Auth-Bypass Only: Static-MAB: Static-MAB Profile: Tx Period: Quiet Period: ReAuth Max: Supplicant Timeout: Server Timeout: Re-Auth Interval: Max-EAP-Req: Host Mode: Auth PAE State: Backend State: 3 Enable 400 Disable Disable Enable Sample 30 seconds 60 seconds 2 30 seconds 30 seconds 60 seconds 2 SINGLE_HOST Authenticated Idle dot1x supplicant-timeout Configure the amount of time after which exchanges with the supplicant time-ou
PAGE 176
dot1x tx-period Configure the intervals at which EAPOL PDUs the Authenticator PAE transmits. Syntax dot1x tx-period seconds To return to the default, use the no dot1x tx-period command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter the interval time, in seconds, that EAPOL PDUs are transmitted. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 30. 30 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 177
● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information. mac-address Defaults (Optional) MAC address of an 802.1X-authenticated supplicant. None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 178
802.1p CoS re-map table for Supplicant: 00:00:00:00:00:10 Dot1p 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DellEMC# Remapped Dot1p 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 show dot1x interface Display the 802.1X configuration of an interface. Syntax show dot1x interface interface [mac-address mac-address] Parameters Defaults interface Enter one of the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 179
Usage Information Example Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.4.2.1 Added the mac-address option on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series. If you enable 802.1X multi-supplicant authentication on a port, additional 802.1X configuration details (Port Authentication status, Untagged VLAN ID, Authentication PAE state, and Backend state) display for each supplicant, as shown in the following example.
PAGE 180
Untagged VLAN id: Auth PAE State: Backend State: DellEMC# 400 Authenticated Idle DellEMC# show dot1x interface tengigabitethernet 1/32/1 mac-address 00:00:00:00:00:11 Supplicant Mac: 0 0 0 0 0 10 Lookup for Mac: 802.
PAGE 181
----------------------------Dot1x Profile mySupplicants Profile MACs 00:50:56:aa:01:10 00:50:56:aa:01:11 802.
PAGE 182
6 Access Control Lists (ACL) Access control lists (ACLs) are supported by the Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 183
• • deny icmp (for Extended IPv6 ACLs) deny (for IPv6 ACLs) Commands Common to all ACL Types The following commands are available within each ACL mode and do not have mode-specific options. Some commands in this chapter may use similar names, but require different options to support the different ACL types (for example, the deny and permit commands). remark Enter a description for an ACL entry. Syntax remark remark-number description To remove a remark, use the no remark command.
PAGE 184
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The remark command is available in each ACL mode. You can configure up to 4294967291 remarks for a given IP ACL and 65536 remarks for a given MAC ACL. You can include a remark with or without a remark number. If you do not enter a remark number, the remark inherits the sequence number of the last ACL rule.
PAGE 185
● CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-STANDARD ● CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-EXTENDED Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 186
Parameters Defaults access-list-name Enter the name of a configured Standard ACL, up to 140 characters. ipv4 Enter the keyword ipv4 to configure an IPv4 access class. ipv6 Enter the keyword ipv6 to configure an IPv6 access class. Not configured. Command Modes LINE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 187
aclrange profile-name Create ACL range profiles for L4 ports. Syntax aclrange profile-name After entering the configuration mode of the ACL range, enter the following: type [inverse value] lower threshold upper-threshold Parameters Defaults profile-name Enter a valid name for the range profile. type Specify the type of the L4 port as source or destination. inverse Enter the keyword inverse followed by a value. This is used as a negative (not equal to) match.
PAGE 188
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 189
feature aclrange Enable the ACL range option. Syntax feature aclrange Use the no feature aclrange command to disable the option. Defaults None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell EMC Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.11(0.
PAGE 190
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 191
ip control-plane egress-filter Enable egress Layer 3 ACL lookup for IPv4 CPU traffic. Syntax ip control-plane egress-filter Defaults Not enabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 192
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.10.0 Introduced on the S4810. show aclrange Display the list of ACL ranges configured and ACLs using the range profiles.
PAGE 193
cam_count List the count of the CAM rules for this ACL. interface Enter the keyword interface then the one of the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 194
show ip accounting accesslists Field Description “Extended IP...” Displays the name of the IP ACL. “seq 5...” Displays the filter. If the keywords count or byte were configured in the filter, the number of packets or bytes the filter processes is displayed at the end of the line. “order 4” Displays the QoS order of priority for the ACL entry. Example Standard IP ACL Commands When you create an ACL without any rule and then apply it to an interface, the ACL behavior reflects an implicit permit.
PAGE 195
NOTE: For more information, see “Flow-based Monitoring” in the Port Monitoring section of the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide. Defaults fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments. no-drop Enter the keywords no-drop to match only the forwarded packets. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-STANDARD-ACCESS-LIST Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 196
ip access-list standard Create a standard IP access list (IP ACL) to filter based on IP address. Syntax ip access-list standard access-list-name To delete an access list, use the no ip access-list standard access-list-name command. Parameters Defaults access-list-name Enter a string up to 140 characters long as the ACL name. All IP access lists contain an implicit “deny any,” that is, if no match occurs, the packet is dropped.
PAGE 197
permit To permit packets from a specific source IP address to leave the switch, configure a filter. Syntax permit {source [mask]| any | host ip-address} [count [bytes] | log] [dscp value] [ecn value] [fragments] [monitor ] [no-drop] [order] To remove this filter, you have two choices: ● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. ● Use the no permit {source [mask] | any | host ip-address} command.
PAGE 198
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.0) Added the no-drop parameter. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Add the DSCP value for ACL matching. 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs. 8.1.1.
PAGE 199
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series (IPv6). 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series (IPv4). 7.8.1.
PAGE 200
Defaults dscp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dcsp to match to the IP DCSCP values. The range is from 0 to 63. ecn (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ecn to match to the ECN values. The range is from 0 to 3. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS order for the ACL entry. The range is from 0 to 254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower-order numbers have a higher priority). If you do not use the keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255).
PAGE 201
Usage Information The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. The following applies: ● The seq sequence-number command is applicable only in an ACL group. ● The order option works across ACL groups that are applied on an interface via the QoS policy framework. ● The order option takes precedence over seq sequence-number. ● If you do not configure sequence-number, the rules with the same order value are ordered according to their configuration order.
PAGE 202
● gt(greater than) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is greater than the specified ttl value. ● lt (less than) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is less than the specified ttl value. ● range(inclusive range of values) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that falls between the specified range of ttl values. Defaults count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets that the filter processes.
PAGE 203
Usage Information Version Description 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Added support for the noncontiguous mask and added the monitor option. 6.5.1.0 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry. The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only.
PAGE 204
net-unreachable count packet-too-big count parameter-problem count port-unreachable count source-quench count time-exceeded count For IPv6: echo count echo-reply count nd-ns count nd-na count packet-too-big count parameter-problem count time-exceeded count port-unreachable count The ICMP packets cannot be filtered using mirroring ACL. Defaults ttl Enter the keyword ttl to deny a packet based on the time to live value. The range is from 1 to 255.
PAGE 205
Usage Information Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the ttl parameter. Removed the session–ID option from the monitor parameter. 9.11(2.0P0) Added the type parameter to filter the ICMP packets based on the type and code on the S6000, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON. 9.11(0.0) Added support for session–ID to the monitor parameter. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 206
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address. ttl Enter the keyword ttl to deny a packet based on the time to live value. The range is from 1 to 255.
PAGE 207
Defaults count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry. The range is from 0 to 254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower-order numbers have a higher priority) If you did not use the keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255).
PAGE 208
Usage Information Version Description 6.5.1.0 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry. The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. For more information, see the Quality of Service section of the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide. The monitor option is relevant in the context of flow-based monitoring only. For more information, see the Port Monitoring section.
PAGE 209
Defaults any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address. ttl Enter the keyword ttl to deny a packet based on the time to live value. The range is from 1 to 255. operator Enter one of the following logical operand: ● eq(equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is equal to the specified ttl value.
PAGE 210
Usage Information Version Description 9.11(0.0) Added support for session–ID to the monitor parameter. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.0) Added the no-drop parameter. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.
PAGE 211
8 0001111101000000 1111111111111111 8000 8000 1 Total Ports: 4001 Example An ACL rule with a TCP port lt 1023 uses only one entry in the CAM. Rule# Data Mask From To 1 0000000000000000 1111110000000000 0 #Covered 1023 1024 Total Ports: 1024 Related Commands ● deny — assign a filter to deny IP traffic. ● deny tcp — assign a filter to deny TCP traffic. ip access-list extended Name (or select) an extended IP access list (IP ACL) based on IP addresses or protocols.
PAGE 212
Example Related Commands DellEMC(conf)# ip access-list extended TESTListEXTEND DellEMC(config-ext-nacl)# ● ip access-list standard — configure a standard IP access list. ● show config — display the current configuration. permit To pass IP packets meeting the filter criteria, configure a filter.
PAGE 213
no-drop Defaults Enter the keywords no-drop to match only the forwarded packets. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the ttl parameter. Removed the session–ID option from the monitor parameter. 9.11(0.
PAGE 214
permit icmp Configure a filter to allow all or specific ICMP messages. Syntax permit icmp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [type] [dscp] [message-type] [count [byte] | log] [order] [monitor] [fragments] [no-drop] To remove this filter, you have two choices: ● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. ● Use the no permit icmp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} command.
PAGE 215
Defaults order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry. The range is 0 to 254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower-order numbers have a higher priority). If you do not use the keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255). monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface.
PAGE 216
To remove this filter, you have two choices: ● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. ● Use the no permit tcp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} command. Parameters source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous.
PAGE 217
● 20 and 21 = FTP ● 25 = SMTP ● 169 = SNMP Defaults destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes.
PAGE 218
Usage Information Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Added support for non-contiguous mask and added the monitor option. Deprecated the keyword established. 6.5.10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry. The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only.
PAGE 219
● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. ● Use the no permit udp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address command. Parameters Defaults source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous.
PAGE 220
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the ttl parameter. Removed the session–ID option from the monitor parameter. 9.11(0.0) Added support for session–ID to the monitor parameter. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.
PAGE 221
5 6 7 8 0001110000000000 0001111000000000 0001111100000000 0001111101000000 1111111000000000 1111111100000000 1111111111000000 1111111111111111 7168 7680 7936 8000 7679 7935 7999 8000 512 256 64 1 Total Ports: 4001 Example An ACL rule with a TCP port lt 1023 uses only one entry in the CAM. DellEMC# Data Mask 1 0000000000000000 1111110000000000 0 From To #Covered 1023 1024 Total Ports: 1024 Related Commands ● ip access-list extended — create an extended ACL.
PAGE 222
Usage Information Version Description 7.8.1.0 Increased the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names were up to 16 characters long. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. When all sequence numbers are exhausted, this feature permits re-assigning a new sequence number to entries of an existing access-list.
PAGE 223
The following list includes some common TCP port numbers: ● 23 = Telnet ● 20 and 21 = FTP-DATA and FTP ● 25 = SMTP ● 169 = SNMP portname (OPTIONAL) Enter the logical name of the protocol.
PAGE 224
sunrpc syslog tacacs talk tftp time who xdmcp Defaults Sun Remote Procedure Call (111) System Logger (514) TAC Access Control System (49) Talk (517) Trivial File Transfer Protocol (69) Time (37) Who service (rwho, 513) X Display Manager Control Protocol (177) destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. ttl Enter the keyword ttl to permit or deny a packet based on the time to live value. The range is from 1 to 255.
PAGE 225
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.0) Added the no-drop parameter. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.
PAGE 226
Common MAC Access List Commands The following commands are available within both MAC ACL modes (Standard and Extended) and do not have mode-specific options. These commands allow you to clear, display, and assign MAC ACL configurations. The platform supports both Ingress and Egress MAC ACLs. The MAC ACL can be applied on Physical, Port-channel and VLAN interfaces. As per the specified rules in the ACL, the traffic on the interface/ VLAN members or Port-channel members will be permitted or denied.
PAGE 227
Parameters access-list-name Enter the name of a configured MAC access list, up to 140 characters. NOTE: This option is available only with the keyword in option. vlan vlan-range (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan and then enter a range of VLANs. The range is from 1 to 4094 (you can use IDs 1 to 4094). NOTE: This option is available only with the keyword in option. optimized Enter the keyword optimized to enable ACL optimization. in Enter the keyword in to configure the ACL to filter incoming traffic.
PAGE 228
Usage Information You can assign one ingress ACL and one egress ACL (standard or extended) to an interface. Related Commands ● mac access-list standard — configure a standard MAC ACL. ● mac access-list extended — configure an extended MAC ACL. show mac access-lists Display all of the Layer 2 ACLs configured in the system, whether or not they are applied to an interface, and the count of matches/mismatches against each ACL entry displayed.
PAGE 229
Version Description 8.4.1.0 Introduced. show mac accounting access-list Display MAC access list configurations and counters (if configured). Syntax Parameters show mac accounting access-list [access-list-name [cam_count | interface interface {in | out}] access-list-name Enter the name of a configured MAC ACL, up to 140 characters.
PAGE 230
Usage Information Example Version Description 7.8.1.0 Increased the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The ACL hit counters increment the counters for each matching rule, not just the first matching rule.
PAGE 231
Command Modes CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-STANDARD Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 232
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.
PAGE 233
Defaults count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to include ACL messages in the log. threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands.
PAGE 234
seq To a deny or permit filter in a MAC access list while creating the filter, assign a sequence number. Syntax deny {any | mac-source-address [mac-source-address-mask]} [count [byte]] [log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] [monitor] To remove this filter, you have two choices: ● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. ● Use the no deny {any | mac-source-address mac-source-address-mask} command.
PAGE 235
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Added the monitor option. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. When you use the log option, the CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these packets’ details.
PAGE 236
mac-destination- Specify which bits in the MAC address must match. address-mask The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask; therefore, a mask of ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows entries that match exactly. Defaults ethertype operator (OPTIONAL) To filter based on protocol type, enter one of the following Ethertypes: ● ev2 - is the Ethernet II frame format ● llc - is the IEEE 802.3 frame format ● snap - is the IEEE 802.
PAGE 237
Usage Information Version Description 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. When you use the log option, the CP processor logs detail the packets that match. Depending on how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these packets’ details. NOTE: When you configure the ACL logging and byte counters simultaneously, byte counters may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead.
PAGE 238
Usage Information Version Description 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The number of entries allowed per ACL is hardware-dependent. For detailed specifications about entries allowed per ACL, refer to your line card documentation. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long.
PAGE 239
The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask; therefore, a mask of ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows entries that match exactly. Defaults ethertype operator (OPTIONAL) To filter based on protocol type, enter one of the following Ethertypes: ● ev2 - is the Ethernet II frame format ● llc - is the IEEE 802.3 frame format ● snap - is the IEEE 802.3 SNAP frame format count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes.
PAGE 240
NOTE: When you configure the ACL logging and byte counters simultaneously, byte counters may display an incorrect value. Configure packet counters with logging instead. Related Commands ● deny — configure a MAC ACL filter to drop packets. ● seq — configure a MAC ACL filter with a specified sequence number. IP Prefix List Commands When you create an access-list without any rule and then apply it to an interface, the ACL behavior reflects implicit permit.
PAGE 241
deny To drop packets meeting the criteria specified, configure a filter. Syntax deny ip-prefix [ge min-prefix-length] [le max-prefix-length] To delete a drop filter, use the no deny ip-prefix command. Parameters ip-prefix Specify an IP prefix in the network/length format. For example, 35.0.0.0/ 8 means match the first 8 bits of address 35.0.0.0. ge min-prefix- (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ge and then enter the minimum prefix length, which is a number from zero (0) to 32.
PAGE 242
Parameters prefix-name Enter a string up to 16 characters long as the name of the prefix list, up to 140 characters long. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 243
any (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword any to match any packets. ip-prefix /nn (OPTIONAL) Specify an IP prefix in the network/length format. For example, 35.0.0.0/8 means match the first 8 bits of address 35.0.0.0. ge min-prefix- (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ge and then enter the minimum prefix length, which is a number from zero (0) to 32. length le max-prefix- length bitmask number Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword le and then enter the maximum prefix length, which is a number from zero (0) to 32.
PAGE 244
Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.
PAGE 245
Example Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Increased the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 246
Example Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Increased the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 247
Usage Information Version Description 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The continue feature allows movement from one route-map entry to a specific route-map entry (the sequence number). If you do not specify the sequence number, the continue feature simply moves to the next sequence number (also known as an implied continue). If a match clause exists, the continue feature executes only after a successful match occurs. If there are no successful matches, the continue feature is ignored.
PAGE 248
Related Commands Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. pre-7.7.1.0 Introduced. ● route-map — enable a route map. match as-path To match routes that have a certain AS number in their BGP path, configure a filter. Syntax match as-path as-path-name To delete a match AS path filter, use the no match as-path as-path-name command.
PAGE 249
Related Commands ● set as-path — add information to the BGP AS_PATH attribute. match community To match routes that have a certain COMMUNITY attribute in their BGP path, configure a filter. Syntax match community community-list-name [exact] To delete a community match filter, use the no match community command. Parameters Defaults community-listname Enter the name of a configured community list. exact (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords exact to process only those routes with this community list name.
PAGE 250
Parameters Defaults interface Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 251
match ip address To match routes based on IP addresses specified in an access list, configure a filter. Syntax match ip address prefix-list-name To delete a match, use the no match ip address prefix-list-name command. Parameters Defaults prefix-list-name Enter the name of configured prefix list, up to 140 characters. Not configured. Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 252
Parameters Defaults prefix-list prefix- Enter the keywords prefix-list and then enter the name of configured prefix list-name list, up 10 140 characters. Not configured. Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 253
Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 254
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.
PAGE 255
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 256
Related Commands Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● ● ● ● ● ● match match match match match match interface — redistribute routes that match the next-hop interface.
PAGE 257
Related Commands Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● ● ● ● ● ● match match match match match match interface — redistribute routes that match the next-hop interface. ip address — redistribute routes that match an IP address. ip next-hop — redistribute routes that match the next-hop IP address.
PAGE 258
Usage Information Example Related Commands Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Increased the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 259
Usage Information Related Commands Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. You can prepend up to eight AS numbers to a BGP route. This command influences best path selection in BGP by inserting a tag or AS number into the AS_PATH attribute.
PAGE 260
Related Commands ● ● ● ● set set set set level — specify the OSPF area for route redistribution. metric — specify the metric value assigned to redistributed routes. metric-type — specify the metric type assigned to redistributed routes. tag — specify the tag assigned to redistributed routes. set comm-list delete To remove the specified community list from the BGP route’s COMMUNITY attribute, configure a filter.
PAGE 261
Related Commands ● match community — redistribute routes that match the COMMUNITY attribute. ● set community — specify a COMMUNITY attribute. set community Allows you to assign a BGP COMMUNITY attribute. Syntax set community {community-number | local-as | no-advertise | no-export | none} [additive] To delete a BGP COMMUNITY attribute assignment, use the no set community {communitynumber | local-as | no-advertise | no-export | none} command.
PAGE 262
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● match community — redistribute routes that match the COMMUNITY attribute. ● show ip bgp community — display BGP community groups. set level To specify the IS-IS level or OSPF area to which matched routes are redistributed, configure a filter.
PAGE 263
Related Commands Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● ● ● ● set set set set automatic-tag — compute the tag value of the route. metric — specify the metric value assigned to redistributed routes. metric-type — specify the metric type assigned to redistributed routes. tag — specify the tag assigned to redistributed routes.
PAGE 264
Usage Information The set local-preference command changes the LOCAL_PREF attribute for routes meeting the route map criteria. To change the LOCAL_PREF for all routes, use the bgp default localpreference command. Related Commands ● bgp default local-preference — change the default LOCAL_PREF attribute for all routes. set metric To assign a new metric to redistributed routes, configure a filter. Syntax set metric [+ | -] metric-value To delete a setting, enter no set metric.
PAGE 265
set metric-type To assign a new route type for routes redistributed to OSPF, configure a filter. Syntax set metric-type {internal | external | type-1 | type-2} To delete a setting, use the no set metric-type command. Parameters Defaults internal Enter the keyword internal to assign the Interior Gateway Protocol metric of the next hop as the route’s BGP MULTI_EXIT_DES (MED) value. external Enter the keyword external to assign the IS-IS external metric.
PAGE 266
To delete the setting, use the no set next-hop ip-address command. Parameters Defaults ip-address Specify an IP address in dotted decimal format. Not configured. Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 267
Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.
PAGE 268
Related Commands Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● ● ● ● set set set set automatic-tag — compute the tag value of the route.
PAGE 269
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. If you do not use the set weight command, router-originated paths have a weight attribute of 32768 and all other paths have a weight attribute of zero.
PAGE 270
seq 25 permit 192.0.0.0 bitmask 192.0.0.0 DellEMC(conf-nprefixl)# show route-map Display the current route map configurations. Syntax show route-map [map-name] Parameters map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a configured route map, up to 140 characters. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example Related Commands 270 This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 271
deny (for Standard IP ACLs) To drop packets with a certain IP address, configure a filter. Syntax deny {source | any | host {ip-address}}[count [byte]] [dscp value] [order] [fragments] [log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] [monitor] To remove this filter, you have two choices: ● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. ● Use the no deny {source [mask] | any | host ip-address} command.
PAGE 272
that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic. You may specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists.
PAGE 273
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the ttl parameter. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 274
Defaults interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly.
PAGE 275
deny tcp (for Extended IP ACLs) Configure a filter that drops transmission control protocol (TCP) packets meeting the filter criteria.
PAGE 276
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.4(0.0) Added the support for flow-based monitoring on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000 platforms. 9.3(0.0) Added the support for logging of ACLs on the S4810, S4820T, and Z9000 platforms. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
PAGE 277
The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-STANDARD Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100.
PAGE 278
● Use the no deny {any | host mac-address | mac-source-address mac-sourceaddress-mask} {any | host mac-address | mac-destination-address macdestination-address-mask} command. Parameters Defaults log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated.
PAGE 279
packets on one port and forwards (mirrors) them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG). Related Commands ● permit — configure a MAC address filter to pass packets. ● seq — configure a MAC address filter with a specified sequence number. permit (for Standard IP ACLs) To permit packets from a specific source IP address to leave the switch, configure a filter.
PAGE 280
and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval. If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs.
PAGE 281
Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-STANDARD-ACCESS-LIST Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.
PAGE 282
Parameters Defaults ttl Enter the keyword ttl to permit a packet based on the time to live value. The range is from 1 to 255. operator Enter one of the following logical operand: ● eq(equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is equal to the specified ttl value. ● neq(not equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is not equal to the specified ttl value. ● gt(greater than) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is greater than the specified ttl value.
PAGE 283
If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs. You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces.
PAGE 284
The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the ttl parameter. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148.
PAGE 285
● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. ● Use the no permit {any | mac-source-address mac-source-address-mask} command. Parameters Defaults log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
PAGE 286
Related Commands ● deny — configure a MAC ACL filter to drop packets. ● seq —configure a MAC ACL filter with a specified sequence number. seq (for Standard MAC ACLs) To a deny or permit filter in a MAC access list while creating the filter, assign a sequence number. Syntax seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {any | mac-source-address [mac-sourceaddress-mask]} [count [byte]] [log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] [monitor] To remove this filter, use the no seq sequence-number command.
PAGE 287
You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode. When you enable this capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface.
PAGE 288
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the ttl parameter. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 289
● eq(equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is equal to the specified ttl value. ● neq(not equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is not equal to the specified ttl value. ● gt(greater than) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is greater than the specified ttl value. ● lt (less than) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is less than the specified ttl value.
PAGE 290
You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode. When you enable this capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface.
PAGE 291
The following list includes some common TCP port numbers: ● 23 = Telnet ● 20 and 21 = FTP-DATA and FTP ● 25 = SMTP ● 169 = SNMP portname (OPTIONAL) Enter the logical name of the protocol.
PAGE 292
sunrpc syslog tacacs talk tftp time who xdmcp Defaults Sun Remote Procedure Call (111) System Logger (514) TAC Access Control System (49) Talk (517) Trivial File Transfer Protocol (69) Time (37) Who service (rwho, 513) X Display Manager Control Protocol (177) destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count the packets. bytes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bytes to count the bytes.
PAGE 293
You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode. When you enable this capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface.
PAGE 294
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the ttl parameter. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 295
host ipv6- address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address. destination address Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host to which the packets are sent.
PAGE 296
which the generation of ACL logs is terminated. with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. Defaults interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface.
PAGE 297
permit icmp (for IPv6 ACLs) To allow all or specific internet control message protocol (ICMP) messages, configure a filter. Syntax permit icmp {source address mask | any | host ipv6-address} {destination address | any | host ipv6-address} [type] [message-type] [ttl operator] [count [byte]] [log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] [monitor] To remove this filter, you have two choices: ● Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
PAGE 298
● lt (less than) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is less than the specified ttl value. ● range(inclusive range of values) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that falls between the specified range of ttl values. Defaults count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
PAGE 299
You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering theflow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode. When you enable this capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface.
PAGE 300
Usage Information Version Description 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000 platforms. 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the S4810, S4820T, and Z9000 platforms. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
PAGE 301
the generation of ACL logs is terminated. with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. Defaults interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The threshold range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface.
PAGE 302
deny tcp (for IPv6 ACLs) Configure a filter that drops TCP packets that match the filter criteria.
PAGE 303
● eq(equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is equal to the specified ttl value. ● neq(not equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is not equal to the specified ttl value. ● gt(greater than) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is greater than the specified ttl value. ● lt (less than) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is less than the specified ttl value.
PAGE 304
and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval. If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs.
PAGE 305
For IPv6: echo count echo-reply count nd-ns count nd-na count packet-too-big count parameter-problem count time-exceeded count port-unreachable count The ICMP packets cannot be filtered using mirroring ACL. Defaults ttl Enter the keyword ttl to deny a packet based on the time to live value. The range is from 1 to 255. operator Enter one of the following logical operand: ● eq(equal to) — matches packets that contain a ttl value that is equal to the specified ttl value.
PAGE 306
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000 platforms. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.3.0.0 Added support for logging of ACLs on the S4810, S4820T, and Z9000 platforms. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
PAGE 307
Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes ACCESS-LIST Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.
PAGE 308
7 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) Bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) is a detection protocol that provides fast forwarding path failure detection.
PAGE 309
Command Modes ROUTER OSPF ROUTER OSPFv3 ROUTER BGP ROUTER ISIS Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.13(0.0) Introduced support for enabling BFD on non-default VRFs for IPv4 BGP, default, and non-default VRFs for IPv6 BGP on the S3100 series, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, C9010, Z9500, and Z9100–ON. 9.11(2.
PAGE 310
disable values configured with the bfd neighbor command or configured for the peer group to which a neighbor belongs. The neighbors inherit only the global timer values (configured with the bfd neighbor command). You can only enable BFD for VRRP in INTERFACE command mode (vrrp bfd all-neighbors). You can enable BFD on both default and nondefault VRFs for OSPF and BGP protocols for both IPv4 and IPv6 neighbors. NOTE: The bfd all-neighbors command is applicable for both IPv4 and IPv6 BGP sessions.
PAGE 311
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.10.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 312
bfd interval Specify non-default BFD session parameters beginning with the transmission interval. Syntax bfd interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role {active | passive} Parameters interval milliseconds min_rx milliseconds Enter the keywords interval to specify non-default BFD session parameters beginning with the transmission interval. The range is from 50 to 1000. The default is 200. Dell EMC recommends using more than 100 milliseconds.
PAGE 313
bfd protocol-liveness Enable the BFD protocol liveness feature. Syntax bfd protocol-liveness Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.
PAGE 314
role [active | passive] Enter the role that the local system assumes: ● Active — active system initiates the BFD session. Both systems can be active for the same session. ● Passive — passive system does not initiate a session. It only responds to a request for session initialization from the active system. The default is Active. Defaults See Parameters. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 315
min_rx milliseconds Enter the keywords min_rx to specify the minimum rate at which the local system receives control packets from the remote system. The range is from 50 to 1000. The default is 200. multiplier value Enter the keyword multiplier to specify the number of packets that must be missed in order to declare a session down. The range is from 3 to 50. The default is 3. role [active | passive] Enter the role that the local system assumes: ● Active — active system initiates the BFD session.
PAGE 316
multiplier value Enter the keyword multiplier to specify the number of packets that must be missed in order to declare a session down. The range is from 3 to 50. The default is 3. role [active | passive] Enter the role that the local system assumes: ● Active — active system initiates the BFD session. Both systems can be active for the same session. ● Passive — passive system does not initiate a session. It only responds to a request for session initialization from the active system.
PAGE 317
multiplier value Enter the keywords multiplier to specify the number of packets that must be missed in order to declare a session down. The range is from 3 to 50. The default is 3. role [active | passive] Enter the role that the local system assumes: ● Active — active system initiates the BFD session. Both systems can be active for the same session. ● Passive — passive system does not initiate a session. It only responds to a request for session initialization from the active system.
PAGE 318
Defaults See Parameters. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on Z9000. 8.3.
PAGE 319
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.3 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 320
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.3 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 321
Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(2.1P1) Introduced the vrf keyword on all the remaining Dell EMC Networking OS platforms. 9.10(0.2) Introduced the vrf keyword on the S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S6010– ON, Z9100–ON, and S6100–ON. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.
PAGE 322
O O3 R M V VT - OSPF OSPFv3 Static Route (RTM) MPLS VRRP Vxlan Tunnel LocalAddr VRF Clients * 13::1 R Example (Detail) RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult 13::2 Te 1/1/1 Up 200 200 3 2 * 23::1 R 23::2 Vl 300 Up 200 200 3 2 * 33::1 R 33::2 Vl 301 Up 200 200 3 2 * 13.1.1.1 R 13.1.1.2 Te 1/1/ Up 200 200 3 2 * 23.1.1.1 R 23.1.1.2 Vl 300 Up 200 200 3 2 * 33.1.1.1 R 33.1.1.
PAGE 323
TX: 200ms, RX: 200ms, Multiplier: 3 Actual parameters: TX: 200ms, RX: 200ms, Multiplier: 3 Role: Active Delete session on Down: True VRF: VRF_blue Client Registered: OSPF Uptime: 00:00:15 Statistics: Number of packets received from neighbor: 78 Number of packets sent to neighbor: 78 Number of state changes: 1 Number of messages from IFA about port state change: 0 Number of messages communicated b/w Manager and Agent: 4 Session Discriminator: 6 Neighbor Discriminator: 1 Local Addr: 7.1.1.
PAGE 324
Related Commands 324 Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.10.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.5.1.0 Added support for VLAN and port-channel interfaces on the E-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 325
8 Boot Command Line Interface To access this BOOT_USER mode, first boot your Dell EMC Networking platform. When you see the “Press ESC to stop auto-boot”, press the ESC key to log into BCLI You enter BOOT_USER mode immediately, as indicated by the BOOT_USER# prompt. NOTE: All commands in this chapter are in Boot_User mode. These commands are supported on the Dell EMC Networking platform. You cannot use the Tab key to complete commands in this mode.
PAGE 326
Command History Usage Information Version Descriptiion 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. After entering the boot change command and selecting the parameters, press Enter. The software prompts you to enter the following: ● The boot device (flash, ftp, tftp, or usbflash), image file name, IP address of the server containing the image, username, and password (only for ftp).
PAGE 327
Command History Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. BOOT_USER #boot message boot messages off BOOT_USER # boot show net config retries Show the number of retries for network boot configuration failure. Syntax boot show net config retries Command Modes BOOT_USER Command History Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.0.2.
PAGE 328
boot zero Erase the configured primary, secondary, or default boot image parameters. If you erase all three parameters, the S6000 switch boots from its internal Flash. Syntax boot zero {primary | secondary | default} Parameters Defaults primary Enter the keyword primary to remove the primary boot parameter. secondary Enter the keyword secondary to remove the secondary boot parameter. default Enter the keyword default to remove the default boot parameter.
PAGE 329
Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the gateway router in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). Command Modes BOOT_USER Command History Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. Usage Information Use the show default-gateway command to view the current default gateway. Related Commands show_default-gateway— Change the primary, secondary, or default boot image configuration.
PAGE 330
Usage Information When you enter the reload command and the system reboots, you will not be prompted for a password to enter the EXEC Privilege mode (normally you are required to enter the enable command). If your console or Telnet session expires after you used the ignore enable-password command, you are prompted for an enable password when you re-establish the session Related Commands reload — Exit from this mode and reload FTOS.
PAGE 331
NVRAM erase Erase all NVRAM contents alone. Syntax Parameters nvram erase mac-address Enter a MAC address in standard format. Command Modes BOOT_ADMIN Command History Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. Use this command to assign a MAC address if FTOS cannot find a default MAC address. BOOT_USER # BOOT_ADMIN # nvram erase Are you sure (y/n)? : yes Erasing NVRAM sectors....
PAGE 332
Command Modes BOOT_USER Command History Example Serial Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. BOOT_USER # serial console 0 9600 BOOT_USER # BOOT_USER # show bootvar Display boot configuration information. Syntax show bootvar Command Modes BOOT_USER Command History Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000.
PAGE 333
show default-gateway Display the IP address configured for the default gateway. Syntax show default-gateway Command Modes BOOT_USER Command History Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. BOOT_USER # show default-gateway Gateway IP address: 10.16.100.254 BOOT_USER # Related Commands default-gateway— Configure the IP address for the default gateway.
PAGE 334
show serial console baud rate Use the show serial console to show the values of the serial console baud rate. Syntax show serial console baudrate Command Modes BOOT_USER Command History Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. BOOT_USER # show serial console baudrate Serial console baudrate = 9600 watchdog Enable the watchdog timer, when the enabled watchdog timer is set to 60 seconds.
PAGE 335
WATCHDOG TIMEOUT: 60 Boot Command Line Interface 335
PAGE 336
9 Border Gateway Protocol BGP is an external gateway protocol that transmits interdomain routing information within and between autonomous systems (AS). BGP version 4 (BGPv4) supports classless inter-domain routing (CIDR) and the aggregation of routes and AS paths. Basically, two routers (called neighbors or peers) exchange information including full routing tables and periodically sent messages to update those routing tables.
PAGE 337
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for IPv6 VRF. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 6.5.1.
PAGE 338
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 339
Command Modes ● ROUTER BGP ● ROUTER BGP-address-family Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.
PAGE 340
Usage Information Version Description 8.2.1.0 Introduced command. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Any update without a MED attribute is the least preferred route. If you enable this command, use the clear ip bgp * command to recompute the best path. bgp asnotation Allows you to implement a method for AS number representation in the command line interface (CLI).
PAGE 341
DellEMC(conf)#router bgp 1 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# bgp asnotation asdot+ DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# ex DellEMC(conf)#do show run | grep bgp router bgp 1 bgp four-octet-as-support bgp asnotation asdot+ DellEMC(conf)#router bgp 1 DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# bgp asnotation asplain DellEMC(conf-router_bgp)# ex DellEMC(conf)#do show run |grep bgp router bgp 1 bgp four-octet-as-support DellEMC(conf)# Related Commands ● bgp four-octet-as-support — enable 4-byte support for the BGP process.
PAGE 342
bgp bestpath as-path multipath-relax Include prefixes received from different AS paths during multipath calculation. Syntax bgp bestpath as-path multipath-relax To return to the default BGP routing process, use the no bgp bestpath as-path multipathrelax command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 343
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. The software compares the MEDs only if the path contains no external autonomous system numbers.
PAGE 344
bgp bestpath router-id ignore Do not compare router-id information for external paths during best path selection. Syntax bgp bestpath router-id ignore To return to the default selection, use the no bgp bestpath router-id ignore command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 345
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 346
Usage Information Version Description 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. When a BGP cluster contains only one route reflector, the cluster ID is the route reflector’s router ID. For redundancy, a BGP cluster may contain two or more route reflectors. Assign a cluster ID with the bgp cluster-id command. Without a cluster ID, the route reflector cannot recognize route updates from the other route reflectors within the cluster.
PAGE 347
The autonomous systems configured in this command are visible to the EBGP neighbors. Each autonomous system is fully meshed and contains a few connections to other autonomous systems. The next hop, MED, and local preference information is preserved throughout the confederation. Dell EMC Networking OS accepts confederation EBGP peers without a LOCAL_PREF attribute. The software sends AS_CONFED_SET and accepts AS_CONFED_SET and AS_CONF_SEQ.
PAGE 348
Usage Information All the routers in the Confederation must be 4 byte or 2 byte identified routers. You cannot mix them. The autonomous systems configured in this command are visible to the EBGP neighbors. Each autonomous system is fully meshed and contains a few connections to other autonomous systems. After specifying autonomous systems numbers for the BGP confederation, recycle the peers to update their configuration. Related Commands ● bgp confederation identifier — configure a confederation ID.
PAGE 349
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. If you enter the bgp dampening command, the default values for half-life, reuse, suppress, and max-suppress-time are applied.
PAGE 350
Usage Information All routers apply the bgp default local-preference command setting within the AS. To set the local preference for a specific route, use the set local-preference command in ROUTE-MAP mode. Related Commands ● set local-preference — assign a local preference value for a specific route. bgp dmzlink-bw Enables BGP Link Bandwidth. Syntax bgp dmzlink-bw To disable BGP Link Bandwidth, enter the no bgp dmzlink-bw command.
PAGE 351
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.
PAGE 352
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. The bgp fast-external-fallover command appears in the show config command output.
PAGE 353
For more information about using the 2 byte or 4-byte format, refer to the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide. This command automatically restarts the BGP instance for the configuration to take effect. bgp graceful-restart To support graceful restart as a receiver only, enable graceful restart on a BGP neighbor, a BGP node, or designate a local router.
PAGE 354
bgp non-deterministic-med Compare MEDs of paths from different autonomous systems. Syntax bgp non-deterministic-med To return to the default, use the no bgp non-deterministic-med command. Defaults Disabled (that is, paths/routes for the same destination but from different ASs do not have their MEDs compared). Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 355
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell EMC Networking OS version history for this command. Usage Information Version Description 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. The updates are sent to all the neighbors in the peer-group and all the neighbors have the same attributes including next-hop.
PAGE 356
The clear ip bgp command is required for this command to take effect and to keep the BGP database consistent. Execute the clear ip bgp command right after executing this command. Related Commands ● clear ip bgp — clear the ip bgp. bgp redistribute-internal Redistribute internal Border Gateway Protocol (iBGP) routes into and IGP such as OSPF and IS-IS. Syntax bgp redistribute-internal To disable iBGP redistribution, use the no bgp redistribute-internal command. Defaults Not configured.
PAGE 357
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 358
bgp router-id Assign a user-given ID to a BGP router. Syntax bgp router-id ip-address To delete a user-assigned IP address, use the no bgp router-id command. Parameters Defaults ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format to reset only that BGP neighbor. The router ID is the highest IP address of the Loopback interface or, if no Loopback interfaces are configured, the highest IP address of a physical interface on the router.
PAGE 359
A.B.C.D Enter the BGP neighbor address in the A.B.C.D format to clear. X:X:X:X::X Enter the BGP neighbor address in the X:X:X:X::X format to clear. soft (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword soft to configure and activate policies without resetting the BGP TCP session, that is, BGP Soft Reconfiguration. NOTE: If you enter the clear ip bgp ip-address soft command, both inbound and outbound policies are reset. in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to activate only inbound policies.
PAGE 360
clear ip bgp dampening Clear information on route dampening and return the suppressed route to the Active state. Syntax clear ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [ipv4 [multicast | unicast] | ipv6 unicast] [dampening [ipv4-address mask | ipv6–address mask] Parameters ipv4-address mask (OPTIONAL) Enter an IPv4 address in dotted decimal format and the prefix mask in slash format (/x) to clear dampening information only that BGP neighbor.
PAGE 361
Parameters ipv4-address mask (OPTIONAL) Enter an IPv4 address in dotted decimal format and the prefix mask in slash format (/x) to reset only that prefix. ipv6–address mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the IPv6 address followed by the network mask to reset only that prefix. filter-list as- (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords filter-list then the name of a configured AS-PATH list. path-name regexp regular- expression (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword regexp then regular expressions.
PAGE 362
clear ip bgp peer-group Reset a peer-group’s BGP sessions. Syntax clear ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] peer-group peer-group-name [ipv4 [multicast | unicast] | ipv6 unicast] [soft {in | out}] Parameters peer-group-name Enter the peer group name to reset the BGP sessions within that peer group. ipv4 multicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv4 followed by the keyword multicast to reset ipv4 multicast routes.
PAGE 363
To disable all BGP debugging, use the no debug ip bgp command. Parameters vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF to debug BGP information corresponding to that VRF. NOTE: Use this attribute to debug BGP protocol operations corresponding to either a default or non-default VRF. A.B.C.D Enter the IPv4 address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. X:X:X:X::X (OPTIONAL) Enter an IPv6 address.
PAGE 364
Usage Information Version Description 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. To view information on both incoming and outgoing routes, do not include the in and out parameters in the debugging command. The in and out parameters cancel each other; for example, if you enter the debug ip bgp in command and then enter the debug ip bgp out command, you do not see information on the incoming routes.
PAGE 365
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced IPv6 MGBP support for the E-Series. debug ip bgp events Display information on local BGP state changes and other BGP events. Syntax debug ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [A.B.C.
PAGE 366
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. To remove all configured debug commands for BGP, enter the no debug ip bgp command. debug ip bgp keepalives Display information about BGP keepalive messages. Syntax debug ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [A.B.C.D | X:X:X:X::X | peer-group peer-groupname] keepalives [in | out] To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [A.B.C.
PAGE 367
Usage Information To remove all configured debug commands for BGP, enter the no debug ip bgp command. debug ip bgp notifications Allows you to view information about BGP notifications received from neighbors. Syntax debug ip bgp [A.B.C.D | X:X:X:X::X | peer-group peer-group-name] notifications [in | out] To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [A.B.C.D | X:X:X:X::X | peer-group peer-group-name] notifications [in | out] command. Parameters A.B.C.
PAGE 368
debug ip bgp soft-reconfiguration Enable soft-reconfiguration debug. Syntax debug ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [A.B.C.D | X:X:X:X::X | peer-group-name] softreconfiguration To disable, use the debug ip bgp [A.B.C.D | X:X:X:X::X | peer-group-name] softreconfiguration command. Parameters A.B.C.D (OPTIONAL) Enter the IPv4 address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. X:X:X:X::X (OPTIONAL) Enter an IPv6 address.
PAGE 369
debug ip bgp updates Allows you to view information about BGP updates. Syntax debug ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [A.B.C.D | X:X:X:X::X | peer-group peer-groupname] updates [in | out | prefix-list prefix-list-name] To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [A.B.C.D | X:X:X:X::X | peer-group peer-group-name] updates [in | out | prefix-list prefix-listname] command.
PAGE 370
Usage Information To remove all configured debug commands for BGP, enter the no debug ip bgp command. default-metric Allows you to change the metric of redistributed routes to locally originated routes. Use this command with the redistribute command. Syntax default-metric number To return to the default setting, use the no default-metric command. Parameters Defaults number Enter a number as the metric to be assigned to routes from other protocols. The range is from 1 to 4294967295.
PAGE 371
To disable this setting, enter the no deny bandwidth command. Parameters Defaults bandwidth Enter the keyword bandwidth to specify extended-community attribute as the matching criteria for denying traffic. The range is from 0 to 102400. N/A Command Modes EXTENDED COMMUNITY LIST Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 372
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-7.7.1.0 Introduced. ● router bgp — enter ROUTER mode on the switch. maximum-paths Configure the maximum number of parallel routes (multipath support) BGP supports. Syntax maximum-paths {ebgp | ibgp} number To return to the default values, enter the no maximum-paths command.
PAGE 373
Usage Information Version Description 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. If you enable this command, use the clear ip bgp * command to recompute the best path. neighbor activate This command allows the specified neighbor/peer group to be enabled for the current AFI/SAFI (Address Family Identifier/ Subsequent Address Family Identifier). Syntax neighbor [ip-address | peer-group-name] activate To disable, use the no neighbor [ip-address | peer-group-name] activate command.
PAGE 374
NOTE: The no neighbor peer ip-address activate command takes precedence over the no neighbor peer-group-name activate command. The following tables list the neighbor activation and its expected results for IPv4 and IPv6 address families: Table 1. Neighbor activation and update status for peers activated for IPv4 address family S.No Peer – IPv4 address family Peer group Update status for IPv4 prefixes 1. Activate Activate Send Updates 2. Activate No-Activate Send Updates 3.
PAGE 375
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 376
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. neighbor advertisement-start To send BGP routing updates, set the minimum interval before starting. Syntax neighbor {ip-address} advertisement-start seconds To return to the default value, use the no neighbor {ip-address} advertisement-start command.
PAGE 377
neighbor allowas-in Set the number of times an AS number can occur in the AS path. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} allowas-in number To return to the default value, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} allowas-in command. Parameters ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to set the advertisement interval for all routers in the peer group.
PAGE 378
Parameters ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to set the default route of all routers in that peer group. route-map map- name Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map then the name of a configured route map. Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 379
neighbor description Assign a character string describing the neighbor or group of neighbors (peer group). Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} description text To delete a description, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} description command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group. text Defaults Enter a continuous text string up to 80 characters. Not configured.
PAGE 380
If the prefix list is not configured, the default is permit (to allow all routes). Defaults in Enter the keyword in to distribute only inbound traffic. out Enter the keyword out to distribute only outbound traffic. Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.
PAGE 381
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 382
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced Usage Information When you enable failover, BGP keeps track of IP or IPv6 ability to reach the peer remote address and the peer local address.
PAGE 383
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. If a local-as is configured, BGP does not allow for the configuration of BGP confederation. Similarly, if BGP confederation is configured, then BGP does not allow the configuration of local-as. This command automatically restarts the neighbor session for the configuration to take effect.
PAGE 384
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 385
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. This command automatically restarts the neighbor session for the configuration to take effect. Configure the same password on both BGP peers or a connection does not occur.
PAGE 386
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 387
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 388
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.0 Introduced the limit keyword on the S4810. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series.
PAGE 389
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Added 4-byte support. To accept 4-byte formats before entering a 4 byte AS Number, configure your system.
PAGE 390
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Added 4-byte support. Applies to EBGP neighbors only. Configure your system to accept 4-byte formats before entering a 4 byte AS Number. If the AS-PATH contains both public and private AS number or contains AS numbers of an EBGP neighbor, the private AS numbers are not removed.
PAGE 391
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. When you apply a route map to outbound routes, only routes that match at least one section of the route map are permitted.
PAGE 392
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. A route reflector reflects routes to the neighbors assigned to the cluster. Neighbors in the cluster do not need not to be fully meshed. By default, when you use no route reflector, the internal BGP (IBGP) speakers in the network must be fully meshed.
PAGE 393
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. Version 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. To configure a COMMUNITY attribute, use the set community command in ROUTE-MAP mode.
PAGE 394
Usage Information Related Commands Version Description 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Peers that are enabled within a peer group are disabled when their peer group is disabled. The neighbor shutdown command terminates all BGP sessions on the BGP neighbor or BGP peer group. Use this command with caution as it terminates the specified BGP sessions. When a neighbor or peer group is shut down, use the show ip bgp summary command to confirm its status.
PAGE 395
Usage Information This command enables soft-reconfiguration for the BGP neighbor specified. BGP stores all the updates the neighbor receives but does not reset the peer-session. You cannot set this configuration for a peer that is associated with a peer group. Similarly, you cannot associate a peer to a peer group if that peer is already configured with these settings. CAUTION: Inbound update storage is a memory-intensive operation.
PAGE 396
Usage Information Version Description 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Timer values configured with the neighbor timers command override the timer values configured with any other command.
PAGE 397
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to disable all routers within the peer group. interface Defaults Enter the keyword loopback then a number of the Loopback interface. The range is from 0 to 16383. Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 398
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 399
● ● ● ● set set set set metric next-hop origin weight If the route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes). Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 400
network backdoor Specify this IGP route as the preferred route. Syntax network ip-address mask backdoor To remove a network, use the no network ip-address mask backdoor command. Parameters ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format of the network. mask Enter the mask of the IP address in the slash prefix length format (for example, / 24). The mask appears in command outputs in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). Defaults Not configured.
PAGE 401
Command Modes EXTENDED COMMUNITY LIST Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 402
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.
PAGE 403
route-map map- name Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of a configured route map. Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 404
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 405
Use the no shutdown address-family-ipv4–unicast command to enable all the configured BGP neighbors corresponding to the multicast IPv4 address families. Command Modes ROUTER BGP CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version Description 9.11.0.0 Introduced on the S-Series, Z-Series, MXL, and IOM. You can use this command to disable all the configured BGP neighbors corresponding to the multicast IPv4 address families. This command is global for all VRFs.
PAGE 406
set extcommunity bandwidth Enables you to set extended community bandwidth. Syntax set extcommunity bandwidth To disable extended community bandwidth, enter the no set extcommunity bandwidth command. Parameters Defaults bandwidth Enter the keyword bandwidth to enable extended community bandwidth. The range is from 0 to 102400. N/A Command Modes ROUTER MAP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 407
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced.
PAGE 408
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.
PAGE 409
cluster-list cluster-id community communitynumber community-list community-listname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cluster-list then the cluster-ID to display the routes matching the cluster. (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword community then the community–number to display the routes matching the communities. (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword community-list then the community–list– name to display the routes matching the community–list.
PAGE 410
Usage Information Version Description 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.0 Added the add-path option to the S4810. Output on the S4810 shows the ADDPATH parameters. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 411
Origin IGP, Metric 0, LocalPref Extended Communities : DMZ-Link Bw: 2000 kbytes* 100, Weight 0, internal Following is the example for displaying all the received routes from all IPv4 neighbors: DellEMC# show ip bgp vrf test ipv4 unicast neighbors all received-routes BGP local RIB : Routes to be Added 0, Replaced 0, Withdrawn 0 BGP local router ID is 1.1.1.
PAGE 412
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● show ip bgp dampened-paths — view BGP routes that are dampened (non-active). show ip bgp extcommunity-list — view information on all routes with Extended Community attributes. show ip bgp filter-list — view the routes that match the filter lists. show ip bgp flap-statistics — view flap statistics on BGP routes. show ip bgp neighbors — allow you to view the information BGP neighbors exchange.
PAGE 413
Usage Information Example Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. The following describes the show ip bgp cluster-list command shown in the following example. Field Description Network Displays the destination network prefix of each BGP route. Next Hop Displays the next hop address of the BGP router. If 0.0.0.
PAGE 414
ipv6 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv6 followed by the keyword unicast to view information related only to ipv6 unicast routes. communitynumber Enter the community number in AA:NN format where AA is the AS number (2 bytes) and NN is a value specific to that autonomous system. You can specify up to eight community numbers to view information on those community groups. local-AS Enter the keywords local-AS to view all routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED.
PAGE 415
The following describes the show ip bgp community command shown in the following example. Example Field Description Network Displays the destination network prefix of each BGP route. Next Hop Displays the next hop address of the BGP router. If 0.0.0.0 is listed in this column, then local routes exist in the routing table. Metric Displays the BGP route’s metric, if assigned. LocPrf Displays the BGP LOCAL_PREF attribute for the route. Weight Displays the route’s weight.
PAGE 416
Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 417
Not advertised to any peer Received from : 172.16.0.2 (172.16.0.2) AS_PATH : 200 Best Next-Hop : 172.16.0.2, Cost : 0 Origin IGP, Metric 4294967295 (Default), LocalPref Communities : 200:1 1000:1 DellEMC# 100, Weight 0, external 3000:1 show ip bgp dampened-paths View BGP routes that are dampened (non-active).
PAGE 418
Usage Information Version Description 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. To determine a BGP session flap, both a route-down event and a subsequent route-up event corresponding to a single route are considered. As a result, a flap event is penalized only one time during the route-down event. The subsequent route-up event corresponding to the same route is not considered as a flap and is not penalized.
PAGE 419
Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced.
PAGE 420
show ip bgp extcommunity-list View information on all routes with Extended Community attributes. Syntax show ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [ipv4 {multicast | unicast} | ipv6 unicast] extcommunity-list [list name] Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords vrf and then the name of the VRF to view information on all routes with extended community attributes corresponding to that VRF.
PAGE 421
Example DellEMC# show run extcommunity-list ! ip extcommunity-list ecl1 permit rt 100:4 permit soo 40:4 DellEMC#show ip bgp extcommunity-list ecl1 BGP local RIB : Routes to be Added 0, Replaced 0, Withdrawn 0 BGP local router ID is 192.168.11.
PAGE 422
Usage Information Example Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. The following describes the show ip bgp filter-list hello command shown in the following example.
PAGE 423
ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv4 followed by the keyword unicast to view information related only to ipv4 unicast routes. ipv6 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv6 followed by the keyword unicast to view information related only to ipv6 unicast routes. ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address (in dotted decimal format) of the BGP network to view information only on that network. mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the network mask (in slash prefix (/x) format) of the BGP network address.
PAGE 424
Usage Information Example The following describes the show ip bgp flap command shown in the following example. Field Description Network Displays the network ID to which the route is flapping. From Displays the IP address of the neighbor advertising the flapping route. Flaps Displays the number of times the route flapped. Duration Displays the hours:minutes:seconds since the route first flapped. Reuse Displays the hours:minutes:seconds until the flapped route is available.
PAGE 425
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. The following describes the show ip bgp inconsistent-as command shown in the following example. Field Description Network Displays the destination network prefix of each BGP route.
PAGE 426
*>I 55.55.66.66/32 *>a 66.66.0.0/16 *>n 66.66.66.77/32 *>n 66.66.77.77/32 DellEMC# 72.1.1.2 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0 0 0 100 0 32768 32768 32768 i i i i show ip bgp neighbors Allows you to view the information BGP neighbors exchange.
PAGE 427
Usage Information Version Description 9.14(0.0) Introduced the [all] option for IPv4 and IPv6 neighbors. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added the ipv4 multicast and ipv6 unicast parameters. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.0.2.
PAGE 428
The Lines Beginning with: Description ● keepalive interval is the number of seconds between keepalive messages to help ensure that the TCP session is still alive. Received messages This line displays the number of BGP messages received, the number of notifications (error messages), and the number of messages waiting in a queue for processing.
PAGE 429
Capabilities advertised to neighbor for IPv4 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) ADD_PATH(69) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP local RIB : Routes to be Added 0, Replaced 0, Withdrawn 0 InQ : Added 0, Replaced 0, Withdrawn 0 OutQ : Added 0, Withdrawn 0 Allow local AS number 0 times in AS-PATH attribute Prefixes accepted 2, withdrawn 15 by peer, martian prefixes ignored 0 Prefixes advertised 0, denied 0, withdrawn 0 from peer Connections established 1; dropped 0 Last res
PAGE 430
Usage Information Example Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. The following describes the show ip bgp next-hop command shown in the following example. Field Description Next-hop Displays the next-hop IP address. Via Displays the IP address and interface used to reach the next hop. RefCount Displays the number of BGP routes using this next hop.
PAGE 431
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4(0.0) Added support for VRF for the S4810, S4820T, and S6000. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 432
show ip bgp paths community View all unique COMMUNITY numbers in the BGP database. Syntax show ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] paths community Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example 432 This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 433
show ip bgp peer-group Allows you to view information on the BGP peers in a peer group. Syntax Parameters show ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [ipv4 {multicast | unicast} | ipv6 unicast] peer-group [peer-group-name [detail | summary]] ipv4 multicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv4 followed by the keyword multicast to view information related only to ipv4 multicast routes. ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv4 followed by the keyword unicast to view information related only to ipv4 unicast routes.
PAGE 434
Line beginning Description with: Example Peer-group Displays the peer group’s name. Administratively shut Displays the peer group’s status if the peer group is not enabled. If you enable the peer group, this line is not displayed. BGP version Displays the BGP version supported. Minimum time Displays the time interval between BGP advertisements. For address family Displays IPv4 Unicast as the address family. BGP neighbor Displays the name of the BGP neighbor.
PAGE 435
● ● ● ● [ ] = (brackets) a range of single-character patterns. ( ) = (parenthesis) groups a series of pattern elements to a single element. { } = (braces) minimum and the maximum match count. ^ = (caret) the beginning of the input string. If you use the caret at the beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on everything BUT the characters specified. ● $ = (dollar sign) the end of the output string.
PAGE 436
*> 55.0.0.0/24 *> 66.0.0.0/24 DellEMC# 172.16.0.2 172.16.0.2 0 200 i 0 200 i show ip bgp summary Allows you to view the status of all BGP connections. Syntax show ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [ipv4 {multicast | unicast} | ipv6 unicast] summary Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF to view the status of all BGP connections corresponding to that VRF.
PAGE 437
same cluster_id, then the cluster_id count is 1000, since the same value is stored for thousand different attribute records. The attribute next-hop is a part of the BGP attribute data structure. If two peers send the same route that contains similar path attributes, then two entries are maintained in the back-end, as both these entries have different next-hops. If this same route is sent to a different peer, an entry for each peer is created, as the next-hop is different.
PAGE 438
Field Description If the neighbor is not in Established stage, the current stage is displayed (Idle, Connect, Active, OpenSent, OpenConfirm). When the peer is transitioning between states and clearing the routes received, the phrase (Purging) may appear in this column. If the neighbor is disabled, the phrase (Admin shut) appears in this column. Example DellEMC# show ip bgp summary BGP router identifier 192.168.11.
PAGE 439
Example DellEMC# show running-config bgp ! router bgp 100 network 1.1.11.1/32 network 1.1.12.1/32 network 1.1.13.1/32 neighbor 10.1.1.2 remote-as 200 neighbor 10.1.1.2 no shutdown DellEMC# timers bgp Adjust the BGP Keep Alive and Hold Time timers. Syntax timers bgp keepalive holdtime To return to the default, use the no timers bgp command. Parameters Defaults keepalive Enter a number for the time interval, in seconds, between keepalive messages sent to the neighbor routers.
PAGE 440
timers bgp extended Adjust the BGP idle holdtime for all the BGP neighbors. Syntax timers bgp extended idle-holdtime To return to the default, use the no timers bgp extended command. Parameters extended idle- holdtime Defaults Enter a number for the time interval, in seconds, for the peer to be idle state. The range is from 1 to 32767. The default is 15 seconds. The default idle-holdtime is 15 seconds. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 441
Parameters vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to view information on dampened routes corresponding to that VRF. ipv4 multicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv4 followed by the keyword multicast to view dampened-route information related only to ipv4 multicast routes. ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv4 followed by the keyword multicast to view dampened-route information related only to ipv4 unicast routes.
PAGE 442
Command Modes ROUTER BGP (conf-router_bgp_af) Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell EMC Networking OS version history for this command. Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048–ON and S4048–ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 443
show ip bgp dampened-paths View BGP routes that are dampened (non-active). Syntax Parameters show ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] [ipv4 {multicast | unicast} | ipv6 unicast] dampened-paths vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords vrf and then the name of the VRF to view routes that are affected by a specific community list corresponding to that VRF. ipv4 multicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv4 followed by the keyword multicast to view information related only to ipv4 multicast routes.
PAGE 444
Example Field Description Network Displays the network ID to which the route is dampened. From Displays the IP address of the neighbor advertising the dampened route. Reuse Displays the hour:minutes:seconds until the dampened route is available. Path Lists all the ASs the dampened route passed through to reach the destination network. DellEMC# show ip bgp dampened-paths BGP local RIB : Routes to be Added 0, Replaced 0, Withdrawn 0 BGP local router ID is 192.168.11.
PAGE 445
10 Content Addressable Memory (CAM) You can use content addressable memory (CAM) commands to configure the amount of memory allocated to CAM memory partitions. NOTE: Not all CAM commands are supported on all platforms. Be sure to note the platform when looking for a command. NOTE: If you are using these features for the first time, contact Dell EMC Networking Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for guidance.
PAGE 446
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 2 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 1 VmanQos : 0 EtsAcl : 0 FcoeAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 nlbclusteracl: 0 ipv4udfmirracl: 0 ipv4mirracl: 0 l2acl number Enter the keyword l2acl and then the number of l2acl blocks. The range is from 0 to 8 in multiples of 2. ipv4acl number Enter the keyword ipv4acl and then the number of FP blocks for IPv4 ACL. The range is from 0 to 9 in multiples of 3, when ipv4udfenable is selected.
PAGE 447
fcoeacl number Enter the keyword fcoeacl and then the number of FP blocks for FCOE ACL. The range is from 0 to 8 in multiples of 2. ipv4udfmirracl Enter the keyword ipv4udfmirracl and then the number of FP blocks for IPv4 UDF and IPv6 mirror ACL. The range is from 0 to 8. ipv4mirracl Enter the ipv4mirracl keyword and then the number of FP blocks for IPv4 mirror ACL. The range is from 0 to 8. You cannot use the ipv4mirracl and ipv4udfmirracl commands at the same time.
PAGE 448
If allocation values are not entered for the CAM regions, the value is 0. If you enable BMP, to perform a reload on the chassis to upgrade any configuration changes that have changed the NVRAM content, use the command reload conditional nvram-cfg-change. cam-acl-egress Allocate CAM for egress ACLs. Syntax cam-acl-egress default | l2acl number ipv4acl number ipv6acl number Parameters default Reset the egress CAM ACL entries to default settings.
PAGE 449
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0. Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 450
The IPv4 QoS region reserves 32 ACLs. Sharing is calculated on the remaining ACLs. For example, if you configure the IPv6 ACL value as 2, the system reserves 32 entries for IPv4 QoS and the remaining 224 entries (256-32) are shared between IPv4 QoS and IPv6 ACL entries according to the configured CAM sharing percentages. The sum of the percentage values between the two regions must be 100. Example The following example shows that IPv4 QoS is disabled and IPv6 ACL is set to 4.
PAGE 451
feature ipv6acloptimized Convert the IPv6 ACL CAM to double-wide. Syntax feature ipv6acloptimized To disable this feature, use the no feature ipv6acloptimized command. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Defaults Not configured Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Usage Information Example Version Description 9.14(0.0) Introduced on the S5048F–ON, S6100–ON, and Z9100–ON..
PAGE 452
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. The display reflects the settings implemented with the cam-acl command.
PAGE 453
Openflow : fedgovacl : nlbclusteracl : ipv4udfmirracl: ipv4mirracl : * - shared regions 0 0 0 0 0 show cam-sharing Display the configured CAM space sharing information between IPv6 ACL and IPv6 QoS in percentage. Syntax show cam-sharing Command Modes EXEC Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON, and Z9100–ON.
PAGE 454
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000 and Z9000. The following table describes the output fields of the show cam-usage command. Table 3.
PAGE 455
test cam-usage Verify that enough CAM space is available for the IPv6 ACLs you have created. Syntax Parameters Defaults test cam-usage service-policy input input policy name stack-unit {number | all} policy-map name Enter the name of the policy-map to verify. Maximum is 32 characters. number Enter all to get information for all the stack-units or enter the stack-unit number to get information for a specific stack-unit.
PAGE 456
Example Example Term Explanation Estimated CAM per Port Estimates the amount of CAM space the listed policy will require. Status Indicates whether or not the policy will be allowed in the CAM.
PAGE 457
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000, S6000-ON, and Z9500 switch.. Usage Information This command takes effect only after reboot. Related Commands show hardware forwarding-table mode — displays the hardware forwarding table mode in the current boot and in the next boot. show hardware forwarding-table mode Display the hardware forwarding table mode in the current boot and in the next boot.
PAGE 458
11 Control Plane Policing (CoPP) Control plane policing (CoPP) uses access control list (ACL) rules and quality of service (QoS) policies to create filters for a system’s control plane. The CoPP filters prevent traffic that is not identified as legitimate from reaching the control plane, and rate-limit traffic to an acceptable level.
PAGE 459
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. cpu-protocol-group Creates or removes a protocol group. Syntax cpu-protocol-group group-name Use the no cpu-protocol-group group-name command to remove the protocol-group. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Parameters Command History Example group-name Enter the unique protocol-group name that you want to create. NOTE: The length of the group-name that you specify cannot exceed 32 characters.
PAGE 460
cpu-queue Configures queue parameters. Syntax cpu-queue queue-number {protocol-group group-name [qos-policy policy-name] | qos-policy policy-name} Use the no cpu-queue queue-number command to remove the queue parameter configuration. Command Modes COPP-PROFILE Parameters queue-number Enter the queue number that you want to configure. The range is from 0 to 11. A queue can be mapped to a protocol-group or a qos-policy or both. Protocol groups cannot be configured for queue numbers 0 and 4.
PAGE 461
● Ensure that the service-class cpu-queue-buffer command is not configured. The copppolicy command will not be available if the service-class cpu-queue-buffer command is configured. ● Ensure that the service-policy rate-limit-cpu-queues command is not configured, The copp-policy command will not be available if the service-policy rate-limit-cpuqueues is configured. ● You cannot associate a protocol group with more than one queue. ● Ensure that each queue contains a unique protocol list.
PAGE 462
Command Modes QOS-POLICY-INPUT Parameters Default Command History Usage Information Example queue-lengthvalue Enter the queue length value you want to configure. The range is from 0 to 235. The default value is 235. Version Description 9.11.0.0 Introduced on the S6000, S6000–ON, Z9100–ON, and S6100–ON. The queue-length takes effect only if the qos-policy is associated with a copp-policy.
PAGE 463
Usage Information Create a policy-map by associating a queue number with the qos-policy. Create QoS policies prior to enabling this command. For CoPP, use the keyword cpu-qos when creating qos-policy-input. Related Commands ● qos-policy-input — create a QoS input policy map. ● policy-map-input — create an input policy map. service-policy rate-limit-protocols Apply a policy for the system to rate limit control protocols on a per-protocol basis.
PAGE 464
show cpu-queue rate cp Display the rates for each CPU queue. Syntax show cpu-queue rate cp Defaults Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 465
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(3.0) Modified the output to display MCAST data packet information. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 466
Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.
PAGE 467
Example Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 468
Example 468 DellEMC#show running-config cpu-protocol-group ! cpu-protocol-group PG0 protocol-list 802dot1x , arp-req , arp-rsp ! cpu-protocol-group PG1 protocol-list arp-req , arp-rsp , ip-local-term ! cpu-protocol-group PG3 protocol-list ttl0 , ttl1 DellEMC# Control Plane Policing (CoPP)
PAGE 469
12 Data Center Bridging (DCB) Data center bridging (DCB) refers to a set of IEEE Ethernet enhancements that provide data centers with a single, robust, converged network to support multiple traffic types, including local area network (LAN), server, and storage traffic. The Dell EMC Networking OS commands for data center bridging features include 802.1Qbb priority-based flow control (PFC), 802.1Qaz enhanced transmission selection (ETS), and the data center bridging exchange (DCBX) protocol.
PAGE 470
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON and Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.16.0 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 471
clear pfc counters Clear the PFC TLV counters and PFC statistics on an interface or stack unit. Syntax Parameters clear pfc counters [interface-type | stack-unit {unit number | all } all stack-ports all}] interface interface-type Enter the keywords port-type then the interface information. Enter the subport number if a port is fanned-out into 10G ports. stack-unit unit Enter the keywords stack-unit then the stack-unit number to be cleared.
PAGE 472
Version Description 9.11(2.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON and S6100-ON. Example pfc-asymmetric Enables honoring of PFC frames on all queues (lossy and lossless). Syntax pfc-asymmetric Defaults Enabled Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell EMC Networking OS version history for this command.
PAGE 473
Parameters Defaults queue-range Enter the queue range. Separate the queue values with a comma; specify a priority range with a dash; for example, pfc no-drop queues 1,3 or pfc no-drop queues 7 or pfc no-drop queues 0,7. The range is from 0 to 3. No lossless queues are configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 474
Parameters Defaults priority-range Enter the 802.1p values of the frames to be paused. Separate the priority values with a comma; specify a priority range with a dash; for example, pfc priority 1,3,5-7. The range is from 0 to 7. none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 475
Example DellEMC#show dcb DCB Status: Enabled, PFC Queue Count: 2 Total Buffer: Total available buffer excluding the buffer pre-allocated for guaranteed services like global headroom, queue's min guaranteed buffer and CPU queues. PFC Total Buffer: Maximum buffer available for lossless queues. PFC Shared Buffer: Buffer used by ingress priority groups for shared usage. PFC Headroom Buffer: Buffer used by ingress priority group for shared headroom usage.
PAGE 476
Parameters port-type slot/ port[ /subport ] pfc Enter the port-type slot and port PFC information. Enter the subport number if a port is fanned-out into 10G ports. {summary | statistics | detail | bufferthreshold} Enter the keyword summary for a summary list of results or enter the keyword detail for a full list of results. Enter the keyword statistics to view pfc statistics. Use the keyword buffer-threshold to display the buffer threshold details.
PAGE 477
Field Description Willing Status is enabled Example (Summary) Local is enabled DCBX operational status (enabled or disabled) with a list of the configured PFC priorities. Operational status (local port) Port state for current operational PFC configuration: ● Init: Local PFC configuration parameters were exchanged with the peer. ● Recommend: Remote PFC configuration parameters were received from the peer.
PAGE 478
Te 1/3/1 Te 1/3/1 Te 1/3/1 Q5 Q6 Q7 NO NO NO - - DellEMC#show interface hundredGigE 1/32 - - pfc details Interface hundredGigE 1/32 Admin mode is on Admin is enabled Remote is disabled Local is enabled Pfc Type is Asymmetric Oper status is init PFC DCBX Oper status is Down Reason: Port Shutdown State Machine Type is Symmetric TLV Tx Status is enabled PFC Link Delay 65535 pause quntams Application Priority TLV Parameters : -------------------------------------FCOE TLV Tx Status is disabled ISCSI TLV
PAGE 479
show interface pfc statistics Displays counters for the PFC frames received and transmitted (by dot1p priority class) on an interface. Syntax Parameters show interface port-type pfc statistics port-type Enter the port type and the interface information. NOTE: This command also enables you to view information corresponding to a range of ports. However, for Open Networking (ON) platforms the notation for specifying port range in the command is different from how you specify in non-ON platforms.
PAGE 480
ETS Commands The following ETS commands are supported on the Dell EMC Networking OS. NOTE: Before configuring ETS, assign the etsacl space. using the cam-acl l2acl 2 ipv4acl 0 ipv6acl 0 ipv4qos 2 l2qos 0 l2pt 0 ipmacacl 0 vman-qos 0 fcoeacl 2 etsacl 1 iscsi 2 command. dcb-enable Enable data center bridging. Syntax dcb enable[pfc-queues 1–4] To disable DCB, use the no dcb enable command. Parameters Defaults pfc-queues Enter the pfc-queue range. To disable DCB, use the no dcb enable command.
PAGE 481
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON and Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.
PAGE 482
Example (Summary) Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.2(0.2) Down status messages added. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.16.0 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PAGE 483
15 - - - - - - Remote Parameters : ------------------Remote is disabled Local Parameters : -----------------Local is enabled PG-grp Priority# BW-% BW-COMMITTED BW-PEAK TSA % Rate(Mbps) Burst(KB) Rate(Mbps) Burst(KB) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 100 ETS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 15 Oper status is init ETS DCBX Oper status is Down Reason: Port Shutdown State Machine Type is Feature Conf TLV Tx Status is enabled 23 Input Conf TLV Pkts, 47 Outpu
PAGE 484
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.16.0 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. You can configure the transmission of more than one TLV type at a time; for example: advertise dcbx-tlv ets-conf ets-reco. You can enable ETS recommend TLVs (ets-reco) only if you enable ETS configuration TLVs (etsconf). To disable TLV transmission, use the no form of the command; for example, no advertise dcbx-tlv pfc ets-reco.
PAGE 485
Configure DCBX operation at the INTERFACE level on a switch or globally on the switch. To verify the DCBX configuration on a port, use the show interface dcbx detail command. If you use the auto-upstream option and the port does not come up on a switch from a different vendor, manually configure the version a CEE on the peer device. dcbx version Configure the DCBX version used on the interface. Syntax dcbx version {auto | cee | ieee-v2.
PAGE 486
resource | sem | tlv} Defaults ● ● ● ● ● fail: enables traces for DCBX failures. mgmt: enables traces for DCBX management frames. resource: enables traces for DCBX system resource frames. sem: enables traces for the DCBX state machine. tlv: enables traces for DCBX TLVs. None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 487
Usage Information This command is available at the global level only. show interface dcbx detail Displays the DCBX configuration on an interface. Syntax Parameters show interface port-type dcbx detail port-type Enter the port type along with the port number. NOTE: This command also enables you to view information corresponding to a range of ports. However, for Open Networking (ON) platforms the notation for specifying port range in the command is different from how you specify in non-ON platforms.
PAGE 488
Field Description DCBX Operational Status Operational status (enabled or disabled) used to elect a configuration source and internally propagate a DCB configuration. The DCBX operational status is the combination of PFC and ETS operational status. Configuration Source Specifies whether the port serves as the DCBX configuration source on the switch: true (yes) or false (no). Local DCBX Compatibility mode DCBX version accepted in a DCB configuration as compatible.
PAGE 489
Example Field Description Total DCBX Frame errors Number of DCBX frames with errors received. Total DCBX Frames unrecognized Number of unrecognizable DCBX frames received.
PAGE 490
INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON and Z9500. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the S4810 and S6000 platforms.
PAGE 491
Usage Information PFC and ETS settings are not pre-configured on Ethernet ports. You must use the dcb-map command to configure different groups of 802.1p priorities with PFC and ETS settings. Using the priority-pgid command, you assign each 802.1p priority to one priority group. A priority group consists of 802.1p priority values that are grouped together for similar bandwidth allocation and scheduling, and that share latency and loss requirements. All 802.
PAGE 492
Use the priority-pgid command to map 802.1p priorities to a priority group. You can assign each 802.1p priority to only one priority group. A priority group consists of 802.1p priority values that are grouped together for similar bandwidth allocation and scheduling, and that share latency and loss requirements. All 802.1p priorities mapped to the same queue must be in the same priority group.
PAGE 493
Enter a smaller value for the shared buffer size or increase the total buffer size appropriately by using the dcb pfc-total- buffer-size command. Example DellEMC(conf)#dcb pfc-shared-buffer-size 800 dcb-buffer-threshold Configure the profile name for the DCB buffer threshold. Syntax Parameters Default dcb buffer—threshold profile-name profile-name Enter the name of the profile, which can be a string of up to 32 characters in length.
PAGE 494
size Size of the ingress buffer in KB. Enter a number in the range of 0 to 9. The default is as follows: ● 10G – 9 ● 25G – 9 ● 40G – 9 ● 50G – 9 ● 100G – 9 pause-threshold Buffer limit for pause frames to be sent. NOTE: In addition to the specified pause-threshold value, pause frames are sent only when the buffer usage exceeds some percentage of the shared buffer. threshold-value Buffer limit at which the port sends the pause to peer in KB. Enter a number in the range of 0 to 9.
PAGE 495
You can use the priority command to set up both the administrative and peer-related PFC priorities. For example, you can configure the intended buffer configuration for all eight priorities. If you configure the number of lossless queues as 4 and if the administrator-configured priorities configured within the DCB input policy is applied, then the configuration for those priorities are pre-designed.
PAGE 496
Command Modes CONFIGURATION mode Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(2.0P0) Default value is changed from 3088 KB to 2656 KB in the Z9100-ON and S6100-ON. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048–ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 497
EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON and Z9500. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the S6000 platform.
PAGE 498
Te 1/3/2 Q7 DellEMC(conf)# NO - - - - On interface in which PFC is not enabled: DellEMC#show interface tengigabitethernet 1/20/1 pfc buffer-threshold The following table describes the output fields displayed for the show interface pfc bufferthreshold command: Field Description queue Number of the queue lossless Whether the queue is a lossy or lossless queue for which buffer threshold is configured buffer-size Ingress buffer size pause-threshold- Buffer limit at which the port sends the pause
PAGE 499
13 Debugging and Diagnostics The basic debugging and diagnostic commands are supported by the Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • • • Diagnostics and Monitoring Commands Offline Diagnostic Commands Hardware Commands Diagnostics and Monitoring Commands The following section describes the diagnostics and monitoring commands. For similar commands, refer to the Control and Monitoring chapter. logging coredump stack-unit Enable coredump on a stack.
PAGE 500
on the flash; if the flash is out of memory, the coredump is aborted. Dell EMC Networking OS completes the coredump process and wait until the upload is complete before rebooting the system. Offline Diagnostic Commands The offline diagnostics test suite is useful for isolating faults and debugging hardware. While tests are running, Dell EMC Networking OS results are saved as a text file (TestReport-SU-X.txt) in the flash directory. This show file command is available only on master and standby.
PAGE 501
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 502
Usage Information Version Description 8.2.1.0 Added a warning message to the off-line diagnostic. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. The system reboots when the off-line diagnostics complete. This reboot is an automatic process. A warning message appears when the offline stack-unit command is implemented. DellEMC#offline stack-unit 1 Warning - offline of unit will bring down all the protocols and the unit will be operationally down, except for running Diagnostics.
PAGE 503
show diag Display the diagnostic information. Syntax Parameters Defaults show diag {information | stack-unit number [detail [interval] | summary] | testcase stack-unit number [interactive | level0 | level1 | level2]} information Enter the keyword information to display diagnostic information. stack-unit number Enter the keywords stack-unit then the stack-unit number to display diagnostic details of the specific stack unit. detail Enter the keyword detail to display diagnostic information in detail.
PAGE 504
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced the verbose option. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. Hardware Commands These commands display information from a hardware sub-component or ASIC. clear hardware stack-unit Clear statistics from selected hardware components.
PAGE 505
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series.
PAGE 506
clear hardware vlan-counters Clear VLAN statistics. Syntax clear hardware vlan-couters vlan-id Parameters Defaults vlan-id Enter the interface VLAN number. The range is from 1 to 4094. None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.
PAGE 507
Usage Information Version Description 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. This command enables a hardware watchdog mechanism that automatically reboots an Dell EMC Networking OS switch/ router with a single unresponsive unit. This behavior is a last-resort mechanism intended to prevent a manual power cycle. show hardware mac Display MAC ACL entries for the specified stack-unit, port-pipe and pipeline ID.
PAGE 508
show hardware ip Display ACL or QoS data for the selected stack member and stack member port-pipe. Syntax show hardware layer3 {acl | qos} stack-unit number port-set 0–0 pipeline pipeline-number Parameters acl | qos Enter either the keyword acl or the keyword qos to select between ACL or QoS data. stack-unit Enter the keywords stack-unit then a number to select a stack ID. number port-set 0–0 Enter the keyword port-set with a port-pipe number. The range is from 0 to 0.
PAGE 509
Defaults None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.
PAGE 510
unit unit-number Enter the keyword unit then a number and then enter one of the keywords to {counters | ipmc- troubleshoot errors on the selected port-pipe and to give status on why a port is replication | not coming up to register level. details | portstats [detail] | register | table-dump table-name} Defaults None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example (DataPlane) This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 511
rxPkt(COS4 ) :0 rxPkt(COS5 ) :0 rxPkt(COS6 ) :0 rxPkt(COS7 ) :0 rxPkt(COS8 ) :0 rxPkt(COS9 ) :0 rxPkt(COS10) :0 rxPkt(COS11) :0 rxPkt(UNIT0) :0 transmitted :0 txRequested :0 noTxDesc :0 txError :0 txReqTooLarge :0 txInternalError :0 txDatapathErr :0 txPkt(COS0 ) :0 txPkt(COS1 ) :0 txPkt(COS2 ) :0 txPkt(COS3 ) :0 txPkt(COS4 ) :0 txPkt(COS5 ) :0 txPkt(COS6 ) :0 txPkt(COS7 ) :0 txPkt(COS8 ) :0 txPkt(COS9 ) :0 txPkt(COS10) :0 txPkt(COS11) :0 txPkt(UNIT0) :0 Example (PartyBus) Example (Drops Unit) DellEMC# sho
PAGE 512
Example (PortStats) DellEMC# show hardware stack-unit 1 unit 0 port-stats ena/ speed/ link auto STP port link Lns duplex scan neg? state pause discrd ce0 up 4 100G FD SW No Forward Tag xe0 !ena 1 25G FD None No Disable TX RX None xe1 !ena 1 50G FD None No Disable TX RX None xe2 !ena 1 25G FD None No Disable TX RX None ce1 up 4 100G FD SW No Forward Tag xe3 !ena 1 25G FD None No Disable TX RX None xe4 !ena 1 50G FD None No Disable TX RX None xe5 !ena 1 25G FD None No Disable TX RX None ce2 up 4 100G FD SW N
PAGE 513
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX - IPV6 L3 Routed Multicast Packets Unicast Packet Counter 64 Byte Frame Counter 65 to 127 Byte Frame Counter 128 to 255 Byte Frame Counter 256 to 511 Byte Frame Counter 512 to 1023 Byte Frame Counter 1024 to 1518 Byte Frame Counter 1519 to 1522 Byte Good VLAN Frame Counter 1519 to 2047 Byte Fr
PAGE 514
TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX Example (Details) - PFC Frame Priority PFC Frame Priority PFC Frame Priority PFC Frame Priority PFC Frame Priority PFC Frame Priority Debug Counter 0 Debug Counter 1 Debug Counter 2 Debug Counter 3 Debug Counter 4 Debug Counter 5 Debug Counter 6 Debug Counter 7 Debug Counter 8 Debug Counter 9 Debug Counter 10 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ************************** bcmLinkMonStatusShow: The Current Link Status Is Front End Link Status 0x0
PAGE 515
Enter any of the following keywords and slot/port[/subport] or number information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 516
Default Packet Buffer allocated for the Queue: 0 Used Packet Buffer: 0 Example displaying buffer information for specified priority-group Example displaying buffer information for headroom pool DellEMC# show hardware buffer interface hundredGigE 1/10 priority-group 0 buffer-info ----- Buffer stats for unit: 0 port: 34 (interface Hu 1/10) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------PG# PRIORITIES ALLOTED (CELLS) COUNTER (CELLS) MIN SHARED MODE HDRM MIN SHARED HDRM -----------
PAGE 517
Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the S6000, S6000–ON, S6100–ON and Z9100–ON. Use this command to view the buffer details of lossy and lossless traffic in the service pool. Use the keyword detail buffer-info to view the buffer details allocated for each MMU unit.
PAGE 518
interface interface Enter any of the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 519
MCAST MCAST MCAST MCAST MCAST MCAST Example displaying egress queue-level snapshot for unicast packets for the specific interface 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 DellEMC# show hardware buffer-stats-snapshot resource interface hundredGigE 1/10 queue ucast 0 Stack-unit 1 unit: 0 port: 34 (interface Hu 1/10) --------------------------------------Q# TYPE Q# TOTAL BUFFERED CELLS --------------------------------------UCAST 0 0 DellEMC# show hardware buffer-stats-snapshot resource interface hundredGigE 1/10 queue ucast
PAGE 520
DellEMC# show hardware buffer-stats-snapshot resource interface hundredGigE 1/10 prio-group all Stack-unit 1 unit: 0 port: 34 (interface Hu 1/10) --------------------------------------PG# SHARED CELLS HEADROOM CELLS --------------------------------------0 0 0 1 0 0 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0 5 0 0 6 0 0 7 0 0 Example showing buffer snap shot details for head room pool DellEMC#show hardware buffer-stats-snapshot resource headroom-pool --------------------------------------HP# PEAK USE COUNT(CELLS) ------------------
PAGE 521
● For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information. Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(0.
PAGE 522
Rx VLAN Drops : 0 --- Ingress MAC counters--Ingress FCSDrops : 953152009 Ingress MTUExceeds : 0 --- MMU Drops --Ingress MMU Drops : 0 Ingress Drops Bytes : 0 HOL DROPS(TOTAL) : 0 HOL DROPS on COS0 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS1 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS2 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS3 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS4 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS5 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS6 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS7 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS8 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS9 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS10 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS11 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS12 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS13 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS14 :
PAGE 523
HOL DROPS on COS4 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS5 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS6 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS7 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS8 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS9 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS10 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS11 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS12 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS13 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS14 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS15 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS16 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS17 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS18 : 0 HOL DROPS on COS19 : 0 TxPurge CellErr : 0 Aged Drops : 0 --- Egress MAC counters--Egress FCS Drops : 0 --- Egress FORWARD PROCESSOR Drops --IPv4 L3UC Aged & Drops : 0 TTL T
PAGE 524
Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 525
show hardware system-flow Display Layer 3 ACL or QoS data for the selected stack member and stack member port-pipe. Syntax Parameters show hardware system-flow stack-unit id port-set number [counters | pipeline pipeline-number] stack-unit id Enter the keywords stack-unit to select a stack member ID. port-set number Enter the keywords port-set with a port-pipe number. [counters | pipeline pipeline- (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword counters for the specified port-pipe.
PAGE 526
DATA=0x00000001 ffffffff MASK=0x00000001 ffffffff HiGig Part:0 Offset0: 150 Width0: 2 DATA=0x00000000 MASK=0x00000001 action={act=DropPrecedence, param0=1(0x1), param1=0(0), param2=0(0), param3=0(0)} action={act=Drop, param0=0(0), param1=0(0), param2=0(0), param3=0(0)} action={act=CosQCpuNew, param0=7(0x7), param1=0(0), param2=0(0), param3=0(0)} action={act=CopyToCpu, param0=1(0x1), param1=0(0), param2=0(0), param3=0(0)} policer= statistics={stat id 1 slice = 8 idx=3 entries=1}{GreenPackets}{GreenBytes} ###
PAGE 527
14 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) is an application layer protocol that dynamically assigns IP addresses and other configuration parameters to network end-stations (hosts) based on the configuration policies the network administrators determine.
PAGE 528
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. Press Enter after the clear ip dhcp binding command clears all the IPs from the binding table. debug ip dhcp server Display Dell OS debugging messages for DHCP.
PAGE 529
debug ipv6 dhcp To enable debug logs for DHCPv6 relay agent transactions. Syntax debug ipv6 dhcp To disable the debug logs for dhcpv6 relay agent transactions, use the debug ipv6 dhcp command. Defaults None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 530
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. disable Disable the DHCP server. Syntax disable DHCP Server is disabled by default. To enable the system to be a DHCP server, use the no disable command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION DHCP Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 531
Parameters Defaults address Enter a list of DNS servers that may service clients on the subnet. You may list up to eight servers, in order of preference. None Command Modes DHCP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON.
PAGE 532
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. excluded-address Prevent the server from leasing an address or range of addresses in the pool.
PAGE 533
hardware-address For manual configurations, specify the client hardware address. Syntax Parameters Defaults hardware-address address address Enter the hardware address of the client. None Command Modes DHCP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 534
Usage Information When you upgrade the Dell EMC Networking OS from an earlier version to 9.14.1.3 or later, the system converts the DHCP CONFIGURATION host command in the running configuration to the hostaddress command. If you downgrade the Dell EMC Networking OS from version 9.14.1.3 or later to an earlier version, any existing host-address command is deleted from the running configuration. If you want to create manual DHCP bindings, use the host command. ip dhcp server Enable DHCP server globally.
PAGE 535
Defaults 24 hours Command Modes DHCP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 536
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. netbios-node-type Specify the NetBIOS node type for a Microsoft DHCP client. Dell EMC Networking recommends specifying clients as hybrid.
PAGE 537
network Specify the range of addresses in an address pool. Syntax Parameters Defaults network network /prefix-length network/ prefixlength Specify a range of addresses. Prefix-length range is from 17 to 31. None Command Modes DHCP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 538
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series.
PAGE 539
show ip dhcp configuration Display the DHCP configuration. Syntax Parameters Defaults show ip dhcp configuration [global | pool name] pool name Display the configuration for a DHCP pool. global Display the DHCP configuration for the entire system. None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 540
show ip dhcp conflict Display the address conflict log. Syntax show ip dhcp conflict address Parameters Defaults address Display a particular conflict log entry. None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 541
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. Commands to Configure Secure DHCP DHCP, as defined by RFC 2131, provides no authentication or security mechanisms.
PAGE 542
Related Commands ● arp inspection-trust — specify a port as trusted so that ARP frames are not validated against the binding table. arp inspection-limit Configure dynamic ARP inspection rate-limit to verify the rate of ARP packet received in a port on a specific interval. Syntax arp inspection-limit {rate pps [interval seconds]} Defaults None Command Modes INTERFACE CONFIGURATION Parameters Command History rate pps Enter the keyword rate then the packet per second (pps) value.
PAGE 543
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. ● arp inspection — enable dynamic ARP inspection on a VLAN. clear ip dhcp snooping Clear the DHCP binding table. Syntax Parameters clear ip dhcp snooping {binding | source-address-validation discardcounters [interface interface]} binding Clears the binding table.
PAGE 544
Example Version Description 9.6(0.0) Added the keywords discard-counters, interface, and the variable interface on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, Z9000, Z9500. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series.
PAGE 545
Example DellEMC# clear ipv6 dhcp snooping? binding Clear the snooping binding database ip dhcp relay Enable Option 82. Syntax Parameters Defaults ip dhcp relay information-option [remote-id {port | hostname:port | mac} | circuit-d {port | hostname:port | mac} | trust-downstream] remote-id Enter the keyword remote-id to configure the system to enable the remote-id string in option-82. remote-id port Enter the keywords remote-id port to configure the port as the remote id in option–82.
PAGE 546
Version Description 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. ip dhcp snooping Enable DHCP snooping globally. Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 547
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
PAGE 548
Defaults vlan-id vlan-id Enter the keywords vlan-id then the VLAN to which the host belongs. The range is from 2 to 4094. ip ip-address Enter the keyword ip then the IP address that the server is leasing. interface type Enter the keyword interface then the type of interface to which the host is connected: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 549
Related Commands ● show ip dhcp snooping — display the contents of the DHCP binding table. IPv6 DHCP Snooping Binding Create a static DHCP snooping binding entry in the snooping database.
PAGE 550
ip dhcp snooping database Delay writing the binding table for a specified time. Syntax ip dhcp snooping database write-delay minutes Parameters Defaults minutes The range is from 5 to 21600. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148.
PAGE 551
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, S6000-ON, and Z-Series. ip dhcp snooping database renew Renew the binding table.
PAGE 552
Defaults None Command Modes ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 553
ipv6 dhcp snooping trust Configure an interface as trusted for DHCP snooping. Syntax [no] ipv6 dhcp snooping trust To disable dhcp snooping trusted capability on this interface, use the no ipv6 dhcp snooping trust command. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 554
Usage Information Version Description 9.6(0.0) Added the vlan keyword and the vlan-id variable . Introduced support for SAV on port channels interfaces. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 8.2.1.0 Added the keyword ipmac. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series.
PAGE 555
Example Version Description 9.11(2.0P0) Introduced the circuit-id attribute in the command. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.
PAGE 556
Command Modes ● CONFIGURATION ● INTERFACE Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the C9010, MXL, FN IOM, S3100 series, S4810, S4820T, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S5048F-ON, S6000, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, and Z9100–ON. ● ipv6 dhcp relay source-interface— Configure DHCP relay source IPv6 interface.
PAGE 557
ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address Validate a DHCP packet’s source hardware address against the client hardware address field (CHADDR) in the payload. Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 558
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, S6000-ON, and Z-Series. ip helper-address Configures the destination broadcast address or the host address for DHCP server requests. Syntax ip helper-address [vrf vrf-name] ip-address To disable the destination broadcast address or the host address for DHCP server requests, use the ip helper-address [vrf vrf-name] ip-address command.
PAGE 559
ipv6-address Default Enter the keywordipv6–address through which the server address can be reached. Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(1.0) Enhanced to support non-default VRF configuration for DHCPv6 helper address. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 560
Parameters Description ● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. Defaults None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON.
PAGE 561
permit host 0.0.0.0 host 00:00:00:00:00:00 count (0 packets) permit vlan 10 host 1.1.1.1 host 00:00:00:00:01:01 count (0 packets) permit vlan 10 host 1.1.1.2 host 00:00:00:00:01:02 count (0 packets) permit vlan 10 host 1.1.1.3 host 00:00:00:00:01:03 count (0 packets) ipmac-vlan sav access-list on Port-channel 10 on stack-unit 2 Total cam count 5 permit host 0.0.0.0 host 00:00:00:00:00:00 count (0 packets) permit vlan 10 host 1.1.1.1 host 00:00:00:00:01:01 count (0 packets) permit vlan 10 host 1.1.1.
PAGE 562
Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 563
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell EMC Networking OS version history for this command. Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.
PAGE 564
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series and Z-Series. Use this command to configure a domain name corresponding to a VRF. This domain is appended to the in complete DNS requests corresponding to the specified VRF. DellEMC(conf)# ip domain-name vrf jay dell.com ip domain-list Adds a domain name to the DNS list. This domain name is appended to incomplete host names in DNS requests corresponding to a specific VRF.
PAGE 565
ip host Configures a mapping between the host name server and the IP address for a specific VRF. This mapping information is used by the name-to-IP address table to resolve host names. Syntax ip host [vrf vrf-name] name ip-address To undo the host name server to IP address mapping for VRFs, use the no ip host [vrf vrfname] name ip-address command.
PAGE 566
Defaults None Command Modes EXEC Command History Usage Information Example 566 This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series and Z-Series.
PAGE 567
15 Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) Equal cost multi-path (ECMP) supports multiple "best paths" in next-hop packet forwarding to a destination device. Topics: • • • • • • ecmp-group hash-algorithm ip ecmp-group ip ecmp weighted link-bundle-distribution trigger-threshold link-bundle-monitor enable ecmp-group Provides a mechanism to monitor traffic distribution on an ECMP link bundle. A system log is generated when the standard deviation of traffic distribution on a member link exceeds a defined threshold.
PAGE 568
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.10.0 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 569
● xor16: Use CR16 — 16 bit XOR hg { crc16 | crc16cc | Enter the keyword hg then one of the following options: ● crc16: Use CRC16_BISYNC — 16 bit CRC16-bisync polynomial (default) crc32MSB | ● crc16cc: Use CRC16_CCITT — 16 bit CRC16 using CRC16-CCITT polynomial crc32LSB | xor1 | ● crc32MSB: Use CRC32_UPPER — MSB 16 bits of computed CRC32 xor2 | xor4 | xor8 ● crc32LSB: Use CRC32_LOWER — LSB 16 bits of computed CRC32 | xor16 } stackunit stack-unit● xor1: Use CRC16_BISYNC_AND_XOR1 — Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYN
PAGE 570
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.10.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Added the nh-ecmp option. 7.7.1.1 Added the nh-ecmp option. To ensure that CRC is not used for LAG, set the default hash-algorithm method on E-Series systems.
PAGE 571
path-fallback Defaults Use the keywords path-fallback to enable this feature. If you enable the feature, re-enter this keyword to disable the feature. 16 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 572
Usage Information Enabling this CLI would inform the FIB to re-program the destination prefix paths with weights in the HW/CAM on the fly. If disabled, the CLI would inform the FIB to re-program the destination prefix paths with no weights or regular ECMP.
PAGE 573
link-bundle-monitor enable Provides a mechanism to enable monitoring of traffic distribution on an ECMP link bundle. Syntax link-bundle-monitor enable To exit from ECMP group mode, use the exit command. Command Modes ● ECMP-GROUP ● PORT-CHANNEL INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 574
16 Flex Hash and Optimized Boot-Up This chapter describes the Flex Hash and fast-boot enhancements. Topics: • • • • • • • load-balance ingress-port enable load-balance flexhash lacp fast-switchover show issu clients show issu detail show issu status encapsulation dot1q load-balance ingress-port enable Enable the Flex hash functionality. This utility is supported on the platform. Syntax load-balance ingress-port enable To disable the Flex hash capability, use the no version of this command.
PAGE 575
load-balance flexhash Specify the parameters for the Flex Hash mechanism, such as whether IPv4 or IPv6 packets must be subject to Flex Hash functionality, a unique protocol number, the offset of hash fields from the start of the L4 header to be used for hash calculation, and a meaningful description to associate the protocol number with the name.
PAGE 576
lacp fast-switchover Cause the physical ports to be aggregated faster by configuring this capability in a port-channel on both the nodes that are members of a port-channel. Syntax lacp fast-switchover To disable the capability of faster aggregation of the member ports of a LAG or a port-channel bundle, use the no version of this command. Defaults Not configured Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-po-number) Command History Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 577
7 ISSU IPMGR Client 8 ISSU MRTM Client 9 ISSU LC Client 10 ISSU Mac Manager Client 11 ISSU LACP Client 12 ISSU NDPM Client 13 ISSU XSTP Client 14 ISSU BGP Client 15 ISSU Mirror Client 16 ISSU SupportAssist Client 17 ISSU Tunnel Manger Client DellEMC# YES Configuration audit completed NO ---NO ---YES Configuration audit completed YES Configuration audit completed YES Configuration audit completed YES Configuration audit completed NO ---YES Configuration audit completed YES Configuration audit completed YES
PAGE 578
ISSU SupportAssist Client DellEMC# show issu status Shows the current state of warmboot and a summary of the number of clients registered. Syntax show issu status Parameters N/A Defaults N/A Command Modes EXEC Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.
PAGE 579
Usage Information To enable routing of RRoCE packets, the VLAN ID is mapped to the default VLAN ID of 4095 and this mapping is performed using VLAN translation. After VLAN translation, the RRoCE packets are considered in the same manner as normal IP packets that received on L3 interface and routed in the egress direction. At the egress interface, the VLAN ID is appended to the packet and transmitted out of the interface as a tagged packet with the dot1Q value preserved.
PAGE 580
17 FIP Snooping In a converged Ethernet network, a switch can operate as an intermediate Ethernet bridge to snoop on FIP packets during the login process on Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) forwarders (FCFs). Acting as a transit FIP snooping bridge, the switch uses dynamically created access control lists (ACLs) to permit only authorized FCoE traffic to transmit between an FCoE end-device and an FCF.
PAGE 581
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500 and S6000-ON. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. clear fip-snooping statistics Clears the statistics on the FIP packets snooped on all VLANs, a specified VLAN, or a specified port interface.
PAGE 582
ipc Enter the keyword ipc for IPC-specific debugging. ns Enter the keyword ns for name-server-specific debugging. rscn Enter the keyword rscn for RSCN-specific debugging. rx Enter the keyword rx for packet receive-specific debugging. tx Enter the keyword tx for packet transmit-specific debugging. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 583
● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 584
fip-snooping enable Enable FIP snooping on all VLANs or on a specified VLAN. Syntax fip-snooping enable To disable the FIP snooping feature on all or a specified VLAN, use the no fip-snooping enable command. Defaults FIP snooping is disabled on all VLANs. Command Modes ● CONFIGURATION ● VLAN INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 585
Version Description 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500 and S6000-ON. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. fip-snooping max-sessions-per-enodemac Configure the maximum session limit per ENode MAC address. Syntax fip-snooping max—sessions—per—enode—mac max-sessions-value To return the configured maximum sessions to the default value, use the no fip-snooping max— sessions—per—enode—mac command.
PAGE 586
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500 and S6000-ON. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. The maximum number of FCFs supported per FIP snooping-enabled VLAN is four. show fip-snooping config Display the FIP snooping status and configured FC-MAP values. Syntax show fip-snooping config Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 587
Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500 and S6000-ON. 8.3.19.
PAGE 588
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500 and S6000-ON. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. The following describes the show fip-snooping fcf command shown in the following example. Field Description FCF MAC MAC address of the FCF. FCF Interface Slot/port number of the interface to which the FCF is connected. VLAN VLAN ID number the session uses. FC-MAP FC-Map value the FCF advertises.
PAGE 589
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. The following describes the show fip-snooping statistics command shown in the following example. Field Description Number of VLAN Requests Number of FIP-snoop VLAN request frames received on the interface. Number of VLAN Notifications Number of FIP-snoop VLAN notification frames received on the interface. Number of Multicast Discovery Solicits Number of FIP-snoop multicast discovery solicit frames received on the interface.
PAGE 590
Field Description Number of VN Port Session Timeouts Number of VN port session timeouts that occurred on the interface. Number of Session failures due to Hardware Config Number of session failures due to hardware configuration that occurred on the interface.
PAGE 591
Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number of of of of of of of of of of of of Multicast Discovery Advertisement :4451 Unicast Discovery Advertisement :2 FLOGI Accepts :2 FLOGI Rejects :0 FDISC Accepts :16 FDISC Rejects :0 FLOGO Accepts :0 FLOGO Rejects :0 CVL :0 FCF Discovery Timeouts :0 VN Port Session Timeouts :0 Session failures due to Hardware Config :0 show fip-snooping system Display information on the status of FIP snooping on the switch (enabled or disabl
PAGE 592
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500 and S6000-ON. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 593
18 Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) FRRP is a proprietary protocol for that offers fast convergence in a Layer 2 network without having to run the spanning tree protocol (STP). The resilient ring protocol is an efficient protocol that transmits a high-speed token across a ring to verify the link status. All the intelligence is contained in the master node with practically no intelligence required of the transit mode. Important Points to Remember ● ● ● ● ● ● ● FRRP is media- and speed-independent.
PAGE 594
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced.
PAGE 595
count number Defaults Enter the keyword count then the number of debug outputs. The range is from 1 to 65534. Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-frrp) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 596
Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced. disable Disable the resilient ring protocol.
PAGE 597
interface Configure the primary, secondary, and control-vlan interfaces. Syntax interface {primary interface secondary interface control-vlan vlan-id} To return to the default, use the no interface {primary interface secondary interface control-vlan vlan-id} command.
PAGE 598
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced. Usage Information This command causes the Ring Manager to take ownership of the two ports after IFM validates the configuration.
PAGE 599
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced. mode Set the Master or Transit mode of the ring. Syntax mode {master | transit} To reset the mode, use the no mode {master | transit} command. Parameters Defaults master Enter the keyword master to set the Ring node to Master mode. transit Enter the keywordtransit to set the Ring node to Transit mode.
PAGE 600
To exit the ring protocol, use the no protocol frrp {ring-id} command. Parameters Defaults ring-id Enter the ring identification number. The range is from 1 to 255. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 601
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.
PAGE 602
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced. Usage Information Executing this command without the optional ring-id command clears the statistics counters on all the available rings. Dell EMC Networking OS requires a command line confirmation before the command executes.
PAGE 603
Example (2 Summary) DellEMC# show frrp 2 summary DellEMC#show frrp 2 summary Ring-ID State Mode Ctrl_Vlan Member_Vlans ----------------------------------------------2 Up Master 2 11-20, 25, 27-30 DellEMC# Related Commands ● protocol frrp — enter the resilient ring protocol and designate a ring identification. timer Set the hello interval or dead interval for the Ring control packets.
PAGE 604
Usage Information 604 Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced. The hello interval command is the interval at which ring frames are generated from the primary interface of the master node. The dead interval command is the time that elapses before a time-out occurs.
PAGE 605
19 GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP) The Dell EMC Networking operating system supports the basic GVRP commands on the Dell EMC Networking OS. The generic attribute registration protocol (GARP) mechanism allows the configuration of a GARP participant to propagate through a network quickly. A GARP participant registers or de-registers its attributes with other participants by making or withdrawing declarations of attributes.
PAGE 606
• • • • show show show show config garp timers gvrp gvrp statistics clear gvrp statistics Clear GVRP statistics on an interface. Syntax clear gvrp statistics interface interface Parameters interface interface Defaults Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 607
debug gvrp Enable debugging on GVRP. Syntax debug gvrp {config | events | pdu} To disable debugging, use the no debug gvrp {config | events | pdu} command. Parameters Defaults config Enter the keyword config to enable debugging on the GVRP configuration. event Enter the keyword event to enable debugging on the JOIN/LEAVE events.
PAGE 608
disable Globally disable GVRP. Syntax disable To re-enable GVRP, use the no disable command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-GVRP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 609
leave Enter the keyword leave then the number of milliseconds to configure the leave time. The range is from 100 to 2147483647 milliseconds. The default is 600 milliseconds. NOTE: Designate the milliseconds in multiples of 100. leave-all Enter the keywords leave-all then the number of milliseconds to configure the leave-all time. The range is from 100 to 2147483647 milliseconds. The default is 1000 milliseconds. NOTE: Designate the milliseconds in multiples of 100. Defaults As above.
PAGE 610
gvrp enable Enable GVRP on physical interfaces and LAGs. Syntax gvrp enable To disable GVRP on the interface, use the no gvrp enable command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-INTERFACE Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 611
Command Modes CONFIGURATION-INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 612
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.
PAGE 613
● protocol gvrp — access the GVRP protocol. show garp timers Display the GARP timer settings for sending GARP messages. Syntax show garp timers Defaults None Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.
PAGE 614
Parameters Defaults brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display a brief summary of the GVRP configuration. interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 615
Te 3/2/4 Disabled DellEMC# show gvrp brief Related Commands No ● show gvrp statistics — display the GVRP statistics. show gvrp statistics Display the GVRP configuration statistics.
PAGE 616
● The Attribute Type of the attribute that was being parsed was not the GVRP VID Attribute Type (0x01). ● The attribute that was being parsed had an invalid attribute length. ● The attribute that was being parsed had an invalid GARP event. ● The attribute that was being parsed had an invalid VLAN ID. The valid range is from 1 to 4095. A failed registration can occur for the following reasons: ● Join requests were received on a port that was blocked from learning dynamic VLANs (GVRP Blocking state).
PAGE 617
20 ICMP Message Types This section lists and describes the possible ICMP message type resulting from a ping. The first three columns list the possible symbol or type/code. For example, you would receive a ! or 03 as an echo reply from your ping. Table 5. ICMP messages and their definitions Symbol Type Code . 0 U 3 3 Error echo reply . destination unreachable: 0 network unreachable . 1 host unreachable . 2 protocol unreachable . 3 port unreachable .
PAGE 618
Table 5. ICMP messages and their definitions (continued) Symbol Type Code Description 0 time-to-live equals 0 during transit . 1 time-to-live equals 0 during reassembly . 12 618 Query Error parameter problem: 1 IP header bad (catchall error) . 2 required option missing . 13 0 timestamp request . 14 0 timestamp reply . 15 0 information request (obsolete) . 16 0 information reply (obsolete) . 17 0 address mask request . 18 0 address mask reply .
PAGE 619
21 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) The IGMP commands are supported on the Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • • IGMP Commands IGMP Snooping Commands IGMP Commands Dell EMC Networking OS supports IGMPv1/v2/v3 and is compliant with RFC-3376. Important Points to Remember ● Dell EMC Networking OS supports protocol-independent multicast-sparse (PIM-SM) and protocol-independent sourcespecific multicast (PIM-SSM) include and exclude modes. ● IGMPv2 is the default version of IGMP on interfaces.
PAGE 620
● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Command Modes EXEC Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 621
● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number.
PAGE 622
Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-slot/port) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 623
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information Querier normally sends some group-specific queries when a leave message is received for a group prior to deleting a group from the membership database.
PAGE 624
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command ip igmp query-interval Change the transmission frequency of IGMP general queries the Querier sends.
PAGE 625
Version Description 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series in Interface VLAN mode only to enable the system to act as an IGMP Proxy Querier. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series in Interface VLAN mode only to enable the system to act as an IGMP Proxy Querier. E-Series legacy command.
PAGE 626
Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series in Interface VLAN mode only to enable the system to act as an IGMP Proxy Querier. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series in Interface VLAN mode only to enable the system to act as an IGMP Proxy Querier. E-Series legacy command. ip igmp ssm-map To translate (*,G) memberships to (S,G) memberships, use a statically configured list.
PAGE 627
Usage Information Mapping applies to both v1 and v2 IGMP joins; any updates to the ACL are reflected in the IGMP groups. You may not use extended access lists with this command. When you configure a static SSM map and the router cannot find any matching access lists, the router continues to accept (*,G) groups. Related Commands ● ip access-list standard — create a standard access list to filter based on IP address. ip igmp version Manually set the version of the router to IGMPv2 or IGMPv3.
PAGE 628
show ip igmp groups View the IGMP groups. Syntax show ip igmp [vrf vrf-name] groups [group-address [detail] | detail | interface [group-address [detail]]] Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to configure this setting on that VRF. group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the group address in dotted decimal format to view information on that group only.
PAGE 629
Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series and C-Series. 7.5.1.0 Expanded to support the detail option. E-Series legacy command. Usage Information This command displays the IGMP database, including configured entries for either all groups on all interfaces, all groups on specific interfaces, or specific groups on specific interfaces. The following describes the show ip igmp groups command shown in the following example.
PAGE 630
Last reporter Group source list Source address 65.0.0.1 65.0.0.2 65.0.0.3 65.0.0.4 65.0.0.5 35.0.0.2 Expires 00:01:22 00:01:22 00:01:22 00:01:22 00:01:22 show ip igmp interface View information on the interfaces participating in IGMP. Syntax show ip igmp [vrf vrf-name] interface [interface] Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to view IGMP interfaces associated with that VRF.
PAGE 631
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command. Usage Information Example Example (VRF) IGMP commands accept only non-VLAN interfaces — specifying VLAN does not yield results. The show ip igmp interface command does not display information corresponding to the loopback interfaces.
PAGE 632
show ip igmp ssm-map Display is a list of groups that are currently in the IGMP group table and contain SSM mapped sources. Syntax show ip igmp [vrf vrf-name] ssm-map [group] Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to configure this setting on that VRF. NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to Default VRF. group (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group address in the form A.B.C.
PAGE 633
IGMP Snooping Commands Dell EMC Networking OS supports IGMP Snooping version 2 and 3 on all Dell EMC Networking systems. Important Points to Remember for IGMP Snooping ● Dell EMC Networking OS supports version 1, version 2, and version 3 hosts. ● Dell EMC Networking OS IGMP snooping implementation is based on IP multicast address (not based on Layer 2 multicast mac address) and the IGMP snooping entries are in Layer 3 flow table not in Layer 2 forwarding information base (FIB).
PAGE 634
● For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. Command Modes EXEC Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 635
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 636
Usage Information Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. To enable IGMP snooping, enter this command. When you enable this command from CONFIGURATION mode, IGMP snooping enables on all VLAN interfaces (except the default VLAN). NOTE: Execute the no shutdown command on the VLAN interface for IGMP Snooping to function. ip igmp snooping fast-leave Enable IGMP snooping fast-leave for this VLAN.
PAGE 637
ip igmp snooping last-member-query-interval The last member query interval is the maximum response time inserted into Group-Specific queries sent in response to GroupLeave messages. Syntax ip igmp snooping last-member-query-interval milliseconds To return to the default value, use the no ip igmp snooping last-member-query-interval command. Parameters Defaults milliseconds Enter the interval in milliseconds. The range is from 100 to 65535. The default is 1000 milliseconds.
PAGE 638
To delete a specific multicast router interface, use the no igmp snooping mrouter interface interface command. Parameters interface interface Defaults Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 639
ip igmp snooping querier Enable IGMP querier processing for the VLAN interface. Syntax ip igmp snooping querier To disable IGMP querier processing for the VLAN interface, use the no ip igmp snooping querier command. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN — (conf-if-vl-n) Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 640
group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the group address in dotted decimal format to view information on that group only. interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the interface type and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 641
Example DellEMC# show ip igmp snooping groups Total Number of Groups: 1 IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Mode Reporter 225.1.1.1 Vlan 10 IGMPv2-Compat Member Ports: Te 1/17/1 DellEMC# Uptime Expires Last 00:00:07 00:02:09 1.1.1.2 show ip igmp snooping mrouter Display multicast router interfaces. Syntax Parameters show ip igmp snooping mrouter [vlan number] vlan number Enter the keyword vlan then the vlan number. The range is from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 642
Related Commands 642 ● ip igmp snooping mrouter — configure a static connection to the multicast router. ● show ip igmp groups — view groups.
PAGE 643
22 Interfaces To configure egress, port channel, time domain, and UDP, use these interface commands. Topics: • • • • Basic Interface Commands Port Channel Commands Enhanced Validation of Interface Ranges ip http source-interface Basic Interface Commands The following commands are for Physical, Loopback, and Null interfaces.
PAGE 644
● For non-ON platforms, you can specify multiple ports as slot/port-range. For example, if you want to clear the port configurations corresponding to all ports between 1 and 4, specify the port range as show interfaces interface-type 1/1 - 4. ● For ON platforms, you can specify multiple ports as slot/port/[subport] - slot/port/[subport].
PAGE 645
Example Related Commands DellEMC# clear counters Clear counters on all interfaces [confirm] DellEMC# ● mac learning-limit — allow aging of MACs even though a learning-limit is configured or disallow station move on learned MACs. clear dampening Clear the dampening counters on all the interfaces or just the specified interface.
PAGE 646
Example Related Commands Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# clear dampening tegigabitethernet 1/10/1 Clear dampening counters on TeGi 1/10/1 [confirm] y DellEMC# ● show interfaces dampening — display interface dampening information. ● dampening — configure dampening on an interface. dampening Configure dampening on an interface.
PAGE 647
Usage Information Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. With each flap, Dell EMC Networking OS penalizes the interface by assigning a penalty (1024) that decays exponentially depending on the configured half-life. After the accumulated penalty exceeds the suppress threshold value, the interface moves to the Error-Disabled state.
PAGE 648
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Modified for E-Series: Revised from 78 to 240 characters. Important Points to Remember: ● To use special characters as a part of the description string, you must enclose the whole string in double quotes.
PAGE 649
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S3048-ON, S4048-ON, S5000, S6000, S6000– ON, and Z9500. Use the default interface command to set a Gigabit Ethernet, 10- Gigabit Ethernet, or 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface to its factory-default state. By default, a physical interface is disabled (shutdown) with no assigned IP address or switchport (no ip address).
PAGE 650
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.4.1.
PAGE 651
At the egress interface, the VLAN ID is appended to the packet and transmitted out of the interface as a tagged packet with the dot1Q value preserved. The dot1Q value is preserved only for egress interfaces that are associated with a VLAN or a lite-subinterface . If a Layer 3 interface is configured without the encapsulation 802.1Q VLAN ID or is an untagged interface in a VLAN , the dot1Q value is not preserved .
PAGE 652
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(0.0) Introduced on the platforms S4048–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, S4048T-ON, S3048–ON, S6000, S6010–ON, S5048F-ON, FN-IOM, and MXL. 9.13(0.2P2) Introduced on the S3100.
PAGE 653
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Enabled on 25G and 50G interfaces on the Z9100–ON by default. Introduced support to enable or disable FEC independent of autonegotiation for 100G interfaces on the S6100–ON and Z9100–ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 654
Defaults negotiate (Optional) Enter the keyword negotiate to enable the pause-negotiation with the egress port of the peer device. If the negotiate command is not used, pause-negotiation is disabled. 40-gigabit Ethernet interfaces do not support pausenegotiation monitor Enter the keyword monitor then the session-ID to enable mirror flow control frames on the interface. The range is from 0 to 65535.
PAGE 655
● Half duplex cannot be configured when the flow control configuration is on (default is rx on tx on). The following error is returned: Can’t configure half duplex when flowcontrol is on, config ignored NOTE: The flow control must be off (rx off tx off) before configuring the half duplex. ● Speeds less than one Gig cannot be configured when the asymmetric flow control configuration is on.
PAGE 656
off off off off off off off off off off on off off off on off off off off off off on on on off off on on off off on on off on on on off off on on off off on on off off on on off off on on interface Configure a physical or virtual interface on the switch. Syntax interface interface Parameters Defaults interface Enter one of the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a null interface, enter the keyword null then the slot/port information. The Null interface number is 0.
PAGE 657
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4(0.0) Added the support for interfaces. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.
PAGE 658
interface group Create or delete group of VLANs with a single command. You can also use this command to apply a set of configurations on a group of interfaces. Syntax interface group [interface | vlan vlanid {- vlanid } ] To delete a range of VLANs, use the following command: no interface group vlan vlanid {- vlanid} Parameters interface, interface,... Enter the keywords interface group and one of the interfaces — slot/port or VLAN number. Select the range of interfaces for bulk configuration.
PAGE 659
Example DellEMC(conf)# interface group ? fortyGigE FortyGigabit Ethernet interface gigabitethernet GigabitEthernet interface IEEE 802.3z tengigabitethernet TenGigabit Ethernet interface twentyFiveGigE TwentyFiveGigabit Ethernet interface vlan VLAN keyword DellEMC(conf)# interface group vlan 1 - 2 , tengigabitethernet 1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-group-vl-1-2,tw-1/1)# no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-group-vl-1-2,tw-1/1)# end Related Commands ● interface range — configure a range of interfaces.
PAGE 660
Related Commands ● ● ● ● interface interface interface interface — configure a physical interface. null — configure a Null interface. port-channel — configure a port channel. vlan — configure a VLAN. interface managementEthernet Configure the Management port on the system (either the Primary or Standby RPM). Syntax interface managementEthernet slot/port Parameters Defaults slot/port Not configured.
PAGE 661
interface null Configure a Null interface on the switch. Syntax Parameters Defaults interface null number number Enter zero (0) as the Null interface number. Not configured; number = 0 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 662
interface range This command permits configuration of a range of interfaces to which subsequent commands are applied (bulk configuration). Using the interface range command, you can enter identical commands for a range of interface. Syntax interface range interface {slot/port[subport] | port} — {slot/port[subport] | port}, interface {slot/port[/subport] | port} — {slot/port[/subport] | port},...
PAGE 663
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.2.1.0 Added support for 4093 VLANs on E-Series. Prior releases supported 2094. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. When creating an interface range, interfaces appear in the order they are entered; they are not sorted.
PAGE 664
Use the show running-config command to display the VLAN and port-channel interfaces. VLAN or port-channel interfaces that are not displayed in the show running-config command cannot be used with the bulk configuration feature of the interface range command. You cannot create virtual interfaces (VLAN, Port-channel) using the interface range command. NOTE: If a range has VLAN, physical and port-channel interfaces, only commands related to physical interfaces can be bulk configured.
PAGE 665
interface range macro (define) Defines a macro for an interface range and then saves the macro in the running configuration. Syntax Parameters define interface range macro name interface , interface , ... name Enter up to 16 characters for the macro name. interface, interface,... Enter the keywords interface range and the interface information. Select the range of interfaces for bulk configuration. You can enter up to six comma-separated ranges. Spaces are not required between the commas.
PAGE 666
Example (Single Range) Version Description pre-Version 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. This example shows how to define an interface range macro named test. Execute the show runningconfig command to display the macro definition.
PAGE 667
Example (Single Range) Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.0 Introduced This example shows the macro named test that was defined earlier.
PAGE 668
Usage Information For more information about VLANs and the commands to configure them, see Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands. FTP, TFTP, and SNMP operations are not supported on a VLAN. MAC ACLs and IP ACLs are supported. For more information, see Access Control Lists (ACL). The following features are not supported on VLANs associated with an OpenFlow instance: ● IPv4 ● IPv6 ● MTU If OpenFlow VLANs are configured on the switch, spanning-tree protocols cannot be enabled simultaneously.
PAGE 669
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. Example DellEMC(conf-if-fi-1/1/1)#intf-type cr2 autoneg DellEMC(conf-if-fi-1/1/1)#no intf-type cr2 autoneg intf-type cr4 autoneg Set the interface type as CR4 with auto-negotiation enabled.
PAGE 670
Defaults Enabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.
PAGE 671
● For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 672
Example (Single Interface) Key Description a Change the view to the previous interface on the line card, or if in line card mode, the previous line card in the chassis. T Increase the screen refresh rate. t Decrease the screen refresh rate. q Return to the CLI prompt. systest-3 Monitor time: 00:00:06 Refresh Intvl.
PAGE 673
Te 1/6/3 Up 17304769659 3139507 7133354895 523329 m - Change mode c - Clear screen b - Display bytes r - Display pkts/bytes per sec l - Page up a - Page down mtu Set the link maximum transmission unit (MTU) (frame size) for an Ethernet interface. Syntax mtu value To return to the default MTU value, use the no mtu command. Parameters Defaults value Enter a maximum frame size in bytes. The range is from 594 to 9416. The default is 1554.
PAGE 674
● All members must have the same link MTU value and the same IP MTU value. ● The port channel link MTU and IP MTU must be less than or equal to the link MTU and IP MTU values configured on the channel members. For example, if the members have a link MTU of 2100 and an IP MTU 2000, the port channel’s MTU values cannot be higher than 2100 for link MTU or 2000 bytes for IP MTU. VLANs: ● All members of a VLAN must have same IP MTU value. ● Members can have different Link MTU values.
PAGE 675
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. This command is supported on 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet interfaces. You can use the negotiation auto command on the 10G ports on the device.
PAGE 676
Input Statistics: ... User Information Both sides of the link must have auto-negotiation enabled or disabled for the link to come up. The following details the possible speed and auto-negotiation combinations for a line between two 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet interfaces.
PAGE 677
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. The following describes the interface command shown in the following example. This example sets a port as hybrid, makes the port a tagged member of VLAN 20, and an untagged member of VLAN 10, which becomes the native VLAN of the port.
PAGE 678
NOTE: Because polling occurs every 15 seconds, the number of seconds designated here rounds to the multiple of 15 seconds lower than the entered value. For example, if 44 seconds is designated, it rounds to 30; 45 to 59 seconds rounds to 45. Defaults 299 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 679
entire buffer is cleared; the show int stats command shows the rate information to be 0 as the polling interval is less than 5. Defaults 299 seconds Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11.0.0 Introduced on all Dell EMC Networking OS platforms.
PAGE 680
Example Version Description pre-Version 6.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC(conf-if-hu-1/4)# show config ! interface HundredGigE 1/4 no ip address mtu 9416 switchport no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-hu-1/4)# show config (from INTERFACE RANGE mode) Display the bulk configured interfaces (interface range). Syntax show config Command Modes CONFIGURATION INTERFACE (conf-if-range) Command History Example 680 Interfaces This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 681
no ip address switchport no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-range-te-1/1/1-1/1/2)# show interfaces Display information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface. Syntax Parameters show interfaces interface-type[—range] interface Enter one of the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For stack-units, enter the keywords stack-unit then the slot/port information.
PAGE 682
Version Description Added support to display 10GBASE-T information on the S4048, S4048T, S6000, S6000-ON, S6100, Z9500, S6010, and Z9100. Included display information about EEE on the S3048–ON. Usage Information 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. Included display information about EEE on the S3100 series, S4820T, and S5000. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.9(0.
PAGE 683
Line Description TenGigabitEther net 1/1... Interface type and administrative and line protocol status. Hardware is... Interface hardware information, assigned MAC address, and current address. Pluggable media present... Present pluggable media wavelength, type, and rate.
PAGE 684
Line Description ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Example Example 684 Interfaces Vlans = number of VLAN tagged packets throttles = packets containing PAUSE frames discarded = number of packets discarded without any processing collisions = number of packet collisions wred=count both packets discarded in the MAC and in the hardware-based queues Rate information... Estimate of the input and output traffic rate over a designated interval (30 to 299 seconds).
PAGE 685
0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded Output Statistics: 0 packets, 0 bytes, 0 underruns 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions, 0 wreddrops Rate info (interval 299 seconds): Input 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Output 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.
PAGE 686
Hardware is DellEMCEth, address is 4c:76:25:e5:a7:c3 Current address is 4c:76:25:e5:a7:c3 Pluggable media not present Forward Error Correction(FEC) configured is cl74 (BaseR-FEC) FEC status is ON OUI is 0x6a737d Interface index is 2111501 Internet address is not set Mode of IPv4 Address Assignment : NONE DHCP Client-ID :4c7625e5a7c3 MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed 50000 Mbit Flowcontrol rx off tx off ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 00:00:16 Queuein
PAGE 687
Output 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Time since last interface status change: 00:00:03 Example (Management Ethernet) Example (Management Ethernet, two IPv6 addresses) DellEMC# show interfaces managementethernet 1/1 ManagementEthernet 1/1 is up, line protocol is up Hardware is DellEMCEth, address is 00:01:e8:0b:a9:4c Current address is 00:01:e8:0b:a9:4c Pluggable media not present Interface index is 503595208 Internet address is 10.11.201.
PAGE 688
of-instance: 2 Internet address is not set MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed auto ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 00:05:12 Queueing strategy: fifo Time since last interface status change: 00:05:12 Related Commands ● show interfaces configured – display any interface with a non-default configuration. ● show ip interface – display Layer 3 information about the interfaces.
PAGE 689
Input Statistics: 10 packets, 10000 bytes 0 Vlans 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 10 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded Output Statistics: 1 packets, 64 bytes, 0 underruns 1 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 1 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 Vlans, 0 throttles, 0 discarded,
PAGE 690
Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.9(0.0) Added support to display the interface configurations corresponding to a range of ports. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 691
Example Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series.
PAGE 692
Parameters interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following keywords the interface information: ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 693
Example Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 694
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series and Z-Series. NOTE: This command also enables you to view information corresponding to a range of ports. ● You can specify multiple ports as port-range. For example, if you want to display information corresponding to all ports between 1 and 4, specify the port range as show interfaces interface-type 1 - 4.
PAGE 695
1/5 1/7 1/9 1/11 1/13 1/15 2/1 2/3 2/5 2/7 2/9 2/11 2/13 2/15 Quad Quad Quad Quad Quad Quad Quad Quad Quad Quad Quad Quad Quad Quad 10G 10G 10G 10G 10G 10G 10G 10G 10G 10G 10G 10G 10G 10G show interfaces switchport Display only virtual and physical interfaces in Layer 2 mode. This command displays the Layer 2 mode interfaces’ IEEE 802.1Q tag status and VLAN membership.
PAGE 696
Version Description 9.9(0.0) Added support to display the interface configurations corresponding to a range of ports. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.5.1.
PAGE 697
Related Commands ● interface — configure a physical interface on the switch. ● show ip interface — display Layer 3 information about the interfaces. ● show interfaces transceiver — display the physical status and operational status of an installed transceiver. The output also displays the transceiver’s serial number. show interfaces transceiver Display the details of an installed transceiver.
PAGE 698
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Output augmented with diagnostic data for pluggable media. 7.7.1.
PAGE 699
Line Description Temp High Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. Voltage High Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. Bias High Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. TX Power High Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. RX Power High Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
PAGE 700
Line Description RS state This is the reserved digital state of the pin AS(1) per SFF-8079 and RS(1) per SFF-8431. Tx Disable state If the admin status of the port is down then this flag is set to true. Temperature High Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current voltage value displayed above. Voltage High Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Temperature value displayed above.
PAGE 701
SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ 0x00 SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ SFP+ 1/2 Id 1/2 Ext Id 1/2 Connector 1/2 Transceiver Code 0x00 0x00 1/2 Encoding 1/2 BR Nominal 1/2 Length(SFM) Km 1/2 Length(SFM) 100m 1/2 Length(OM3) 10m 1/2 Length(OM2) 10m 1/2 Length(OM1) 10m 1/2 Length(Copper-1m/AOC-1m/OM4-10m) 1/2 Vendor Name 1/2 Vendor PN 1/2 Trans Type 1/2 Vendor Rev 1/2 Laser Wavelength 1/2 CheckCodeBase 1/2 Serial Extended ID fields 1/2 Options 1/2 BR
PAGE 702
QSFP 13/1 Voltage Low Alarm threshold QSFP 13/1 Bias Low Alarm threshold QSFP 13/1 RX Power Low Alarm threshold =================================== QSFP 13/1 Temp High Warning threshold QSFP 13/1 Voltage High Warning threshold QSFP 13/1 Bias High Warning threshold QSFP 13/1 RX Power High Warning threshold QSFP 13/1 Temp Low Warning threshold QSFP 13/1 Voltage Low Warning threshold QSFP 13/1 Bias Low Warning threshold QSFP 13/1 RX Power Low Warning threshold =================================== QSFP 13/1 Temp
PAGE 703
Example Related Commands Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced. DellEMC(conf-if-range-te-1/2/1,fo-1/2/6)# show range 2/2/1 - 0 2/56 - 0 ● interface — configure a physical interface on the switch. ● show ip interface — display Layer 3 information about the interfaces. shutdown Disable an interface. Syntax shutdown To activate an interface, use the no shutdown command.
PAGE 704
command on a port channel disables all traffic on the port channel and the individual interfaces within the port channel. To enable a port channel, enter no shutdown on the port channel interface and at least one interface within that port channel. The shutdown and description commands are the only commands that you can configure on an interface that is a member of a port channel. Related Commands ● interface port-channel — create a port channel interface. ● interface vlan — create a VLAN.
PAGE 705
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Supported on LC-EH-GE-50P or the LC-EJ-GE-50P cards. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information This command is found on the 10/100/1000/10000 Base-T Ethernet interfaces.
PAGE 706
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the S55, S60, and S4810 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-Version 6.
PAGE 707
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for dynamically fanning-out of interfaces on S6000. Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.1 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 708
● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information. Defaults port-channel (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords port-channel if the backup port is a static or dynamic port channel. mode (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword mode to set the interface mode.
PAGE 709
Usage Information If an IP address or VRRP group is assigned to the interface, you cannot use the switchport command on the interface. To use the switchport command on an interface, only the no ip address and no shutdown statements must be listed in the show config output. When you enter the switchport command, the interface is automatically added to the default VLAN. To use the switchport backup interface command on a port, first enter the switchport command.
PAGE 710
channel-member Add an interface to the Port Channel, while in INTERFACE PORTCHANNEL mode. Syntax channel-member interface To delete an interface from a Port Channel, use the no channel-member interface command. Parameters Defaults interface (OPTIONAL) Enter any of the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 711
Link MTU and IP MTU considerations for Port Channels are: ● All members must have the same link MTU value and the same IP MTU value. ● The Port Channel link MTU and IP MTU must be less than or equal to the link MTU and IP MTU values configured on the channel members. For example, if the members have a link MTU of 2100 and an IP MTU 2000, the Port Channel’s MTU values cannot be higher than 2100 for link MTU or 2000 bytes for IP MTU.
PAGE 712
Related Commands Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series, E-Series, and S-Series. ● port-channel failover-group — access PORT-CHANNEL FAILOVER-GROUP mode to configure a LAG failover group. ● show interfaces port-channel — display information on configured Port Channel groups. interface port-channel Create a Port Channel interface, which is a link aggregation group (LAG) containing 16 physical interfaces on the S-Series.
PAGE 713
the interface can only have the shutdown, description, and name commands configured. The Port Channel’s configuration is applied to the interfaces within the Port Channel. A Port Channel can contain any physical interface. Based on the first interface configured in the Port Channel and enabled, Dell EMC Networking OS determines the common speed. For more information, refer to channel-member. If the line card is in a Jumbo mode chassis, you can also configure the mtu and ip mtu commands.
PAGE 714
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-Version 6.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. If you use this command to configure the minimum number of links in a LAG that must be in “oper up” status, the LAG must have at least that number of “oper up” links before it can be declared as up.
PAGE 715
Related Command ● group — group two LAGs in a supergroup (“fate-sharing group”). ● show interfaces port-channel — display information on configured Port Channel groups. show interfaces port-channel Display information on configured Port Channel groups. ` Syntax Parameters show interfaces port-channel [channel-number] [brief] [description] channel-number For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel then a number. The range is from 1 to 4096.
PAGE 716
Version Description E-Series legacy command Usage Information Example 716 Interfaces The following describes the show interfaces port-channel command shown in the following example. Field Description Port-Channel 1... Displays the LAG’s status. In the Example, the status of the LAG’s LAG fatesharing group (“Failover-group”) is listed. Hardware is... Displays the interface’s hardware information and its assigned MAC address. Port-channel is part...
PAGE 717
Received 0 input symbol errors, 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 IP Checksum, 0 overrun, 0 discarded 1218120 packets output, 100745130 bytes, 0 underruns Output 5428 Multicasts, 4 Broadcasts, 1212688 Unicasts 1216142 IP Packets, 0 Vlans, 0 MPLS 0 throttles, 0 discarded Rate info (interval 299 sec): Input 01.50Mbits/sec, 2433 packets/sec Output 00.
PAGE 718
● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 719
The output displays three entries: ● Egress port for unfragmented packets. ● In the event of fragmented packets, the egress port of the first fragment. ● In the event of fragmented packets, the egress port of the subsequent fragments. NOTE: In the show port channel flow command output, the egress port for an unknown unicast, multicast, or broadcast traffic is not displayed.
PAGE 720
Command History 720 Interfaces This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 721
23 IPv4 Routing The basic IPv4 commands are supported by Dell EMC Networking OS on the platform.
PAGE 722
• • • • • • • show show show show show show show ipv6 management-route ip protocols ip route ip route list ip route summary ip traffic tcp statistics arp To associate an IP address with a MAC address in the switch, use address resolution protocol (ARP). Syntax arp [vrf vrf-name] ip-address mac-address interface To remove an ARP address, use the no arp ip-address command. Parameters Defaults vrf vrf-name Enter a VRF name to configure an ARP entry for that VRF.
PAGE 723
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. You cannot use Class D or Class E IP addresses or zero IP address (0.0.0.0) when creating a static ARP.
PAGE 724
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. Usage Information This timer is an exponential backoff timer. Over the specified period, the time between ARP requests increases. This behavior reduces the potential for the system to slow down while waiting for a multitude of ARP responses.
PAGE 725
Beginning with Dell EMC Networking OS version 8.3.1.0, when a gratuitous ARP is received, Dell EMC Networking OS installs an ARP entry on all three CPUs. arp max-entries Enables you to configure the maximum number of ARP entries per VRF that are allowed for IPv4.. Syntax Parameters Defaults arp max-entries [vrf vrf-name] max-number vrf vrf-name Enter the name of a specific VRF for which you want to configure maximum number of ARP entries that IPv4 allows.
PAGE 726
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 727
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 728
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 729
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 730
clear ip route Clear one or all routes in the routing table. Syntax clear ip route [vrf vrf-name] {* | ip-address mask} Parameters vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF to clear the routes corresponding to that VRF. * Enter an asterisk (*) to clear all learned IP routes. ip-address mask Enter a specific IP address and mask in dotted decimal format to clear that IP address from the routing table.
PAGE 731
clear tcp statistics Clear TCP counters. Syntax Parameters clear tcp statistics [all | cp] all Enter the keyword all to clear all TCP statistics maintained on all switch processors. cp (OPTIONAL) Enter the cp to clear only statistics from the Control Processor. rp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp to clear only the statistics from Route Processor. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 732
● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information.
PAGE 733
debug ip dhcp Enable debug information for dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) relay transactions and display the information on the console. Syntax debug ip dhcp To disable debug, use the no debug ip dhcp command. Defaults Debug disabled Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 734
00:12:40 : %RELAY-I-BOOTREQUEST: Forwarded BOOTREQUEST for 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C to 14.4.4.2 00:12:42 : %RELAY-I-PACKET: BOOTP REPLY (Unicast) received at interface 14.4.4.1 BOOTP Reply, hops = 0, XID = 0xda4f9503, secs = 0, hwaddr = 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C, giaddr = 113.3.3.17 00:12:42 : %RELAY-I-BOOTREPLY: Forwarded BOOTREPLY for 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C to 113.3.3.254 00:12:42 : %RELAY-I-PACKET: BOOTP REQUEST (Unicast) received at interface 113.3.3.
PAGE 735
Example Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.
PAGE 736
● For the Management interface on the stack-unit, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information 736 This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 737
Example Usage Information Field Description UDP src= Displays the source and destination ports for the UDP packets. ICMP type= Displays the ICMP type and code. IP Fragment States that it is a fragment and displays the unique number identifying the fragment (Ident) and the offset (in 8-byte units) of this fragment (fragment offset) from the beginning of the original datagram. IP: s=10.1.2.62 (local), d=10.1.2.
PAGE 738
ip address Assign a primary and secondary IP address to the interface. Syntax ip address ip-address mask [secondary] To delete an IP address from an interface, use the no ip address [ip-address] command. Parameters Defaults ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format. mask Enter the mask of the IP address in slash prefix format (for example, /24). secondary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword secondary to designate the IP address as the secondary address. Not configured.
PAGE 739
To disable the interface from receiving directed broadcast packets, use the no ip directedbroadcast command. Defaults Disabled (that is, the interface does not receive directed broadcast packets) Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 740
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 741
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 742
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. You can only configure one domain name with the ip domain-name command.
PAGE 743
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Added support for IPv6. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.9.1.0 Introduced VRF on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 744
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.3.1.0 Introduced for the E-Series. Usage Information This command disables the incrementing of the hops field when boot requests are relayed to a DHCP server through Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 745
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced for the E-Series.
PAGE 746
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.3(0.
PAGE 747
● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information.
PAGE 748
ip max-frag-count Set the maximum number of fragments allowed in one packet for packet re-assembly. Syntax ip max-frag-count count To place no limit on the number of fragments allowed, use the no ip max-frag-count command. Parameters Defaults count Enter a number for the number of fragments allowed for re-assembly. The range is from 2 to 256. No limit is set on number of fragments allowed. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 749
Parameters Defaults ipv4-address Enter the IPv4 address, in dotted decimal format, of the name server to be used. ipv4-address2... ipv4-address6 (OPTIONAL) Enter up five more IPv4 addresses, in dotted decimal format, of name servers to be used. Separate the addresses with a space. No name servers are configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 750
Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 751
● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383.
PAGE 752
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.7(0.0) Included the weighted parameter to support weighted ECMP feature. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.2.(0.0) Added support for tunnel interface type. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.
PAGE 753
1.1.1.0/24 4.4.4.2 weight 100 ip route vrf test weight 200 Related Commands 1.1.1.0/24 6.6.6.2 ● show ip route — view the switch routing table. ip source-route Enable Dell EMC Networking OS to forward IP packets with source route information in the header. Syntax ip source-route To drop packets with source route information, use the no ip route-source command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 754
Parameters <8-75> Wait duration in seconds for the TCP connection to be established. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000 platforms.
PAGE 755
Usage Information Use this command to add the IPv4 catch-all route (0.0.0.0/0) in the LPM route forwarding table if it was deleted using the no ip unknown-unicast command previously. This will be the default configuration after reload. ipv4 unicast-host-route Enable programming of IPv4 /32 route prefixes in L3 host table. Syntax [no] ipv4 unicast-host-route Defaults Disabled by default. By default, all the IPv4 route prefixes are installed only in the LPM table.
PAGE 756
ip unreachables Enable the generation of internet control message protocol (ICMP) unreachable messages. Syntax ip unreachables To disable the generation of ICMP messages, use the no ip unreachables command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 757
Parameters Defaults ip-selection {dest-ip | source-ip} Enter the keywords to distribute IP traffic based on the following criteria: ● dest-ip — Uses destination IP address and destination port fields to hash. The hashing mechanism returns a 3-bit index indicating which port the packet should be forwarded. ● source-ip — Uses source IP address and source port fields to hash. The hashing mechanism returns a 3-bit index indicating which port the packet should be forwarded.
PAGE 758
● ● ● ● ● ● IP source address IP destination address VLAN Protocol TCP/UDP source port TCP/UDP destination port load-balance hg Choose the traffic flow parameters the hash calculation uses while distributing the traffic across internal higig links.
PAGE 759
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Added support for IPv6. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 760
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for forty gigabit, vlan, and tengigabit ethernet interfaces. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.
PAGE 761
● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information. ● For the Management interface on the stack-unit, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. ip ip-address mask inspection (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ip then an IP address in the dotted decimal format.
PAGE 762
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The following example shows two VLANs that are associated with a private VLAN (PVLAN) (refer to Private VLAN (PVLAN)).
PAGE 763
Description Example (Summary) Total Entries Lists the total number of ARP entries in the ARP table. Static Entries Lists the total number of configured or static ARP entries. Dynamic Entries Lists the total number of learned or dynamic ARP entries. CPU Lists which CPU the entries are stored on.
PAGE 764
show hosts View the host table and DNS configuration. Syntax show hosts Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 765
Field Description ● ?? — the entry is suspect. Example Related Commands TTL Displays the amount of time until the entry ages out of the cache. For dynamically learned entries only. Type Displays IP as the type of entry. Address Displays the IP addresses assigned to the host.
PAGE 766
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Increased the stacking range to 12 units in S3100 series. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 767
100.1.1.0/24 0.0.0.0/0 DellEMC# Example (Member-Info) 1 0 0 1 1000 0 00:01:00:00:00:02 00:00:00:00:00:00 Te 3/12/1 CP 0 - DellEMC# show ip cam stack-unit 3 po 0 ecmp-group member-info detail Group Index Member Count Mac-Addr Port VLan ID ------------------------------------------------------------------------0 2 00:03:00:00:00:02 Po 10 20 00:01:00:00:00:02 Te 1/12/1 1000 DellEMC# show ip fib stack-unit View all Forwarding Information Base (FIB) entries of a specific stack-unit.
PAGE 768
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Added support for up to seven stack members. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. The following describes the show ip fib stack-unit command shown in the following example. Field Description Destination Lists the destination IP address. Gateway Displays either the word “direct” and an interface for a directly connected route or the remote IP address used to forward the traffic.
PAGE 769
● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 770
this command for routed packed only. For switched packets, use the show port-channel-flow command. The show ip flow command does not compute the egress port information when load-balance mac hashing is also configured due to insufficient information (the egress MAC is not available). S-Series produces the following error message: %Error: Unable to read IP route table. Example DellEMC# show ip flow interface te 1/4/1 20.1.1.1 100.1.1.2 protocol tcp Flow: 20.1.1.1 100.1.1.
PAGE 771
Example Version Description 9.11(0.0) Updated the command output to include the unicast reverse path forwarding (uRPF) status. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.
PAGE 772
Internet address is not set IP MTU is 1500 bytes Directed broadcast forwarding is disabled Proxy ARP is enabled Split Horizon is enabled Poison Reverse is disabled ICMP redirects are not sent ICMP unreachables are not sent IP unicast RPF check is not supported DellEMC# Usage Information The following describes the show ip interface brief command shown in the following example. Fields Description Interface Displays type of interface and the associated slot and port number.
PAGE 773
Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 774
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.4.1.
PAGE 775
Example Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Regular evaluation optimization enabled/disabled added to display output. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# show ip protocols Routing Protocol is "bgp 1" Cluster Id is set to 20.20.20.
PAGE 776
NOTE: bgp, isis, ospf, and rip. ● If you enter bgp, you can include the BGP as-number . ● If you enter isis, you can include the ISIS routing-tag. ● If you enter ospf, you can include the OSPF process-id. process-id (OPTIONAL) Specify that only OSPF routes with a certain process ID must be displayed. routing-tag (OPTIONAL) Specify that only ISIS routes with a certain routing tag must be displayed. connected (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword connected to view only the directly connected routes.
PAGE 777
Field Description ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● C = connected S = static R = RIP B = BGP IN = internal BGP EX = external BGP LO = Locally Originated O = OSPF IA = OSPF inter area N1 = OSPF NSSA external type 1 N2 = OSPF NSSA external type 2 E1 = OSPF external type 1 E2 = OSPF external type 2 i = IS-IS L1 = IS-IS level-1 L2 = IS-IS level-2 IA = IS-IS inter-area * = candidate default > = non-active route + = summary routes The weight for weighted ECMP route calculations is displayed for each path
PAGE 778
Route Source Active Routes Non-active Routes connected 2 0 static 1 0 Total 3 0 Total 3 active route(s) using 612 bytes R1_E600i>show ip route static ? | Pipe through a command R1_E600i>show ip route static Destination Gateway Dist/Metric Last Change ----------- ------- ----------- ----------*S 0.0.0.0/0 via 10.10.91.
PAGE 779
--------------------S 1.1.1.0/24 C C 4.4.4.0/24 6.6.6.0/24 ------4.4.4.2, via Te 1/4/1 6.6.6.2, via Te 1/16/1 Direct, Te 1/4/1 Direct, Te 1/16/1 ----------1/0 00:00:01 0/0 0/0 00:01:32 00:01:25 DellEMC(conf)# do show ip route 1.1.1.0/24 Routing entry for 1.1.1.0/24 Known via "static", distance 1, metric 0 Last update 00:05:01 ago Routing Descriptor Blocks: * 4.4.4.2, via TenGigabitEthernet 1/4/1 * 6.6.6.
PAGE 780
Example DellEMC# show ip route list test Codes:C- connected, S - static, R - RIP, B- BGP, IN - internal BGP, EX - external BGP,LO - Locally Originated, O- OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area, N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2- OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2- OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2- IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default, >- non-active route, + - summary route Gateway of last resort is not set R R R R C Related Commands Destination --
PAGE 781
Usage Information Example Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The following describes the show ip route summary shown in the following example. Column Heading Description Route Source Identifies how the route is configured in Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 782
rp2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rp2 to view only the statistics from Route Processor 2. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information 782 This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.
PAGE 783
Keyword Definition ...encapsulation failed Counts packets which could not be forwarded due to ARP resolution failure. Dell EMC Networking OS sends an arp request prior to forwarding an IP packet. If a reply is not received, Dell EMC Networking OS repeats the request three times. These packets are counted in encapsulation failed. Rcvd: ...short packets The number of bytes in the packet are too small. ...bad length The length of the packet was not correct. ...
PAGE 784
show tcp statistics View information on TCP traffic through the switch. Syntax show tcp statistics {all | cp} Parameters all Enter the keyword all to view all TCP information. cp Enter the keyword cp to view only TCP information from the Control Processor. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information 784 This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.
PAGE 785
Example Field Description 0 packets with data after window Displays the number of packets and bytes received that exceed the switch’s window size. 0 packets after close Displays the number of packet received after the TCP connection was closed. 0 window probe packets... Displays the number of window probe and update packets received. 41 dup ack... Displays the number of duplicate acknowledgement packets and acknowledgement packets with data received. 10184 ack...
PAGE 786
24 IPv6 Basics IPv6 basic commands are supported on the Dell EMC Networking OS. NOTE: For information about the Dell EMC Networking OS version and platform that supports IPv6 in each software feature, see the IPv6 Addressing section in the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide.
PAGE 787
clear ipv6 route Clear (refresh) all or a specific route from the IPv6 routing table. Syntax Parameters clear ipv6 route [vrf vrf-name] {* | ipv6-address prefix-length} vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to clear the IPv6 routes corresponding to that VRF. * Enter the * to clear (refresh) all routes from the IPv6 routing table. ipv6-address prefix-length Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format then the prefix length in the /x format.
PAGE 788
message is generated. Valid range is 1 to 100. When warn-threshold is used, once the limit is reached, additional routes will not be allowed into the RTM ( route table manager ) itself. warning-only Defaults When the warning-only option is used, a syslog message will be thrown when maximum number of dynamic IPv6 routes reaches the limit. Additional dynamic IPv6 routes will still be allowed. No limit is set on the maximum number of dynamic IPv6 routes for a VRF.
PAGE 789
Usage Information Example You can use this command to view the number of supported extended prefix entries in LPM configured. The output also displays the current applied value and the new value that is applicable after the reboot of the device. DellEMC# show cam-ipv6 extended-prefix Cam-Ipv6-LPM Extended Prefix -------------------------------Current Settings cam-ipv6-max-/65-to-/128-Prefix : 2048 DellEMC(conf)# ipv6 unicast-host-route Enable programming of IPv6 /128 route prefixes in L3 host table.
PAGE 790
Version Description 9.11.0.1 Introduced on the S3100 series, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S4810, S4820, S5000, S6000, S6010–ON, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, C9010, Z9500, MXL, and FN IOM. ipv6 nd dns-server Configures Recursive DNS Server (RDNSS) addresses to be distributed via IPv6 router advertisements to an IPv6 device.
PAGE 791
To restore to default, use the no ipv6 nd reachable-time command. Parameters Default reachable-time Enter the reachable time in milliseconds. The value is from 0 to 3600000. The default value is 0. Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(1.0) Introduced on the S5048F–ON.
PAGE 792
Configure the IPv6 route using a next-hop IPv6 address in order for the ping command to detect the destination address. ipv6-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the forwarding router IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. distance (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the metric distance assigned to the route. The range is from 1 to 255. name description (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword name and the description for the IPv6 static route configuration.
PAGE 793
Dell EMC Networking OS withdraws the route. The route is re-installed, by Dell EMC Networking OS, when the recursive resolution is satisfied. After an IPv6 static route interface is created, if an IP address is not assigned to a peer interface, the peer must be manually pinged to resolve the neighbor information. You can specify a weight for an IPv4 or IPv6 static route. If the weight value of a path is 0, then that path is not used for forwarding when weighted ECMP is in effect.
PAGE 794
Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information 794 IPv6 Basics This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 795
Example (SSeries) Field Description Dist/Metric Identifies if the route has a specified distance or metric. Last Change Identifies when the route was last changed or configured.
PAGE 796
25 IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs) IPv6 ACLs and IPv6 Route Map commands are supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. NOTE: For IPv4 ACL commands, see Access Control Lists (ACL). Important Points to Remember ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Certain platforms require manual CAM usage space allotment. For more information, see cam-acl. Egress IPv6 ACL and IPv6 ACL on the Loopback interface is not supported. Reference to an empty ACL permits any traffic.
PAGE 797
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the S-Series. 8.4.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Example Related Commands ● cam-acl — configure CAM profiles to support IPv6 ACLs.
PAGE 798
Example (Manual Profiles) DellEMC# show cam-acl -- Chassis Cam ACL -Current Settings(in block sizes) L2Acl : 2 Ipv4Acl : 2 Ipv6Acl : 4 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 3 -- Line card 4 -Current L2Acl : Ipv4Acl : Ipv6Acl : Ipv4Qos : L2Qos : Settings(in block sizes) 2 2 4 2 3 DellEMC# Related Commands ● cam-acl — configure CAM profiles to support IPv6 ACLs. show ipv6 accounting access-list View the IPv6 access-lists created on the E-Series and the sequence of filters.
PAGE 799
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on ExaScale. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the S-Series. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series ExaScale. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. Increased the name string to accept up to 140 characters. Prior to version 7.8.1.0, names are up to 16 characters long. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series TeraScale. Field Description “Ingress IPv6...
PAGE 800
monitor Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor to monitor traffic on the monitoring interface specified in the flow-based monitoring session along with the filter operation. Not configured. Command Modes ACCESS-LIST Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.
PAGE 801
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 802
ipv6 access-list Configure an access list based on IPv6 addresses or protocols. Syntax ipv6 access-list access-list-name cpu-qos To delete an access list, use the no ipv6 access-list access-list-name command. Parameters Defaults access-list-name Enter the access list name as a string, up to 140 characters. cpu-qos Enter the keyword cpu-qos to assign this ACL to control plane traffic only (CoPP). permit Enter the keyword permit to configure a filter to forward packets meeting this condition.
PAGE 803
cam-acl-egress Allocate space for IPv6 egress ACLs. Syntax Parameters cam-acl-egress {default | l2acl 1-4 ipv4acl 1-4 ipv6acl 0-4} default Use the default CAM profile settings, and set the CAM as follows: ● L2 ACL(l2acl): 1 ● L3 ACL (ipv4acl: 1 ● IPv6 L3 ACL (ipv6acl): 2 l2acl 1-4 ipv4acl 1- 4 ipv6acl 0-4 Allocate space to support IPv6 ACLs. Enter all of the profiles and a range. Enter the CAM profile name then the amount to be allotted. The total space allocated must equal 4.
PAGE 804
DellEMC(conf)# cam-acl-egress l2acl 1 ipv4acl 1 ipv6acl ? <0-4> Number of FP blocks for IPV6 (multiples of 2) DellEMC(conf)# cam-acl-egress l2acl 1 ipv4acl 1 ipv6acl 2 DellEMC(conf)# cam-acl Allocate space for IPv6 ACLs.
PAGE 805
The total amount of space allowed is 16 FP Blocks. System flow requires three blocks and these blocks cannot be reallocated. The ipv4acl profile range is from 0 to 8. When configuring space for IPv6 ACLs, the total number of Blocks must equal 9. The ipv6acl allocation must be a factor of 3 (0,3,6,9).
PAGE 806
26 Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) IS-IS is an interior gateway protocol that uses shortest-path-first algorithm. IS-IS facilitates the communication between open systems, supporting routers passing through both IP and OSI traffic. A router is considered as an intermediate system. Networks are partitioned into manageable routing domains called areas. Intermediate systems send, receive, and forward packets to other routers within their area (Level 1 and Level 1-2 devices).
PAGE 807
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • isis ipv6 metric isis metric isis network point-to-point isis password isis priority is-type log-adjacency-changes lsp-gen-interval lsp-mtu lsp-refresh-interval max-area-addresses max-lsp-lifetime maximum-paths metric-style multi-topology net passive-interface redistribute redistribute bgp redistribute ospf router isis set-overload-bit show config show isis database show isis graceful-restart detail show isis hostname show isis interface show is
PAGE 808
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. To perform protocol-support consistency checks on hello packets, use this command. The adjacencycheck is enabled by default.
PAGE 809
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.5.1.0 Added IPv6 ISIS support. 6.3.1.0 Version 6.3.1.0 Introduced You cannot disable leaking from Level 1 to Level 2. Also, you cannot enable leaking from Level 2 to Level 1.
PAGE 810
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. To prevent the link state database from receiving incorrect routing information from unauthorized routers, use the area-password command on routers within an area. The configured password injects into Level 1 LSPs, CSNPs, and PSNPs. Related Commands ● domain-password — set the authentication password for a routing domain. ● isis password — configure an authentication password for an interface.
PAGE 811
tag (Optional) Enter an alphanumeric string to specify the IS-IS routing tag area. * Enter the keyword * to clear all IS-IS information and restart the IS-IS process. This command removes IS-IS neighbor information and IS-IS LSP database information and the full SPF calculation is done. database Clears IS-IS LSP database information. traffic Clears IS-IS counters. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 812
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. Usage Information To configure a shortcut name that you can use instead of entering a long string of numbers associated with an NSAP address, use this command.
PAGE 813
debug isis adj-packets Enable debugging on adjacency-related activity such as hello packets that are sent and received on IS-IS adjacencies. Syntax debug isis [vrf vrf-name] adj-packets [interface] To turn off debugging, use the no debug isis [vrf vrf-name]adj-packets [interface] command. Parameters vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to enable the debug information on IS-IS for an adjacency tied to that VRF. This command displays the IIH related debug details.
PAGE 814
debug isis local-updates To debug IS-IS local update packets, enable debugging on a specific interface and provides diagnostic information. Syntax debug isis [vrf vrf-name] local-updates [interface] To turn off debugging, use the no debug isis [vrf vrf—name] updates [interface] command. Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to enable the debugging information on IS-IS corresponding to that VRF.
PAGE 815
debug isis snp-packets To debug IS-IS complete sequence number PDU (CSNP) and partial sequence number PDU (PSNP) packets, enable debugging on a specific interface and provides diagnostic information. Syntax debug isis [vrf vrf-name] snp-packets [interface] To turn off debugging, use the no debug isis [vrf vrf-name] snp-packets [interface] command.
PAGE 816
debug isis spf-triggers Enable debugging on the events that triggered IS-IS shortest path first (SPF) events for debugging purposes. Syntax debug isis [vrf vrf-name] spf-triggers To turn off debugging, use the no debug isis [vrf vrf-name] spf-triggers command. Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to enable debugging information on IS-IS corresponding to that VRF. This information contains SPF trigger detail tied to the VRF that you specify.
PAGE 817
● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 818
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ● ROUTER ISIS (for IPv4) ● CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 (for IPv6) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.
PAGE 819
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.
PAGE 820
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 6.3.1.0 Introduced. The administrative distance indicates the trust value of incoming packets. A low administrative distance indicates a high trust rate. A high value indicates a lower trust rate.
PAGE 821
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.5.1.0 Added IPv6 ISIS support. 6.3.1.0 Introduced.
PAGE 822
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.5.1.0 Added IPv6 ISIS support. 6.3.1.0 Introduced. Usage Information You can assign a name to a routing process so a prefix list IS applied to only the routes derived from the specified routing process.
PAGE 823
Usage Information When you execute this command, IS-IS does not download the route to the routing table if the same route was redistributed into IS-IS routing protocol on the same router. domain-password Set the authentication password for a routing domain. Syntax domain-password [hmac-md5 | encryption-type] password To disable the password, use the no domain-password command. Parameters Defaults hmac-md5 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords hmac-md5 to encrypt the password using MD5.
PAGE 824
Parameters Defaults ietf Enter ietf to enable graceful restart on the IS-IS router. Graceful restart disabled. Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 825
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.1.
PAGE 826
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● graceful-restart t3 — configure the overall wait time before graceful restart completes. graceful-restart t1 Set the graceful restart wait time before unacknowledged restart requests are generated.
PAGE 827
graceful-restart t2 Configure the wait time for the graceful restart timer T2 that a restarting router uses as the wait time for each database to synchronize. Syntax graceful-restart t2 {level-1 | level-2} seconds To return to the default, use the no graceful-restart t2 command. Parameters Defaults level-1, level-2 Enter the keywords level-1 or level-2 to identify the database instance type to which the wait interval applies. seconds Enter the gracefule-restart t2 time in seconds.
PAGE 828
Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 829
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.
PAGE 830
Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. Usage Information To build name-to-systemID mapping tables through the protocol, use this command. All show commands that display systems also display the hostname. Related Commands ● clns host — define a name-to-NSAP mapping. ignore-lsp-errors Ignore LSPs with bad checksums instead of purging those LSPs. Syntax ignore-lsp-errors To return to the default values, use the no ignore-lsp-errors command.
PAGE 831
Parameters Defaults tag (OPTIONAL) The tag you specify identifies a specific area routing process. If you do not specify a tag, a null tag is assigned. No processes are configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.
PAGE 832
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.
PAGE 833
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.
PAGE 834
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. The default values of this command are typically satisfactory transmission times for a specific interface on a designated intermediate system.
PAGE 835
Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. Usage Information Hello packets are held for a length of three times the value of the hello interval. To conserve bandwidth and CPU usage, use a high hello interval seconds. Use a low hello interval seconds for faster convergence (but uses more bandwidth and CPU resources).
PAGE 836
Related Commands ● isis hello-interval — specify the length of time between hello packets. isis hello padding Turn ON or OFF padding of hello PDUs from INTERFACE mode. Syntax isis hello padding To return to the default, use the no isis hello padding command. Defaults Padding of hello PDUs is enabled (ON). Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 837
level-2 Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords level-2 to configure the SPF calculation for Level 2 (inter-area) routing. default-metric = 10; level-1 (if not otherwise specified) Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.
PAGE 838
level-2 Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords level-2 to configure the SPF calculation for Level 2 (inter-area) routing. default-metric = 10; level-1 (if not otherwise specified) Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.
PAGE 839
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. isis password Configure an authentication password for an interface. Syntax isis password [hmac-md5] password [level-1 | level-2] To delete a password, use the no isis password [password] [level-1 | level-2] command.
PAGE 840
You can assign different passwords for different routing levels by using the keywords level-1 and level-2. The no form of this command disables the password for Level 1 or Level 2 routing, using the respective keywords level-1 or level-2. This password provides limited security as it is processed as plain text. isis priority Set the priority of the designated router you select.
PAGE 841
is-type Configure IS-IS operating level for a router. Syntax is-type {level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2-only} To return to the default values, use the no is-type command. Parameters Defaults level-1 Allows a router to act as a Level 1 router. level-1-2 Allows a router to act as both a Level 1 and Level 2 router. This setting is the default. level-2-only Allows a router to act as a Level 2 router. level-1-2 Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 842
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 843
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.5.1.
PAGE 844
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.5.1.0 Added support for LSP Throttling Enhancement. The link MTU and the LSP MTU size must be the same.
PAGE 845
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.5.1.0 Added support for LSP Throttling Enhancement. The refresh interval determines the rate at which route topology information is transmitted preventing the information from becoming obsolete. The refresh interval must be less than the LSP lifetime specified with the max-lsp-lifetime command.
PAGE 846
max-lsp-lifetime Set the maximum time that link-state packets (LSPs) exist without being refreshed. Syntax max-lsp-lifetime seconds To restore the default time, use the no max-lsp-lifetime command. Parameters Defaults seconds The maximum lifetime of LSP in seconds. This value must be greater than the lsp-refresh-interval command. The higher the value the longer the LSPs are kept. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 1200.
PAGE 847
Defaults 4 Command Modes ● ROUTER ISIS (for IPv4) ● CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 (for IPv6) Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON.
PAGE 848
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 849
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced. net To configure an IS-IS network entity title (NET) for a routing process, use this mandatory command. If you did not configure a NET, the IS-IS process does not start.
PAGE 850
passive-interface Suppress routing updates on an interface. This command stops the router from sending updates on that interface. Syntax passive-interface interface To delete a passive interface configuration, use the no passive-interface interface command. Parameters Defaults interface Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 851
redistribute Redistribute routes from one routing domain to another routing domain. Syntax redistribute {static | connected | rip} [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2] [metric metric-value] [metric-type {external | internal}] [route-map mapname] To end redistribution or disable any of the specified keywords, use the no redistribute {static | connected | rip} [metric metric-value] [metric-type {external | internal}] [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2] [route-map map-name] command.
PAGE 852
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.5.1.0 Added support for IPv6 ISIS. 6.3.1.0 Introduced. To redistribute a default route (0.0.0.0/0), configure the default-information originate command. Changing or disabling a keyword in this command does not affect the state of the other command keywords. When an LSP with an internal metric is received, the Dell EMC Networking OS considers the route cost while considering the advertised cost to reach the destination.
PAGE 853
Command Modes ● ROUTER ISIS (for IPv4) ● CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 (for IPv6) Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 854
metric metric- value (OPTIONAL) The value used for the redistributed route. Use a metric value that is consistent with the destination protocol. The range is from 0 to 16777215. The default is 0. metric-type {external | internal} (OPTIONAL) The external link type associated with the default route advertised into a routing domain. The two options are: ● external ● internal level-1 (OPTIONAL) Routes are independently redistributed into IS-IS as Level 1 routes.
PAGE 855
router isis Allows you to enable the IS-IS routing protocol and to specify an IP IS-IS process. Syntax router isis [vrf vrf-name] [tag] To disable IS-IS routing, use the no router isis [tag] command. Parameters Defaults vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to enable the IS-IS routing protocol and to specify an IP IS-IS process on that VRF. tag (OPTIONAL) This is a unique name for a routing process. A null tag is assumed if the tag option is not specified.
PAGE 856
To return to the default values, use the no set-overload-bit command. Defaults Not set. Command Modes ● ROUTER ISIS (for IPv4) ● CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 (for IPv6) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 857
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.1 Introduced on the S4810. Example (Router- The bold section identifies that Multi-Topology IS-IS is enabled in Transition mode.
PAGE 858
local (OPTIONAL) Displays local link-state database information. detail (OPTIONAL) Displays the detailed link-state database information of each LSP when specified. If not specified, a summary displays. summary (OPTIONAL) Displays the summary of link-state database information when specified. lspid (OPTIONAL) Display only the specified LSP. system-id (OPTIONAL) Displays the link-state database for system-id.
PAGE 859
Example Field Description LSP Checksum This is the checksum of the entire LSP packet. LSP Holdtime This value is the amount of time, in seconds, that the LSP remains valid. A zero holdtime indicates that this is a purged LSP and is being removed from the link state database. A value between brackets indicates the duration that the purged LSP stays in the database before being removed. ATT This value represents the Attach bit.
PAGE 860
Metric: 10 IPv6 2511::/64 Metric: 20 IPv6 1033::/64 Hostname: ISIS DellEMC# show isis database detail IS-IS Level-1 Link State Database LSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum ATT/P/OL FTOS.00-00 * 0x00000009 0x79D8 NLPID: 0xCC Area Address: 49.0000.0001 LSP Holdtime 941 1/0/0 show isis graceful-restart detail Display detailed IS-IS graceful restart related settings.
PAGE 861
T2 Timeout Value : 30 (level-1), 30 (level-2) T1 Timeout Value : 5, retry count: 1 Adjacency wait time : 30 Operational Timer Value ====================== Current Mode/State : T3 Time left : T2 Time left : Restart ACK rcv count : Restart Req rcv count : Suppress Adj rcv count : Restart CSNP rcv count : Database Sync count : Normal/RUNNING 0 0 (level-1), 0 0 (level-1), 0 0 (level-1), 0 0 (level-1), 0 0 (level-1), 0 0 (level-1), 0 (level-2) (level-2) (level-2) (level-2) (level-2) (level-2) show isis hostna
PAGE 862
show isis interface Display detailed IS-IS interface status and configuration information. Syntax show isis [vrf vrf-name] interface [interface] Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to display IS-IS interface status information corresponding to that VRF. interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 863
Interface Index 37847070, Local circuit ID 1 Level-1 Metric: 10, Priority: 64, Circuit ID: systest-3.01 Hello Interval: 10, Hello Multiplier: 3, CSNP Interval: 10 Number of active level-1 adjacencies: 1 Level-2 Metric: 10, Priority: 64, Circuit ID: systest-3.
PAGE 864
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.
PAGE 865
show isis protocol Display IS-IS routing information. Syntax Parameters show isis [vrf vrf-name] protocol vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to display IS-IS routing information corresponding to that VRF. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 866
show isis traffic This command allows you to display IS-IS traffic interface information. Syntax show isis [vrf vrf-name] traffic [interface] Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to display IS-IS traffic interface information corresponding to that VRF. interface (OPTIONAL) Identifies the interface type and the interface following: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 867
Example Item Description PTP Hellos (sent/rcvd) Displays the number of point-to-point Hellos sent and received. Level-1/Level-2 LSPs sourced (new/refresh) Displays the number of new and refreshed LSPs. Level-1/Level-2 LSPs flooded (sent/rcvd) Displays the number of flooded LSPs sent and received. Level-1/Level-2 LSPs CSNPs (sent/ rcvd) Displays the number of CSNP LSPs sent and received. Level-1/Level-2 LSPs PSNPs (sent/ rcvd) Displays the number of PSNP LPSs sent and received.
PAGE 868
Parameters level-l (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level-1 to apply the configuration to Level-1 SPF calculations. level-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level-2 to apply the configuration to Level-2 SPF calculations. interval seconds Enter the maximum number of seconds between SPF calculations. The range is from 0 to 120 seconds. The default is 10 seconds. initial_wait_inter (OPTIONAL) Enter the initial wait time, in seconds, before running the first SPF val seconds calculations.
PAGE 869
27 iSCSI Optimization Internet small computer system interface (iSCSI) optimization enables quality-of-service (QoS) treatment for iSCSI storage traffic on Dell EMC Networking OS platforms. To configure and verify the iSCSI optimization feature, use the following Dell EMC Networking OS commands.
PAGE 870
iscsi aging time Set the aging time for iSCSI sessions. Syntax iscsi aging time time To remove the iSCSI session aging time, use the no iscsi aging time command. Parameters Defaults time Enter the aging time for the iSCSI session. The range is from 5 to 43,200 minutes. 10 minutes Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 871
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.16.
PAGE 872
Command Modes PROTOCOL LLDP (only on the global, not on the interface) Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.
PAGE 873
ip-address (Optional) Defaults Enter the ip-address that the iSCSI monitors. The ip-address specifies the IP address of the iSCSI target. 860, 3260 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.
PAGE 874
-----------------------------------------------iSCSI Targets and TCP Ports: -----------------------------------------------TCP Port Target IP Address 3260 860 Related Commands ● show iscsi session — display information about active iSCSI sessions on the switch. ● show iscsi session detailed — display detailed information about active iSCSI sessions on the switch. ● show run iscsi — show run iscsi. show iscsi session Display information about active iSCSI sessions on the switch.
PAGE 875
show iscsi session detailed Display detailed information on active iSCSI sessions on the switch. Syntax Parameters show iscsi session detailed [session isid] isid Enter the session’s iSCSi ID to display detailed information about the specified iSCSi session. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 876
Command History Related Commands 876 This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.16.
PAGE 877
28 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) This section contains commands for Dell EMC Networks’ implementation of the link aggregation control protocol (LACP) for creating dynamic link aggregation groups (LAGs) — known as “port-channels” in the Dell EMC Networking OS. NOTE: For static LAG commands based on the standards specified in the IEEE 802.3 Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications, see Port Channel Commands .
PAGE 878
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● show lacp — display the LACP configuration. debug lacp Debug LACP (configuration, events, and so on). Syntax debug lacp [config | events | pdu [interface-type [in | out]]] To disable LACP debugging, use the no [config | events | pdu [interface-type [in | out]]] command.
PAGE 879
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.
PAGE 880
Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information This command applies to dynamic port-channel interfaces only. When applied on a static port-channel, this command has no effect. Related Commands ● show lacp — display the LACP configuration. lacp port-priority To influence which ports will be put in Standby mode when there is a hardware limitation that prevents all compatible ports from aggregating, configure the port priority.
PAGE 881
lacp system-priority Configure the LACP system priority. Syntax Parameters Defaults lacp system-priority priority-value priority-value Enter the port-priority value. The higher the value number, the lower the priority. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 32768. 32768 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 882
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 883
Example (Port-ChannelNumber) Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# show lacp 1 Port-channel 1 admin up, oper up, mode lacp Actor System ID:Priority 32768, Address 0001.e800.a12b Partner System ID:Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.
PAGE 884
29 Layer 2 This section describes commands to configure Layer 2 features. Topics: • • • MAC Addressing Commands Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands Far-End Failure Detection (FEFD) MAC Addressing Commands The following commands are related to configuring, managing, and viewing MAC addresses. mac-address-table aging-time Specify an aging time for MAC addresses to remove from the MAC address table.
PAGE 885
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.1.0 On the E-Series, available in INTERFACE VLAN context, reduced the minimum aging time in the INTERFACE VLAN context from 10 seconds to 1 second. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● mac learning-limit — set the MAC address learning limits for a selected interface. ● show mac-address-table aging-time — display the MAC aging time.
PAGE 886
Related Commands ● mac learning-limit — set the MAC address learning limits for a selected interface. ● show mac-address-table aging-time — display the MAC aging time. mac-address-table static Associate specific MAC or hardware addresses to an interface and VLANs. Syntax mac-address-table static mac-address {multicast vlan vlan-id output—range interface}{output interface vlan vlan-id} To remove a MAC address, use the no mac-address-table static mac-address output interface vlan vlan-id command.
PAGE 887
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.1(0.0) Added support for output range parameter for S4810 and Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.
PAGE 888
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series.
PAGE 889
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.0 Deprecated the no-station-move command (replaced by the mac-learninglimit mac-address-sticky command). 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Added the vlan option on the E-Series. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 890
Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-slot/port) Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 891
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 892
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 893
Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. mac port-security Enable or disable the port security feature globally in the system. Syntax mac port-security To disable the port security, use the no mac port-security command. Defaults Enabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 894
● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 895
Example Usage Information Example (Count) Related Commands Column Heading Description VlanId Displays the VLAN ID number. Mac Address Displays the MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. Type Lists whether the MAC address was manually configured (Static), learned dynamically (Dynamic), or associated with a specific port (Sticky). Interface Displays the interface type and slot/port[/subport] information.
PAGE 896
Parameters vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID to display the MAC address assigned to the VLAN. The range is from 1 to 4094. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 897
● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 898
Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands The following commands configure and monitor virtual LANs (VLANs). VLANs are a virtual interface and use many of the same commands as physical interfaces. You can configure an IP address and Layer 3 protocols on a VLAN called Inter-VLAN routing. FTP, TFTP, ACLs and SNMP are not supported on a VLAN. Occasionally, while sending broadcast traffic over multiple Layer 3 VLANs, the VRRP state of a VLAN interface may continually switch between Master and Backup.
PAGE 899
The Default VLAN contains only untagged interfaces. Related Commands ● interface vlan — configure a VLAN. description Add a description about the selected VLAN. Syntax Parameters Defaults description description description Enter a text string description to identify the VLAN (80 characters maximum). none Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(1.
PAGE 900
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.
PAGE 901
Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information To display information about a named VLAN, enter the show vlan command with the name parameter or the show interfaces description command. Related Commands ● interface vlan — configure a VLAN. ● show vlan — display the current VLAN configurations on the switch. show config Display the current configuration of the selected VLAN.
PAGE 902
show vlan Display the current VLAN configurations on the switch. Syntax show vlan [brief | id vlan-id | name vlan-name] Parameters brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the following information: ● VLAN ID ● VLAN name (left blank if none is configured) ● Spanning Tree Group ID ● MAC address aging time ● IP address id vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword id then a number from 1 to 4094. Only information on the VLAN specified is displayed.
PAGE 903
Example Column Heading Description (Column 1 — no heading) ● ● ● ● ● ● NUM Displays existing VLAN IDs. Status Displays the word Inactive for inactive VLANs and the word Active for active VLANs. Q ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Ports Displays the type, slot, and port information.
PAGE 904
7 Active T Po20(Te 1/6/1) P 100 Active T Po1(Te 1/1/1) C 101 Inactive T Te 1/3/1 I 102 Inactive T Te 1/4/1 DellEMC# Example (VLAN ID) T Te 1/7/1 U Te 1/5/1 T Te 1/2/1 DellEMC# show vlan id 40 Codes: Q: U x G - * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs Untagged, T - Tagged Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack NUM 40 Status Description Q Ports Active M Te 1/47/1 DellEMC# show vlan id 41 Codes: Q: U x G - * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs Untagged, T - Tagged Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x
PAGE 905
O O Related Commands 8 12 Inactive Inactive O Te 1/10/1 ● vlan-stack compatible — enable the Stackable VLAN feature on the selected VLAN. ● interface vlan — configure a VLAN. tagged Add a Layer 2 interface to a VLAN as a tagged interface. Syntax tagged interface To remove a tagged interface from a VLAN, use the no tagged interface command.
PAGE 906
Usage Information Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. When you use the no tagged command, the interface is automatically placed in the Default VLAN as an untagged interface unless the interface is a member of another VLAN. If the interface belongs to several VLANs, remove it from all VLANs to change it to an untagged interface. Tagged interfaces can belong to multiple VLANs, while untagged interfaces can only belong to one VLAN at a time.
PAGE 907
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 908
Usage Information Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.
PAGE 909
● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 910
“error-disabled” state, you must enter the fefd reset command to reset the interface state. Range is normal or aggressive. Default is normal. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.
PAGE 911
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. Legacy E-Series command. Usage Information FEFD disable command on the interface prevents the interface from running FEFD when FEFD is enabled globally.
PAGE 912
Usage Information You can set up the interval between control packets using the fefd interval command. Related Commands ● fefd — enable far-end failure detection. fefd mode Change the FEFD mode on an interface. Syntax fefd mode {normal | aggressive}] To return the FEFD mode to the default of normal, use the no fefd mode command. Parameters Defaults normal (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword normal to change the link state to “unknown” when a far-end failure the software detects on that interface.
PAGE 913
Parameters Defaults interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 914
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 915
Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. Legacy E-Series command.
PAGE 916
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. Legacy E-Series command. Usage Information The following describes the show fefd command shown in the following example.
PAGE 917
30 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) The link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) advertises connectivity and management from the local station to the adjacent stations on an IEEE 802 LAN. LLDP facilitates multi-vendor interoperability by using standard management tools to discover and make available a physical topology for network management. The Dell EMC Networking operating software implementation of LLDP is based on IEEE standard 801.1ab.
PAGE 918
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. Added the vlan-name option. 7.6.1.
PAGE 919
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. advertise interface-port-desc Advertise port descriptor.
PAGE 920
● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information. Defaults None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series.
PAGE 921
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 922
Defaults packet Enter the keyword packet to display information regarding packets coming in or going out. brief Enter the keyword brief to display brief packet information. detail Enter the keyword detail to display detailed packet information. tx Enter the keyword tx to display transmit-only packet information. rx Enter the keyword rx to display receive-only packet information. both Enter the keyword both to display both receive and transmit packet information.
PAGE 923
Dec Dec Dec 4 22:38:29 : 40 4 22:38:29 : TLV: UNKNOWN TLV, Type: 125 Len: 1, Value: @ 4 22:38:29 : TLV: ENDOFPDU, Len: 0 disable Enable or disable LLDP. Syntax disable To enable LLDP, use the no disable command. Defaults Enabled — no disable. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) and INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-lldp) Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 924
Parameters Defaults seconds Enter the rate, in seconds, at which the control packets are sent to its peer. The rate is from 5 to 180 seconds. The default is 30 seconds. 30 seconds Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) and INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-lldp) Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.
PAGE 925
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.
PAGE 926
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. protocol lldp (Configuration) Enable the LLDP globally on the switch. Syntax protocol lldp To disable LLDP globally on the chassis, use the no protocol lldp command. Defaults Enabled.
PAGE 927
protocol lldp (Interface) Enter the LLDP protocol in INTERFACE mode. Syntax [no] protocol lldp To return to the global LLDP configuration mode, use the no protocol lldp command from Interface mode. Defaults LLDP is not enabled on the interface. Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-lldp) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.
PAGE 928
● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information.
PAGE 929
Total Frames Out: 3 Total Frames In: 8 Total Neighbor information Age outs: 0 Total Multiple Neighbors Detected: 0 Total Frames Discarded: 0 Total In Error Frames: 0 Total Unrecognized TLVs: 960 Total TLVs Discarded: 16 Next packet will be sent after 9 seconds The neighbors are given below: ----------------------------------------------------------------------Remote Chassis ID Subtype: Mac address (4) Remote Chassis ID: 00:00:00:00:00:01 Remote Port Subtype: Interface name (5) Remote Port ID: TenGigabitEthe
PAGE 930
Locally assigned remote Neighbor Index: 1 Remote TTL: 300 Information valid for next 201 seconds Time since last information change of this neighbor: 00:01:39 UnknownTLVList: OrgUnknownTLVList: ((00-01-66),127, 4) ((00-01-66),126, 4) ((00-01-66),125, 4) ((00-01-66),124, ((00-01-66),123, 4) ((00-01-66),122, 4) ((00-01-66),121, 4) ((00-01-66),120, 4) ((00-01-66),119, ((00-01-66),118, 4) --------------------------------------------------------------------------Remote Chassis ID Subtype: Mac address (4) Remote
PAGE 931
Remote TTL: 300 Information valid for next 199 seconds Time since last information change of this neighbor: 00:01:41 UnknownTLVList: OrgUnknownTLVList: ((00-01-66),127, 4) ((00-01-66),126, 4) ((00-01-66),125, 4) ((00-01-66),124, ((00-01-66),123, 4) ((00-01-66),122, 4) ((00-01-66),121, 4) ((00-01-66),120, 4) ((00-01-66),119, ((00-01-66),118, 4) --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4) 4) show lldp statistics Display the LLDP statistical information.
PAGE 932
LLDP-MED Commands The following are the LLDP-MED (Media Endpoint Discovery) commands. Dell EMC Networking OS LLDP-MED commands are an extension of the set of LLDP TLV advertisement commands. As defined by ANSI/TIA-1057, LLDP-MED provides organizationally specific TLVs (Type Length Value), so that endpoint devices and network connectivity devices can advertise their characteristics and configuration information.
PAGE 933
Related Commands Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and E-Series. ● protocol lldp (Configuration) — enable LLDP globally. ● debug lldp interface — debug LLDP. ● show lldp neighbors — display the LLDP neighbors.
PAGE 934
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and E-Series. ● debug lldp interface — debug LLDP. ● show lldp neighbors — display the LLDP neighbors. advertise med location-identification To advertise a location identifier, configure the system.
PAGE 935
Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and E-Series. Usage Information ● ECS — Emergency call service such as defined by TIA or the national emergency numbering association (NENA) ● ELIN — Emergency location identification number, a valid North America Numbering Plan format telephone number supplied for ECS purposes. Related Commands ● debug lldp interface — debug LLDP. ● show lldp neighbors — display the LLDP neighbors.
PAGE 936
Related Commands Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and E-Series. ● debug lldp interface — debug LLDP. ● show lldp neighbors — display the LLDP neighbors. advertise med streaming-video To advertise streaming video services for broadcast or multicast-based video, configure the system. This command does not include video applications that rely on TCP buffering.
PAGE 937
advertise med video-conferencing To advertise dedicated video conferencing and other similar appliances that support real-time interactive video, configure the system. Syntax advertise med video-conferencing {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} To return to the default, use the no advertise med video-conferencing {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 938
advertise med video-signaling To advertise video control packets that use a separate network policy than video data, configure the system. Syntax advertise med video-signaling {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} To return to the default, use the no advertise med video-signaling {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094. layer2_priority Enter the Layer 2 priority.
PAGE 939
advertise med voice To advertise a dedicated IP telephony handset or other appliances supporting interactive voice services, configure the system. Syntax advertise med voice {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} To return to the default, use the no advertise med voice {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094. layer2_priority Enter the Layer 2 priority. The range is from 0 to 7.
PAGE 940
To return to the default, use the no advertise med voice-signaling {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094. layer2_priority Enter the Layer 2 priority. The range is from 0 to 7. DSCP_value Enter the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63. priority-tagged Enter the keywords priority-tagged, the Layer 2 priority, and then the DSCP value. number Defaults Unconfigured.
PAGE 941
31 Microsoft Network Load Balancing Network load balancing (NLB) is a clustering functionality that is implemented by Microsoft on Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 operating systems. Microsoft NLB clustering allows multiple servers running Microsoft Windows to be represented by one MAC and one IP address to provide transparent failover and load-balancing.
PAGE 942
Version Description 9.3(0.0) Added support for association of an IP address with multicast MAC address on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000 platforms. Usage Information For multicast mode of NLB, to associate an IP address with a multicast MAC address in the switch, use address resolution protocol (ARP) by entering the arp ip-address multicast-mac-address command in Global configuration mode.
PAGE 943
● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Management interface, enter the keyword managementethernet followed by slot/port numbers. ● For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel followed by a number. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 944
Usage Information 944 By default this command is disabled. There might be some ARP table entries which are resolved through ARP packets which had Ethernet MAC SA different from MAC information inside the ARP packet. This unicast data traffic flooding occurs only for those packets which use these ARP entries.
PAGE 945
32 Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) Multicast source discovery protocol (MSDP) connects multiple PIM sparse-mode (PIM-SM) domains together. MSDP peers connect using TCP port 639. Peers send keepalives every 60 seconds. A peer connection is reset after 75 seconds if no MSDP packets are received. MSDP connections are parallel with MBGP connections. The Dell EMC Networking OS supports MSDP commands on the platform.
PAGE 946
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.1 Introduced on the S4810. 6.2.1.1 Introduced clear ip msdp sa-cache Clears the entire source-active cache, the source-active entries of a particular multicast group, rejected, or local source-active entries.
PAGE 947
Version Description 7.8.1.0 Added the local option. 7.7.1.0 Added the rejected-sa option. 6.2.1.1 Introduced clear ip msdp statistic Clears the entire source-active cache, the source-active entries of a particular multicast group, rejected, or local source-active entries. Syntax Parameters Defaults clear ip msdp statistic peer peer-address peer Enter the keyword peer to clear the MSDP peer entries. peer-address Enter the IP address of the MSDP peer.
PAGE 948
ip msdp cache-rejected-sa Enable an MSDP cache for the rejected source-active entries. Syntax ip msdp cache-rejected-sa {number} To clear the MSDP rejected source-active entries, use the no ip msdp cache-rejected-sa {number} command then the ip msdp cache-rejected-sa {number} command. Parameters Defaults number Enter the number of rejected SA entries to cache. The range is from 0 to 32766. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 949
list name Defaults Enter the keywords list name and specify a standard access list that contains the RP address that should be treated as the default peer. If no access list is specified, then all SAs from the peer are accepted. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 950
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 6.2.1.1 Introduced ip msdp mesh-group To be a member of a mesh group, configure a peer.
PAGE 951
Usage Information Version Description 6.2.1.1 Introduced An MSDP mesh group is a mechanism for reducing SA flooding, typically in an intra-domain setting. When some subset of a domain’s MSDP speakers are fully meshed, they can be configured into a mesh-group. If member X of a mesh-group receives a SA message from an MSDP peer that is also a member of the mesh-group, member X accepts the SA message and forwards it to all of its peers that are not part of the mesh-group.
PAGE 952
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced ip msdp peer Configure an MSDP peer. Syntax ip msdp peer peer address [connect-source] [description] [sa-limit number] To remove the MSDP peer, use the no ip msdp peer peer address [connect-source interface] [description name] [sa-limit number] command.
PAGE 953
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 954
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced Modifications to the ACL do not have an immediate effect on the sa-cache.
PAGE 955
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ip msdp sa-limit Configure the upper limit of source-active (SA) entries in SA-cache. Syntax ip msdp sa-limit number To return to the default, use the no ip msdp sa-limit number command. Parameters Defaults number Enter the maximum number of SA entries in SA-cache. The range is from 1 to 500000.
PAGE 956
● show ip msdp — display the MSDP information. ip msdp shutdown Administratively shut down a configured MSDP peer. Syntax ip msdp shutdown {peer address} Parameters Defaults peer address Enter the peer address in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.). Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 957
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 958
Example Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 6.2.1.1 Introduced DellEMC# show ip msdp peer 100.1.1.1 Peer Addr: 100.1.1.1 Local Addr: 100.1.1.
PAGE 959
Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.1 Introduced on the S4810. 7.4.1.0 Introduced.
PAGE 960
33 Multicast Listener Discovery Protocol The Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol is used by IPv6 routers to discover multicast listeners on a directly attached link. Similar to the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP), which handles multicast group memberships in IPv4 networks, MLD is used for multicast management on IPv6 networks.
PAGE 961
Version Description 9.11(3.0) Introduced on the S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, S3100, and C9010. debug ipv6 mld Enable debugging on IPv6 MLD packets. Syntax debug ipv6 mld [vrf vrf-name] {group-address | interface} To turn off debugging, use the no debug ipv6 mld {group-address | interface} command. Parameters Defaults vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF.
PAGE 962
Version Description 9.11(3.0) Introduced on the S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, S3100, and C9010. ipv6 mld last-member-query-interval Change the MAX Response Time inserted into the Group-Specific Queries sent in response to a Leave Group messages. This interval is also the interval between Group-Specific Query messages.
PAGE 963
Parameters Defaults seconds Enter the interval in seconds. The range is from 1 to 25. 10 seconds. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(3.0) Introduced on the S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, S3100, and C9010. ipv6 mld version Configure the MLD version on the system.
PAGE 964
● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 965
Example Version Description 9.11(3.0) Introduced on the S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, S3100, and C9010.
PAGE 966
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(0.0) Introduced on the S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S5048F-ON, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, S3100, and C9010. debug ipv6 mld snooping Enable debugging on IPv6 MLD snooping packets.
PAGE 967
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(0.0) Introduced on the S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S5048F-ON, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, S3100, and C9010. ipv6 mld snooping enable Enable MLD snooping on the switch globally. Syntax ipv6 mld snooping enable To disable MLD snooping, use the no ipv6 mld snooping enable command.
PAGE 968
● For the Management interface on the stack-unit, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 969
interface interface detail Defaults Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: ● For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 970
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(1.0) Updated the output to show both MLD versions 1 and 2. 9.14(0.0) Introduced on the S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S5048F-ON, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, S3100, and C9010.
PAGE 971
34 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP), as implemented by the Dell EMC Networking OS, conforms to IEEE 802.1s. This command supports the Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 972
Optionally, enter an in or out parameter with the optional interface: ● For Receive, enter the keyword in. ● For Transmit, enter the keyword out. events (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword events to debug MSTP events. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 973
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 974
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.5.1.0 Introduced. ● max-age — change the wait time before MSTP refreshes protocol configuration information.
PAGE 975
Related Commands Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.5.1.0 Introduced. ● forward-delay — amount of time the interface waits in the Blocking State and the Learning State before transitioning to the Forwarding State. ● max-age — change the wait time before MSTP refreshes protocol configuration information. max-age To maintain configuration information before refreshing that information, set the time interval for the MSTB.
PAGE 976
msti Configure multiple spanning tree instance, bridge priority, and one or multiple VLANs mapped to the MST instance. Syntax msti instance {vlan range | bridge-priority priority} To disable mapping or bridge priority, use the no msti instance {vlan range | bridgepriority priority} command. Parameters msti instance Enter the MSTP instance. The range is from zero (0) to 63. vlan range Enter the keyword vlan then the identifier range value. The range is from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 977
name The name you assign to the multiple spanning tree region. Syntax name region-name To remove the region name, use the no name command. Parameters Defaults region-name Enter the MST region name. The range is 32 character limit. No default name. Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 978
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.13(0.1) Introduced on MXL, FN IOM, S6000, S3100, S4810, S4820T, S3048–ON, S4048– ON, S4048T-ON, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, S5048F-ON, C9010, and Z9100–ON, This command is used to keep the port-channel path cost constant regardless of the operational status of the port-channel member ports.
PAGE 979
Usage Information MSTP is not enabled when you enter MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode. To enable MSTP globally on the switch, enter the no disable command while in MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode. For more information about the multiple spanning tree protocol, refer to the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide. Example Related Commands DellEMC(conf)# protocol spanning-tree mstp DellEMC(config-mstp)#no disable ● disable — disable multiple spanning tree.
PAGE 980
show config View the current configuration for the mode. Only non-default values are shown. Syntax show config Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 981
Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
PAGE 982
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.4.2.
PAGE 983
Example (EDS and LBK) The bold line shows the loopback BPDU inconsistency (LBK_INC). DellEMC# show spanning-tree msti 0 brief MSTI 0 VLANs mapped 1-4094 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15, max hops 20 Bridge ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.
PAGE 984
spanning-tree Enable the multiple spanning tree protocol on the interface. Syntax spanning-tree To disable the multiple spanning tree protocol on the interface, use the no spanning-tree command. Parameters Defaults spanning-tree Enter the keywords spanning-tree to enable the MSTP on the interface. Enable. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 985
● ● ● ● ● ● ● priority priority Defaults 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface = 2000 Port Channel interface with one 100 Mb/s Ethernet = 200000 Port Channel interface with one 1 Gigabit Ethernet = 20000 Port Channel interface with one 10 Gigabit Ethernet = 2000 Port Channel with two 1 Gigabit Ethernet = 18000 Port Channel with two 10 Gigabit Ethernet = 1800 Port Channel with two 100 Mbps Ethernet = 180000 Enter keyword priority then a value in increments of 16 as the priority. The range is from 0 to 240.
PAGE 986
Usage Information 986 Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 987
35 Multicast The multicast commands are supported by Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • • IPv4 Multicast Commands IPv6 Multicast Commands IPv4 Multicast Commands The following section contains the IPv4 multicast commands. clear ip mroute Clear learned multicast routes on the multicast forwarding table. To clear the protocol-independent multicast (PIM) tree information base, use the clear ip pim tib command.
PAGE 988
Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Related Commands ● show ip pim tib — show the PIM tree information base. ip mroute Assign a static mroute.
PAGE 989
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 990
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. This feature allows you to limit the number of multicast entries on the system. This number is the total of all the multicast entries on all line cards in the system. On each line card, the multicast module only installs the maximum number of entries, depending on the configured CAM profile.
PAGE 991
Usage Information After you enable multicast, you can enable IGMP and PIM on an interface. In INTERFACE mode, enter the ip pim sparse-mode command to enable IGMP and PIM on the interface. Related Commands ● ip pim sparse-mode — enable IGMP and PIM on an interface. mtrace Trace a multicast route from the source to the receiver.
PAGE 992
-4 103.103.103.3 --> Source -----------------------------------------------------------------The mtrace command traverses the path of the response data block in the reverse direction of the multicast data traffic. The mtrace command traverses the reverse path to the source from the destination.
PAGE 993
-----------0 Te 1/10/1, 0 Te 1/10/1, 0 Te 1/11/1, 224.1.1.1 0.0.0.0 1000 1 Te 1/3/1, 224.1.1.2 0.0.0.0 1000 1 Te 1/3/1, 224.1.1.1 165.13.34.5 2000 2 Te 1/3/5, show ip mroute View the multicast routing table.
PAGE 994
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.2.(0.0) Added support for keyword vlt to the Z9000, S4810, and S4820T. 8.4.1.1 Support for the keyword snooping and the optional vlan vlan-id, groupaddress, and source-address parameters were added on E-Series. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.
PAGE 995
Example Field Description (S, G) Displays the forwarding entry in the multicast route table. uptime Displays the amount of time the entry has been in the multicast forwarding table. Incoming interface Displays the reverse path forwarding (RPF) information towards the source for (S,G) entries and the RP for (*,G) entries.
PAGE 996
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.1 Introduced on the S4810. E-Series legacy command Usage Information Network administrators use static mroutes to control the reach-ability of the multicast sources.
PAGE 997
ipv6 multicast-routing Enables IPv6 multicast forwarding. Syntax ipv6 multicast-routing [vrf vrf-name] To disable multicast forwarding, use the no ipv6 multicast-routing [vrf vrf-name] command. Defaults Parameters Disabled. vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to enable IP multicast forwarding on that VRF. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 998
9.11.3.0 Example Introduced on the C9000, S3048–ON, S3100, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S6000– ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON and Z9100–ON.
PAGE 999
L2 Ports : L3 Ports : Te 1/10/1 show ipv6 rpf View reverse path forwarding. Syntax show ipv6 rpf Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11.3.0 Introduced on the C9000, S3048–ON, S3100, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S6000– ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON and Z9100–ON.
PAGE 1000
36 Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) The neighbor discovery protocol for IPv6 is defined in RFC 2461 as part of the Stateless Address Autoconfiguration protocol. It replaces the Address Resolution Protocol used with IPv4.
PAGE 1001
NOTE: If you do not specify this option, the neighbors in the default VRF are cleared. ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address of the neighbor in the x:x:x:x::x format to remove a specific IPv6 neighbor. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.
PAGE 1002
● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 1003
Related Commands Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the C9010. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, and Z9000 switches.
PAGE 1004
● ipv6 nd raguard policy policy-name — define the RA guard policy name and enter the RA guard policy configuration mode. ipv6 nd ra–guard attach–policy Apply the IPv6 RA guard to a specific interface. Syntax ipv6 nd ra-guard attach—policy policy-name [vlan [vlan 1, vlan 2, vlan 3.....]] Parameters policy policy- name vlan [vlan 1, vlan 2, vlan 3........] Defaults Enter the keyword policy then the policy name. The policy-name allows a maximum of 140 characters.
PAGE 1005
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, and Z9000 switches.
PAGE 1006
ipv6 neighbor Configure a static entry in the IPv6 neighbor discovery. Syntax ipv6 neighbor [vrf vrf-name] {ipv6-address} {interface interface} {hardware_address} To remove a static IPv6 entry from the IPv6 neighbor discovery, use the no ipv6 neighbor [vrf vrf-name] {ipv6-address} {interface interface} command. Parameters vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to install IPv6 routes in that VRF.
PAGE 1007
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.1 Introduced on the S4810. Neighbor Discovery Protocol for IPv6 is defined in RFC 2461 as part of the Stateless Address Autoconfiguration protocol. It replaces the Address Resolution Protocol used with IPv4. It defines mechanisms for solving problems, such as: ● Router discovery: Hosts can locate routers residing on a link.
PAGE 1008
Related Commands ● ipv6 nd ra-guard enable — configure the RA guard related commands. ● ipv6 nd raguard policy policy-name — define the router advertisement (RA) guard policy name and enter the RA guard policy configuration mode. match ra Enable verifying either of the configured source IPv6 address or prefix address or the source MAC address in the inspected messages. If this command is not configured, the verification process is bypassed.
PAGE 1009
Parameters Defaults value Enter the maximum transmission unit value in bytes. The range is from 1,280 to 11,982 bytes. 0 Command Modes POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the C9010. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1010
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, and Z9000 switches. ● ipv6 nd ra-guard enable — configure the RA guard related commands.
PAGE 1011
retrans-time Enable the verification of the configured retransmission timer value in the received RA packets. Syntax retrans—timer value To reset the advertised retransmission interval, use the no retrans-timervalue command. Parameters Defaults value Enter the advertised retransmission time interval in milliseconds. The range is from 100 to 4,294,967,295 milliseconds. None Command Modes POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1012
Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, and Z9000 switches. ● ipv6 nd ra-guard enable — configure the RA guard related commands.
PAGE 1013
show config Display the RA guard policy mode configurations. Syntax show config Command Modes POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the C9010. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.
PAGE 1014
show ipv6 nd ra–guard policy Display the configurations applied on all the RA guard policies or a specific RA guard policy. Syntax show ipv6 nd ra-guard policy policy-name Parameter policy policy- name Enter the keyword policy then the policy name. The policy name allows a maximum of 140 characters. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1015
● ipv6 nd raguard attach-policy — apply the IPv6 RA guard to a specific interface. show ipv6 neighbors Display IPv6 discovery information. Entering the command without options shows all IPv6 neighbor addresses stored on the control processor (CP). Syntax Parameters show ipv6 neighbors [vrf vrf-name] [ipv6-address| interface interface] vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf and the name of the VRF to display the neighbors corresponding to that VRF.
PAGE 1016
Example Version Description 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.1 Introduced on the S4810. DellEMC# show ipv6 neighbors IPv6 Address Expires(min) Hardware Address State Interface VLAN CPU -------------------------------------------------------------------100::1 0.
PAGE 1017
37 Object Tracking Object Tracking supports IPv4 and IPv6, and is available on the Dell EMC Networking platforms. Object tracking allows you to define objects of interest, monitor their state, and report to a client when a change in an object’s state occurs.
PAGE 1018
Example Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.0 Introduced. DellEMC# debug track all 04:35:04: %RPM0-P:RP2 %OTM-5-STATE: track 6 - Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/2/1 line-protocol DOWN 04:35:04: %RPM0-P:RP2 %OTM-5-NOTIF: VRRP notification: resource ID 6 DOWN delay Configure the time delay used before communicating a change in the status of a tracked object to clients.
PAGE 1019
If the timer expires and an object’s state has changed, a notification is sent to the client. If no delay is configured, a notification is sent immediately after a change in the state of a tracked object is detected. The time delay in communicating a state change is specified in seconds. Related Commands ● track interface ip routing – configure object tracking on the routing status of an IPv4 Layer 3 interface.
PAGE 1020
Parameters object-id (OPTIONAL) Display information on the specified tracked object. The range is 1 to 500. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series.
PAGE 1021
show track Display information about tracked objects, including configuration, current tracked state (UP or DOWN), and the clients which are tracking an object. Syntax Parameters show track [object-id [brief] | interface [brief] [vrf vrf-name] | ip route [brief] [vrf vrf-name] | resolution | vrf vrf-name [brief] | brief] object-id (OPTIONAL) Display information on the specified tracked object. The range is 1 to 500.
PAGE 1022
Example Output Description First hop interface Displays the type and slot/port number of the first-hop interface of the tracked route. Tracked by Client that is tracking an object’s state; for example, VRRP. DellEMC# show track Track 1 IP route 23.0.0.
PAGE 1023
To return to the default setting, use the no threshold metric {up number | down number} command. Parameters Defaults up number Enter a number for the UP threshold to be applied to the scaled metric of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. The default UP threshold is 254. The routing state is UP if the scaled route metric is less than or equal to the UP threshold. down number Enter a number for the DOWN threshold to be applied to the scaled metric of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. The default DOWN threshold is255.
PAGE 1024
track interface ip routing Configure object tracking on the routing status of an IPv4 Layer 3 interface. Syntax track object-id interface interface ip routing To return to the default setting, use the no track object-id command. Parameters Defaults object-id Enter the ID number of the tracked object. The range is 1 to 500. interface Enter one of the following values: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 1025
track interface line-protocol Configure object tracking on the line-protocol state of a Layer 2 interface. Syntax track object-id interface interface line-protocol To return to the default setting, use the no track object-id command. Parameters Defaults object-id Enter the ID number of the tracked object. The range is 1 to 500. interface Enter one of the following values: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 1026
track ip route metric threshold Configure object tracking on the threshold of an IPv4 route metric. Syntax track object-id ip route ip-address/prefix-len metric threshold [vrf vrfname] To return to the default setting, use the no track object-id command. Parameters Defaults object-id Enter the ID number of the tracked object. The range is 1 to 500. ip-address/ prefix-len Enter an IPv4 address in dotted decimal format. The valid IPv4 prefix lengths are from /0 to /32.
PAGE 1027
Related Commands ● show track – display information about tracked objects, including configuration, current state, and clients which track the object. ● threshold metric – configure the metric threshold used to determine the UP and/or DOWN state of a tracked route. ● track resolution ip route – configure the protocol-specific resolution value used to scale an IPv4 route metric. track ip route reachability Configure object tracking on the reachability of an IPv4 route.
PAGE 1028
● track ip route metric threshold – configure object tracking on the threshold of an IPv4 route metric. track reachability refresh Change the refresh interval for tracking the reachability of the next-hop. If the next-hop address in the ARP cache ages out for a route tracked for its reachability, an attempt is made to check if the next-hop address is reachable after a certain refresh interval before considering the route DOWN.
PAGE 1029
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1030
Parameters brief (OPTIONAL) Display a single line summary of information for tracked IPv6 routes. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 1031
Usage Command Example (Brief) The following describes the show track ipv6 route brief command shown in the Example below. Ouput Description ResID Number of the tracked object. Resource Type of tracked object. Parameter Detailed description of the tracked object. State Up or Down state of the tracked object. Last Change Time since the last change in the state of the tracked object.
PAGE 1032
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.0 Introduced.
PAGE 1033
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.0 Introduced. Use this command to create an object that tracks the UP and/or DOWN threshold of an IPv6 route metric. In order for a route’s metric to be tracked, the route must appear as an entry in the routing table. A tracked IPv6 route is considered to match an entry in the routing table only if the exact IPv6 address and prefix length match a table entry.
PAGE 1034
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.0 Introduced. Use this command to create an object that tracks the reachability of an IPv6 route. In order for a route’s reachability to be tracked, the route must appear as an entry in the routing table.
PAGE 1035
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.0 Introduced. Use this command to configure the protocol-specific resolution value that converts the actual metric of an IPv6 route in the routing table to a scaled metric in the range 0 to 255.
PAGE 1036
38 Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) Open Shortest Path First version 2 for IPv4 is supported on platform. OSPF is an interior gateway protocol (IGP), which means that it distributes routing information between routers in a single autonomous system (AS). OSPF is also a link-state protocol in which all routers contain forwarding tables derived from information about their links to their neighbors.
PAGE 1037
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.
PAGE 1038
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 1039
Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 1040
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1041
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. clear ip ospf Clear all OSPF routing tables. Syntax Parameters clear ip ospf process-id [vrf vrf-name] [process] process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to clear a specific process.
PAGE 1042
Version Description pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. clear ip ospf statistics Clear the packet statistics in interfaces and neighbors. Syntax clear ip ospf [process-id] [vrf vrf-name] statistics [interface name {neighbor router-id}] Parameters Defaults process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to clear a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, all OSPF processes are cleared.
PAGE 1043
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. debug ip ospf Display debug information on OSPF. Entering the debug ip ospf commands enables OSPF debugging for the first OSPF process.
PAGE 1044
Usage Information 1044 Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.0 Added the database-timer rate-limit option for the S4810. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The following describes the debug ip ospf command shown in the Example below.
PAGE 1045
Field Description ● MC- (bit used by MOSPF is not set and router cannot forward IP multicast packets) ● E + (router is able to accept AS External LSAs) ● E - (router cannot accept AS External LSAs) ● T + (router can support TOS) ● T - (router cannot support TOS) Example hi: Displays the amount of time configured for the HELLO interval. di: Displays the amount of time configured for the DEAD interval. dr: Displays the IP address of the designated router.
PAGE 1046
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 1047
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. description Add a description about the selected OSPF configuration. Syntax description description To remove the OSPF description, use the no description command.
PAGE 1048
distance Define an administrative distance for particular routes to a specific IP address. Syntax distance weight [ip-address mask access-list-name] To delete the settings, use the no distance weight [ip-address mask access-list-name] command. Parameters weight Specify an administrative distance. The range is from 1 to 255. The default is 110. ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter a router ID in the dotted decimal format. If you enter a router ID, include the mask for that router address.
PAGE 1049
To delete these settings, use the no distance ospf command. Parameters Defaults external dist3 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword external then a number to specify a distance for external type 5 and 7 routes. The range is from 1 to 255. The default is 110. inter-area dist2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords inter-area then a number to specify a distance metric for routes between areas. The range is from 1 to 255. The default is 110.
PAGE 1050
Parameters Defaults prefix-list-name Enter the name of a configured prefix list. interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 1051
To remove a filter, use the no distribute-list prefix-list-name out [bgp | connected | isis | rip | static] command. Parameters Defaults prefix-list-name Enter the name of a configured prefix list. bgp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bgp to specify that BGP routes are distributed. NOTE: BGP and ISIS routes are not available on the C-Series. BGP, ISIS, and RIP routes are not available on the S-Series. connected (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword connected to specify that connected routes are distributed.
PAGE 1052
fast-convergence This command sets the minimum LSA origination and arrival times to zero (0), allowing more rapid route computation so that convergence takes less time. Syntax fast-convergence {number} To cancel fast-convergence, use the no fast convergence command. Parameters Defaults number Enter the convergence level desired. The higher this parameter is set, the faster OSPF converge takes place. The range is from 1 to 4. None.
PAGE 1053
Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell EMC Networking OS version history for this command. Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S3048-ON and S4048-ON.
PAGE 1054
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.
PAGE 1055
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Restart role enabled on the S-Series (Both Helper and Restart roles now supported on S-Series). Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.7.1.0 Added Helper-Role support on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 1056
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. graceful-restart role Specify the role for your OSPF router during graceful restart. Syntax graceful-restart role [helper-only | restart-only] To disable graceful restart role, use the no graceful-restart role command.
PAGE 1057
ip ospf auth-change-wait-time OSPF provides a grace period while OSPF changes its interface authentication type. During the grace period, OSPF sends out packets with new and old authentication scheme until the grace period expires. Syntax ip ospf auth-change-wait-time seconds To return to the default, use the no ip ospf auth-change-wait-time command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter the seconds. The range is from 0 to 300. zero (0) seconds.
PAGE 1058
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1059
Usage Information Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. If this command is not configured, cost is based on the auto-cost command.
PAGE 1060
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information By default, the dead interval is four times the default hello-interval. Related Commands ● ip ospf hello-interval — set the time interval between the hello packets.
PAGE 1061
Version Description pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information The time interval between the hello packets must be the same for routers in a network. Related Commands ● ip ospf dead-interval — set the time interval before a router is declared dead. ip ospf message-digest-key Enable OSPF MD5 authentication and send an OSPF message digest key on the interface. Syntax ip ospf message-digest-key keyid md5 key To delete a key, use the no ip ospf message-digest-key keyid command.
PAGE 1062
To change to a different key on the interface, enable the new key while the old key is still enabled. Dell EMC Networking OS sends two packets: the first packet authenticated with the old key and the second packet authenticated with the new key. This process ensures that the neighbors learn the new key and communication is not disrupted by keeping the old key enabled. After the reply is received and the new key is authenticated, delete the old key. Dell EMC recommends keeping only one key per interface.
PAGE 1063
Parameters Defaults broadcast Enter the keyword broadcast to designate the interface as part of a broadcast network. point-to-point Enter the keywords point-to-point to designate the interface as part of a point-to-point network. Broadcast. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 1064
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.
PAGE 1065
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1066
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. log-adjacency-changes To send a Syslog message about changes in the OSPF adjacency state, set Dell EMC Networking OS. Syntax log-adjacency-changes To disable the Syslog messages, use the no log-adjacency-changes command. Defaults Disabled.
PAGE 1067
maximum-paths Enable the software to forward packets over multiple paths. Syntax maximum-paths number To disable packet forwarding over multiple paths, use the no maximum-paths command. Parameters Defaults number Specify the number of paths. The range for OSPFv2 is from 1 to 64. The default for OSPFv2 is 4 paths. The range for OSPFv3 is from 1 to 64. The default for OSPFv3 is 8 paths. 4 Command Modes ROUTER OSPF for OSPFv2 ROUTER OSPFv3 for OSPFv3 Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1068
Defaults none. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell EMC Networking OS version history for this command. Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1069
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced to all platforms. 7.6.1.
PAGE 1070
● For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 1071
● If passive-interface default is specified, then save no passive-interface interface into the running configuration. No ● ● ● passive-interface default Clear everything and revert to the default behavior. All previously marked passive interfaces are removed. May update ABR status. On configuring suppression using the passive-interface command, the state of the OSPF neighbor does not change to INIT; instead, the state of the OSPF neighbor changes to DOWN after the dead-timer expires.
PAGE 1072
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. To redistribute the default route (0.0.0.
PAGE 1073
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.3 Added Route Map for BGP Redistribution to OSPF. 7.8.1.
PAGE 1074
Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
PAGE 1075
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. You can configure an arbitrary value in the IP address format for each router.
PAGE 1076
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.1(0.0) Added support for OSPFv3 on the S4810 and Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.9.1.0 Added support for VRF. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 1077
Example Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC(conf-router_ospf)# show config ! router ospf 3 passive-interface 0 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 DellEMC(conf-router_ospf)# show ip ospf Display information on the OSPF process configured on the switch.
PAGE 1078
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. If you delete all the network area commands for Area 0, the show ip ospf command output does not list Area 0. The following describes the show ip ospf command shown in the following example. Line Beginning with Description “Routing Process...” Displays the OSPF process ID and the IP address associated with the process ID. “Supports only...
PAGE 1079
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.
PAGE 1080
databasesummary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords database-summary to the display the number of LSA types in each area and the total number of LSAs. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1081
Link ID 10.2.3.2 10.2.4.2 Link ID 0.0.0.0 1.1.1.1 10.1.1.0 10.1.2.0 10.2.2.0 10.2.3.0 10.2.4.0 11.1.1.0 11.1.2.0 12.1.2.0 13.1.1.0 13.1.2.0 172.16.1.0 DellEMC> Related Commands Network (Area 0.0.0.0) ADV Router Age Seq# Checksum 13.1.1.1 676 0x80000003 0x6592 192.68.135.2 908 0x80000055 0x683e Type-5 AS External ADV Router Age Seq# 192.68.135.2 908 0x80000052 192.68.135.2 908 0x8000002a 11.1.2.1 718 0x80000002 11.1.2.1 718 0x80000002 11.1.2.1 718 0x80000002 11.1.2.1 718 0x80000002 13.1.1.
PAGE 1082
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1083
LS age: 473 Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E) LS type: Summary Asbr Link State ID: 104.1.50.1 Advertising Router: 1.1.1.10 LS Seq Number: 0x80000010 Checksum: 0x4198 Length: 28 --More-Related Commands ● show ip ospf database — display OSPF database information. show ip ospf database external Display information on the AS external (type 5) LSAs.
PAGE 1084
Usage Information Example Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The following describes the show ip ospf process-id database external command shown in the following example. Field Description LS Age Displays the LSA’s age.
PAGE 1085
LS Seq Number: 0x80000007 Checksum: 0x4cde Length: 36 Network Mask: /32 Metrics Type: 2 TOS: 0 Metrics: 25 Forward Address: 0.0.0.0 External Route Tag: 43 LS age: 1868 Options: (No TOS-capability, DC) LS type: Type-5 AS External Link State ID: 24.216.12.0 Advertising Router: 20.20.20.8 LS Seq Number: 0x80000005 Checksum: 0xa00e Length: 36 Network Mask: /24 Metrics Type: 2 TOS: 0 Metrics: 1 Forward Address: 0.0.0.
PAGE 1086
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 1087
Network Mask: Attached Attached Attached /24 Router: 20.20.20.8 Router: 20.20.20.9 Router: 20.20.20.7 Network (Area 0.0.0.1) LS age: 252 Options: (TOS-capability, No DC, E) LS type: Network Link State ID: 192.10.10.2 Advertising Router: 192.10.10.2 LS Seq Number: 0x80000007 Checksum: 0x4309 Length: 36 Network Mask: /24 Attached Router: 192.10.10.2 Attached Router: 20.20.20.1 Attached Router: 20.20.20.5 DellEMC# Related Commands ● show ip ospf database — display OSPF database information.
PAGE 1088
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1089
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 1090
Opaque ID: 1 Unable to display opaque data LS age: 833 Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E) LS type: Type-10 Opaque Link Area Link State ID: 1.0.0.2 Advertising Router: 10.16.1.160 LS Seq Number: 0x80000002 Checksum: 0x19c2 --More-Related Commands ● show ip ospf database — display OSPF database information. show ip ospf database opaque-as Display the opaque-as (type 11) LSA information.
PAGE 1091
Related Commands Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● show ip ospf database — display OSPF database information. show ip ospf database opaque-link Display the opaque-link (type 9) LSA information. Syntax Parameters show ip ospf [process-id | vrf vrf-name ] database opaque-link [link-stateid] [adv-router ip-address] process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process.
PAGE 1092
Related Commands Version Description 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● show ip ospf database — display OSPF database information. show ip ospf database router Display the router (type 1) LSA information.
PAGE 1093
Usage Information Example Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The following describes the show ip ospf process-id database router command shown in the following example. Item Description LS Age Displays the LSA age. Options Displays the optional capabilities available on router.
PAGE 1094
Area Border Router Number of Links: 10 Link connected to: a Transit Network (Link ID) Designated Router address: 192.68.129.1 (Link Data) Router Interface address: 192.68.129.1 Number of TOS metric: 0 TOS 0 Metric: 1 Link connected to: a Transit Network (Link ID) Designated Router address: 192.68.130.1 (Link Data) Router Interface address: 192.68.130.1 Number of TOS metric: 0 TOS 0 Metric: 1 Link connected to: a Transit Network (Link ID) Designated Router address: 192.68.142.
PAGE 1095
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1096
Example DellEMC# show ip ospf 100 database summary OSPF Router with ID (1.1.1.10) (Process ID 100) Summary Network (Area 0.0.0.0) LS age: 1551 Options: (No TOS-capability, DC, E) LS type: Summary Network Link State ID: 192.68.16.0 Advertising Router: 192.168.17.1 LS Seq Number: 0x80000054 Checksum: 0xb5a2 Length: 28 Network Mask: /24 TOS: 0 Metric: 1 LS age: 9 Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E) LS type: Summary Network Link State ID: 192.68.32.0 Advertising Router: 1.1.1.
PAGE 1097
● For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a Null interface, enter the keyword null then the Null interface number.
PAGE 1098
Item Description Designated Router... This line displays the ID of the Designated Router and its interface address. Backup Designated... This line displays the ID of the Backup Designated Router and its interface address. Timer intervals... This line displays the interface’s timer settings for Hello interval, Dead interval, Transmit Delay (Wait), and Retransmit Interval. Example Hello due... This line displays the amount time until the next Hello packet is sent out this interface. Neighbor Count..
PAGE 1099
Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
PAGE 1100
show ip ospf routes Display routes OSPF calculates and stores in OSPF RIB. Syntax show ip ospf [process-id | vrf vrf-name ] routes Parameters Defaults process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process. vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to show the OSPF RIB information corresponding to the OSPF processes that are tied to a specific VRF.
PAGE 1101
Dell EMC Networking OS Version 9.3(0.0). Starting with Version 9.4(0.0), the metric of E2 routes in the output is displayed as an external metric, whereas until Dell EMC Networking OS Version 9.3(0.0), the number of hops to the ASBR for E2 routes are displayed in the output. Example DellEMC# show ip ospf 100 route Prefix Cost Nexthop 1.1.1.1 1 0.0.0.0 3.3.3.3 2 13.0.0.3 13.0.0.0 1 0.0.0.0 150.150.150.0 2 13.0.0.3 172.30.1.0 2 13.0.0.
PAGE 1102
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 1103
Example Error Type Description Non-Dr Received packets with a destination address of ALL_DRS even though SELF is not a designated router. Self-Org Receive the self originated packet. Wrong_Len The received packet length is different to what was indicated in the OSPF header. Invld-Nbr LSA, LSR, LSU, and DDB are received from a peer which is not a neighbor peer. Nbr-State LSA, LSR, and LSU are received from a neighbor with stats less than the loading state.
PAGE 1104
● Transmit timer remaining value for each neighbor ● The LSU Q length and its highest mark for each neighbor ● The LSR Q length and its highest mark for each neighbor Example (Statistics) DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/6/1)# do show ip ospf statistics Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/6/1 Error packets (Receive statistics) Intf-Down 0 Non-Dr 0 Self-Org 0 Wrong-Len 0 Invld-Nbr 0 Nbr-State 0 Auth-Error 0 MD5-Error 0 Cksum-Err 0 Version 0 AreaMisMatch 0 Conf-Issue 0 SeqNo-Err 0 Unknown-Pkt 0 Bad-LsReq 0 RtidZero 0 Neighbo
PAGE 1105
Example Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. DellEMC# show ip ospf 10 timers rate-limit List of LSAs in rate limit Queue LSA id: 1.1.1.0 Type: 3 Adv Rtid: 3.3.3.3 Expiry time: 00:00:09.111 LSA id: 3.3.3.3 Type: 1 Adv Rtid: 3.3.3.3 Expiry time: 00:00:23.96 DellEMC# show ip ospf topology Display routers in directly connected areas.
PAGE 1106
Usage Information Example Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and E-Series. To isolate problems with inter-area and external routes, use this command. In OSPF inter-area and external routes are calculated by adding LSA cost to the cost of reaching the router. If an inter-area or external route is not of correct cost, the display can determine if the path to the originating router is correct or not. DellEMC# show ip ospf 1 topology Router ID 3.3.
PAGE 1107
Usage Information Related Commands Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The area range command summarizes routes for the different areas. With the not-advertise parameter configured, you can use this command to filter out some external routes.
PAGE 1108
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1109
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000.. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 1110
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. OSPFv3 Commands Open shortest path first version 3 (OSPFv3) for IPv6 is supported on the platform. The fundamental mechanisms of OSPF (flooding, DR election, area support, SPF calculations, and so on) remain unchanged. However, OSPFv3 runs on a per-link basis instead of on a per-IP-subnet basis.
PAGE 1111
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.1.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810 and Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.4.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Before you enable IPsec authentication on an OSPFv3 area, you must first enable OSPFv3 globally on the router.
PAGE 1112
authenticationalgorithm key-encryptiontype key Specifies the authentication algorithm to use for encryption. Valid values are MD5 or SHA1. (OPTIONAL) Specifies if the authentication key is encrypted. Valid values: 0 (key is not encrypted) or 7 (key is encrypted). Text string used in authentication. For MD5 authentication, the key must be 32 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 64 hex digits (encrypted). For SHA-1 authentication, the key must be 40 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 80 hex digits (encrypted).
PAGE 1113
area nssa Specify an area as a not so stubby area (NSSA). Syntax area area-id nssa [default-information-originate] [no-redistribution] [nosummary] To delete an NSSA, use the no area area-id nssa command. Parameters area-id Specify the OSPF area by entering a number from zero (0) to 65535. no-redistribution (OPTIONAL) Specify that the redistribute command does not distribute routes into the NSSA.
PAGE 1114
auto-cost Specify how the OSPF interface cost is calculated based on the reference bandwidth method. Syntax auto-cost [reference-bandwidth ref-bw] To return to the default bandwidth or to assign cost based on the interface type, use the no autocost [reference-bandwidth ref-bw] command. Parameters Defaults ref-bw (OPTIONAL) Specify a reference bandwidth in megabits per second. The range is from 1 to 4294967. The default is 100 megabits per second. 100 megabits per second.
PAGE 1115
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.1.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810 and Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 7.8.1.0 Added support for C-Series. 7.
PAGE 1116
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2.(0.0) Introduced on the S4820T, S4810, and Z9000. The following section describes the command fields. Lines Beginning With or Including Description OSPFv3...
PAGE 1117
Parameters interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 1118
RId:10.130.254.101 Seq:0x80000001 Met:20(E2) Opt:0x10(DN ) Prefix:9001::/64 -LSA:Router Age:1 LSId:0.0.0.0 RId:10.130.254.101 Seq:0x80000003 Flags:0x2(E) Opt:0x13(R E V6) #Links:1 -Type:TRNET Met:1 IntfId:1049476 NbrIntfId:1049476 NbrRId:10.160.3.37 from Te 0/7 DellEMC# Command Fields Lines Beginning With or Including Description OSPFv3... Debugging is on for all OSPFv3 packets and all interfaces. 05:21:01 Displays the time stamp. Sending Ver:3 Sending OSPF3 version..
PAGE 1119
Command History Example Example (detail) This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14.1.0 The detailoption is introduced on the S4810 and S4820T. 9.13(0.0) Added support for detailed debugging. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.
PAGE 1120
Lines Beginning With or Including Description ● ● ● ● ● 1 - Hello packet 2 - database description 3 - link state request 4 - link state update 5 - link state acknowledgement Length: Displays the OSPFv3 packet length. Router ID: Displays the OSPFv3 router ID. Area ID: Displays the OSPFv3 area ID. Chksum: Displays the OSPFv3 checksum. debug ipv6 ospf spf Display debug information for SPF timers on OSPF IPv6 packets.
PAGE 1121
Example Lines Beginning With or Including Description 05:21:01 Displays the time stamp. Sending Ver:3 Sending OSPF3 version..
PAGE 1122
Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER OSPFv3 Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON.
PAGE 1123
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.1.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810 and Z9000. 8.4.2.2 Introduced on the E-Series. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. By default, OSPFv3 graceful restart is disabled and functions only in a helper role to help restarting neighbor routers in their graceful restarts when it receives a Grace LSA.
PAGE 1124
Usage Information OSPFv3 graceful restart supports planned-only and/or unplanned-only restarts. The default is support for both planned and unplanned restarts. ● A planned restart occurs when you enter the redundancy force-failover rpm command to force the primary RPM to switch to the backup RPM. During a planned restart, OSPF sends out a Type-11 Grace LSA before the system switches over to the backup RPM.
PAGE 1125
Parameters null Causes an authentication policy configured for the area to not be inherited on the interface. ipsec spi number Security Policy index (SPI) value that identifies an IPsec security policy. The range is from 256 to 4294967295. MD5 | SHA1 Authentication type: Message Digest 5 (MD5) or Secure Hash Algorithm 1 (SHA-1). key-encryptiontype (OPTIONAL) Specifies if the key is encrypted. key Valid values: 0 (key is not encrypted) or 7 (key is encrypted). Text string used in authentication.
PAGE 1126
ipv6 ospf cost Explicitly specify the cost of sending a packet on an interface. Syntax ipv6 ospf interface-cost Parameters Defaults interface-cost Enter a unsigned integer value expressed as the link-state metric. The range is from 1 to 65535. Default cost based on the bandwidth. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1127
Defaults 40 seconds (Ethernet). Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1128
key-encryptiontype key (OPTIONAL) Specifies if the authentication key is encrypted. Valid values: 0 (key is not encrypted) or 7 (key is encrypted). Text string used in authentication. For MD5 authentication, the key must be 32 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 64 hex digits (encrypted). For SHA-1 authentication, the key must be 40 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 80 hex digits (encrypted). Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1129
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.
PAGE 1130
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.1.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810 and Z9000. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. Usage Information The time interval between hello packets must be the same for routers in a network. Related Commands ● ipv6 ospf dead-interval – specify the time interval between hello packets was received from a router.
PAGE 1131
ipv6 router ospf Enable OSPF for IPv6 router configuration. Syntax ipv6 router ospf process-id [vrf vrf-name] To exit OSPF for IPv6, use the no ipv6 router ospf process-id command. Parameters Defaults process-id Enter the process identification number. The range is from 1 to 65535. vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to install IPv6 routes in that VRF. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1132
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Added support for Multi-Process OSPF. 7.
PAGE 1133
Usage Information Version Description 9.1.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810 and Z9000. 8.4.2.5 Introduced on C-Series and E-Series TeraScale. 8.4.1.3 Introduced on E-Series ExaScale.
PAGE 1134
passive-interface Disable (suppress) sending routing updates on an interface. Syntax passive—interface interface To enable sending routing updates on an interface, use the no passive-interface interface command. Parameters interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 1135
OSPFv3 for IPv6 routing information is not sent or received through the specified router interface. The specified interface address appears as a stub network in the OSPFv3 for IPv6 domain. On configuring suppression using the passive-interface command, the state of the OSPF neighbor does not change to INIT; instead, the state of the OSPF neighbor changes to DOWN after the dead-timer expires. redistribute Redistribute into OSPFv3.
PAGE 1136
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.1.(0.0) Introduced support for OSPFv3 on the S4810 and Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 7.8.1.0 Added support for the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. To redistribute the default route (x:x:x:x::x), use the default-information originate command.
PAGE 1137
If this command is used on an OSPFv3 process that is already active (has neighbors), all the neighbor adjacencies are brought down immediately and new sessions are initiated with the new router ID. snmp context Configure SNMPv3 context name to map multiple OSPFv3 VRF instances. Syntax snmp context {context-name} To clear snmp context, use the no snmp context {context-name} command. Parameters Defaults context-name Enter the SNMP context name. The maximum length is 32 alphanumeric characters. None.
PAGE 1138
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.1.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810 and Z9000. 8.4.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T.
PAGE 1139
show crypto ipsec policy Command Fields Field Description Policy name Displays the name of an IPsec policy. Policy refcount Number of interfaces on the router that use the policy. Inbound ESP SPI and Outbound ESP SPI The encapsulating security payload (ESP) security policy index (SPI) for inbound and outbound links. Inbound ESP Auth Key and Outbound Auth Key The ESP authentication key for inbound and outbound links.
PAGE 1140
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.1.(0.0) Introduced on the S4810 and Z9000. 8.4.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T.
PAGE 1141
outbound esp sas spi : 600 (0x258) transform : esp-des esp-sha1-hmac in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection support : N STATUS : ACTIVE show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 Command Fields Field Description Interface IPv6 interface Link local address IPv6 address of interface IPSecv6 policy name Name of the IPsec security policy applied to the interface. inbound/ outbound ah Authentication policy applied to inbound or outbound traffic.
PAGE 1142
Defaults intra-area-prefix (OPTIONAL): Enter the keyword intra-area-prefix to display the intra area prefix link states. link (OPTIONAL): Enter the keyword link to display the link states. network (OPTIONAL): Enter the keyword network to display the network link states. nssa-external (OPTIONAL): Enter the keyword nssa-external to display the nssa link state information. router (OPTIONAL): Enter the keyword router to display the router link states.
PAGE 1143
Example (databasesummary) DellEMC# show ipv6 ospf 3 database database-summary OSPFv3 Router with ID (1.1.1.
PAGE 1144
Example (nssaexternal) DellEMC#show ipv6 ospf 10 database nssa-external OSPFv3 Router with ID (1.1.1.1) (Process ID 10) AS External Link States (Area 1) LS Age: 35 LS Type: OSPFv3 NSSA LSA Link State ID: 0.0.0.1 Advertising Router: 1.1.1.1 LS Seq Number: 0x80000001 Checksum: 0xD2DD Length: 52 Prefix: 101:101:1::/64 Prefix Options: 0x8 ( P ) Metric Type: 2 Metric: 20 Forwarding Address: 101:101:1::1 show ipv6 ospf interface View OSPFv3 interface information.
PAGE 1145
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2.(0.0) Added support for showing BFD status on the S4820T, S4810, and Z9000. 9.1.(0.0) Added support for OSPFv3 on the S4810 and Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 7.8.1.
PAGE 1146
● For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Defaults None Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1147
Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the S3100 series, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S5048F-ON, S6000, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, Z9500, S6000–ON, C9010, MXL, and FN IOM. Use SNMPv3 context configuration to distinguish between various OSPFv3 VRF instances.
PAGE 1148
Usage Information Example 1148 Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON, S6000, S4820T, S4810, S5000. Setting the delay and holdtime parameters to a low number enables the switch to an alternate path quickly but requires more CPU usage.
PAGE 1149
39 Policy-based Routing (PBR) Policy-based routing (PBR) allows you to apply routing policies to specific interfaces. To enable PBR, create a redirect list and apply it to the interface. After the redirect list is applied to the interface, all traffic passing through the interface is subject to the rules defined in the redirect list. PBR is supported by the Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 1150
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 8.4.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. You can apply any number of redirect-groups to an interface. A redirect list can contain any number of configured rules.
PAGE 1151
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 8.4.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 6.5.3.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1152
● urg = urgent field operator Defaults (OPTIONAL) For TCP and UDP parameters only. Enter one of the following logical operand: ● eq = equal to ● neq = not equal to ● gt = greater than ● lt= less than ● range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the portcommand parameter.) None Command Modes REDIRECT-LIST Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1153
Defaults tunnel-id Enter the keyword tunnel-id to redirect the traffic. track Enter the keyword track to enable the tracking. track Enter the keyword track to track object-id. ip-protocolnumber Enter a number from 0 to 255 for the protocol identified in the IP protocol header.
PAGE 1154
Version Description 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 8.4.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. seq Configure a filter with an assigned sequence number for the redirect list.
PAGE 1155
● ● ● ● psh rst syn urg = = = = push function reset the connection synchronize sequence number urgent field operator (OPTIONAL) For the TCP and UDP parameters only. Enter one of the following logical operand: ● eq = equal to ● neq = not equal to ● gt = greater than ● lt= less than ● range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port command parameter.
PAGE 1156
Parameters interface interface stack–unit number Defaults Enter the keyword interface then the name of the interface. Enter the keyword stack-unit then the slot number. port-set number Enter the keywords port-set then the port-pipe number. summary Enter the keyword summary to view only the total number of CAM entries. pipeline number Enter the keyword pipeline and a number to which the interface belongs. The range is from 0 to 3.
PAGE 1157
Command History Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000.
PAGE 1158
40 PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) The protocol-independent multicast (PIM) commands are supported by the Dell EMC Networking operating software on the platform. The following describes the IPv4 PIM-SIM commands. Topics: • • IPv4 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands IPv6 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands IPv4 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands The following describes the IPv4 PIM-sparse mode (PIM-SM) commands.
PAGE 1159
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. This command re-applies the RP mapping logic for all the groups learnt by the node. Any stale information corresponding to the existing mapping configuration is updated. The existing BSR cache and the *,G's are deleted only if these entries are stale. clear ip pim tib Clear PIM tree information from the PIM database.
PAGE 1160
If you use this command on a peer VLT node, only the synced routes are deleted from the multicast route table. debug ip pim View IP PIM debugging messages. Syntax debug ip pim [vrf vrf-name] [bsr | events | group | packet [in | out] | register | state | timer [assert | hello | joinprune | register]] To disable PIM debugging, use the no debug ip pim [vrf vrf-name] command or use the undebug all to disable all debugging command.
PAGE 1161
Version Description 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. ip pim bsr-border Define the border of PIM domain by filtering inbound and outbound PIM-BSR messages per interface. Syntax ip pim bsr-border To return to the default value, use the no ip pim bsr-border command. Defaults Disabled.
PAGE 1162
ip pim bsr-candidate To join the Bootstrap election process, configure the PIM router. Syntax ip pim [vrf vrf-name] bsr-candidate interface [hash-mask-length] [priority] To return to the default value, use the no ip pim bsr-candidate [vrf vrf-name] command. Parameters Defaults vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to configure the PIM router on a VRF.
PAGE 1163
Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 6.1.1.0 Added support for the VLAN interface. ip pim dr-priority Change the designated router (DR) priority for the interface. Syntax ip pim dr-priority priority-value To remove the DR priority value assigned, use the no ip pim dr-priority command. Parameters Defaults priority-value Enter a number. Preference is given to larger/higher number. The range is from 0 to 4294967294. The default is 1.
PAGE 1164
Parameters Defaults ext-access-list Enter the name of an extended access list. none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 1165
NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to default VRF. access-list Defaults Enter the name of a standard access list. Maximum 16 characters. none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1166
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.
PAGE 1167
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced The access name is an extended IP access list that denies PIM register packets to RP at the source DR based on the multicast and group addresses. Do not enter this command before creating the access-list.
PAGE 1168
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. pre- 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. First-hop routers use this address by to send register packets on behalf of source multicast hosts. The RP addresses are stored in the order in which they are entered.
PAGE 1169
Usage Information Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced the acl-name parameter. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.
PAGE 1170
Usage Information Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series for the port-channels and the S-Series. The interface must be enabled (the no shutdown command) and not have the switchport command configured. Multicast must also be enabled globally (using the ip multicast-lag-hashing command). PIM is supported on the port-channel interface. ip pim sparse-mode sg-expiry-timer Enable expiry timers globally for all sources.
PAGE 1171
Usage Information Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series for the port-channels and the S-Series. 7.7.1.1 Introduced This command configures an expiration timer for all S.G entries, unless they are assigned to an Extended ACL. Even though the FHR nodes act as RPs, these nodes still send Register encap messages to themselves and expect to receive a Register stop message (for Anycast RP support).
PAGE 1172
Usage Information Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Dell EMC Networking OS supports standard access lists for the SSM range. You cannot use extended ACLs for configuring the SSM range. If you configure an extended ACL and then used in the ip pim ssm-range {access list name} configuration, an error is reported.
PAGE 1173
Usage Information Version Description 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. This command is applicable to last hop routers on the shared tree towards the rendezvous point (RP). show ip pim bsr-router View information on the Bootstrap router.
PAGE 1174
This system is a candidate BSR Candidate BSR address: 7.7.7.7, priority: 0, hash mask length: 30 DellEMC# show ip pim interface View information on the interfaces with IP PIM enabled. Syntax show ip pim [vrf vrf-name] interface Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to configure this setting on this VRF. NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to Default VRF.
PAGE 1175
Field Description Query Intvl Displays the query interval for Router Query messages on that interface (configured with ip pim query-interval command). DR Prio Displays the Designated Router priority value configured on the interface (use the ip pim dr-priority command). DR Displays the IP address of the Designated Router for that interface. The show ip pim interface command does not display information corresponding to the loop-back interfaces.
PAGE 1176
Usage Information Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. The following describes the show ip pim neighbor command shown in the following example. Field Description Neighbor address Displays the IP address of the PIM neighbor. Example Interface List the interface type, with either slot/port information or ID (VLAN or Port Channel), on which the PIM neighbor was found.
PAGE 1177
Example Example (Mapping) Example (Address) Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series.
PAGE 1178
Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. Added support for VRF on S6000, S4810, S4820T, Z9000, Z9500, and S6000–ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000.
PAGE 1179
Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.4.1.1 Support for the display of PIM-SM snooping status was added on E-Series. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series.
PAGE 1180
show ip pim tib View the PIM tree information base (TIB). Syntax show ip pim [vrf vrf-name] tib [group-address [source-address]] Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to configure this setting on that VRF. NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to Default VRF. group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the group address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). source-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the source address in dotted decimal format (A.
PAGE 1181
Field Description ● ● ● ● ● ● L = local to the multicast group P = route was pruned R = the forwarding entry is pointing toward the RP F = Dell EMC Networking OS is registering this entry for a multicast source T = packets were received via Shortest Tree Path J = first packet from the last hop router is received and the entry is ready to switch to SPT ● K = acknowledge pending state Example Incoming interface Displays the reverse path forwarding (RPF) interface towards the RP/ source.
PAGE 1182
Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to configure this setting on that VRF. NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to Default VRF. group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero. Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.11.3.
PAGE 1183
ipv6 pim bsr-border Define the border of IPv6 PIM domain by filtering inbound and outbound PIM-BSR messages per interface. Syntax ipv6 pim bsr-border To return to the default value, use the no ipv6 pim bsr-border command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. 9.14(1.
PAGE 1184
Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the C9010, S3048-ON, S3100 Series, S4048-ON, S4048T-ON, S6000-ON, S6010-ON, S6100-ON, Z9100-ON. ipv6 pim dr-priority Change the designated router (DR) priority for the IPv6 interface. Syntax ipv6 pim dr-priority priority-value To remove the DR priority value assigned, use the no ipv6 pim dr-priority command. Parameters Defaults priority-value Enter a number. Preference is given to larger/higher number. The range is from 0 to 4294967294. The default is 1.
PAGE 1185
ipv6 pim rp-address Configure a static PIM rendezvous point (RP) address for a group. First-hop routers use this address to send register packets on behalf of the source multicast host. Syntax ipv6 pim [vrf vrf-name] rp-address address {group-address group-address mask} [override] To remove an RP address, use the no ipv6 pim re-address address group-address mask [override] command.
PAGE 1186
● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 1187
Usage Information Enable the interface (use the no shutdown command) and not have the switchport command configured. Also enable Multicast globally. PIM is supported on the port-channel interface. ipv6 pim sparse-mode sg-expiry-timer Enable expiry timers globally for all sources. Syntax ipv6 pim [vrf vrf-name] sparse-mode sg-expiry-timer seconds To disable configured timers and return to default mode, use the no ipv6 pim sparse-mode sgexpiry-timer command.
PAGE 1188
Usage Information Version Description 9.11.3.0 Introduced on the Z9100-ON, S4048-ON, S6000-ON, S6100-ON, S4048T-ON, S3100, S6010-ON, S3048-ON, and C9010. PIM leaf routers join the shortest path tree immediately after the first packet arrives from a new source. show ipv6 pim bsr-router View information on the bootstrap router. Syntax show ipv6 pim [vrf vrf-name] bsr-router Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF.
PAGE 1189
Example Version Description 9.11.3.0 Introduced on the Z9100-ON, S4048-ON, S6000-ON, S6100-ON, S4048T-ON, S3100, S6010-ON, S3048-ON, and C9010.
PAGE 1190
Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to view IP PIM debugging messages corresponding to that VRF. mapping (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword mapping to display the multicast groups-to-RP mapping and information on how RP is learned. group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group address in the x:x:x:x::x format to view RP mappings for a specific group. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.
PAGE 1191
RP: 100::1, v2 DellEMC# show ipv6 pim summary View information about PIM-SM operation. Syntax Parameters show ipv6 pim [vrf vrf-name] summary vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to configure this setting on that VRF. NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to Default VRF. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1192
show ipv6 pim tib View the IPv6 PIM multicast-routing database (tree information base — tib). Syntax show ipv6 pim [vrf vrf-name] tib [group-address [source-address]] Parameters vrf vrf-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF to view IP PIM debugging messages corresponding to that VRF. NOTE: Applies to specific VRF if input is provided, else applies to Default VRF.
PAGE 1193
41 Port Monitoring The port monitoring feature allows you to monitor network traffic by forwarding a copy of each incoming or outgoing packet from one port to another port. Important Points to Remember ● Port monitoring is supported on physical ports and logical interfaces, such as port channels and virtual local area networks (VLANs). ● The monitoring (destination, “MG”) and monitored (source, “MD”) ports must be on the same switch.
PAGE 1194
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.
PAGE 1195
Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced GRE protocol support. ip access-group Assign an IP access list (IP ACL) in the monitor session mode. Syntax Parameters Defaults ip access-group access-list-name access-list-name Enter the name of a configured access list, up to 140 characters. Not enabled. Command Modes MONITOR SESSION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1196
Example Command History DellEMC(conf)#monitor multicast-queue 7 This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell EMC Networking OS version history for this command. Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 1197
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1198
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000-ON, Z9500. ● monitor session — enable a monitoring session. ● show monitor session — display the monitor session.
PAGE 1199
monitor session 1 source TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 destination Port-channel 1 direction rx show monitor session Display information about monitoring sessions. Syntax show monitor session {session-ID} [access-list] To display monitoring information for all sessions, use the show monitor session command. Parameters Defaults session-ID (OPTIONAL) Enter a session identification number. The range is from 0 to 65535.
PAGE 1200
Example DellEMC# show monitor session 1 SessID Source Destination Dest IP DSCP TTL Drop Rate ------ -------------------------- ------ ---1 Te 1/2/1 remote-ip 0.0.0.0 0 0 No N/A DellEMC# Dir Mode Source IP Gre-Protocol FcMonitor --- ---- ------------------- --------rx Port 0.0.0.0 N/A yes DellEMC# show monitor session SessID Source Destination Dest IP DSCP TTL Drop Rate ------ -------------------------- ------ ---1 Te 1/2/1 remote-ip 0.0.0.
PAGE 1201
Usage Information Example Related Commands Version Description 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1202
NOTE: This option is applicable only with drop monitor session. Defaults destination Enter the keyword destination to specify the destination interface. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 1203
Example Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1204
42 Private VLAN (PVLAN) The private VLAN (PVLAN) feature of the Dell EMC Networking OS is supported on the platforms. Private VLANs extend the Dell EMC Networking OS security suite by providing Layer 2 isolation between ports within the same private VLAN. A private VLAN partitions a traditional VLAN into subdomains identified by a primary and secondary VLAN pair. The Dell EMC Networking OS private VLAN implementation is based on RFC 3069. For more information, see the following commands.
PAGE 1205
ip local-proxy-arp Enable/disable Layer 3 communication between secondary VLANs in a private VLAN. Syntax [no] ip local-proxy-arp To disable Layer 3 communication between secondary VLANs in a private VLAN, use the no ip localproxy-arp command in INTERFACE VLAN mode for the primary VLAN. To disable Layer 3 communication in a particular secondary VLAN, use the no ip local-proxy-arp command in INTERFACE VLAN mode for the selected secondary VLAN.
PAGE 1206
To remove the PVLAN configuration, use the no private-vlan mode {community | isolated | primary} command syntax. Parameters Defaults community Enter the keyword community to set the VLAN as a community VLAN. isolated Enter the keyword isolated to configure the VLAN as an isolated VLAN. primary Enter the keyword primary to configure the VLAN as a primary VLAN. none Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1207
Parameters Defaults vlan-list Enter the list of secondary VLANs to associate with the selected primary VLAN. The list can be in comma-delimited or hyphenated-range format, following the convention for the range input. none Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1208
Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1209
43 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+) is based on the IEEE 802.1w standard spanning tree protocol. Dell EMC Networking OS supports PVST+ on the platform. NOTE: For easier command line entry, the plus (+) sign is not used at the command line.
PAGE 1210
Related Commands Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. pre- 7.7.1.1 Introduced. ● protocol spanning-tree pvst — enter SPANNING TREE mode on the switch. disable Disable PVST+ globally. Syntax disable To enable PVST+, use the no disable command. Defaults Disabled.
PAGE 1211
extend system-id To augment the Bridge ID with a VLAN ID so that PVST+ differentiate between BPDUs for each VLAN, use extend system ID. If the VLAN receives a BPDU meant for another VLAN, PVST+ does not detect a loop, and both ports can remain in Forwarding state. Syntax extend system-id Defaults Disabled Command Modes PROTOCOL PVST Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1212
protocol spanning-tree pvst To enable PVST+ on a device, enter the PVST+ mode. Syntax protocol spanning-tree pvst To disable PVST+, use the disable command. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1213
show spanning-tree pvst View the Per-VLAN spanning tree configuration. Syntax Parameters Defaults show spanning-tree pvst [vlan vlan-id] [brief] [guard] vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID. The range is 1 to 4094. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view a synopsis of the PVST+ configuration information.
PAGE 1214
Usage Information Example (Brief) Version Description 8.4.2.1 Support for the optional guard keyword was added on the C-Series, S-Series, and E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.4.1.0 Expanded to display port error disable state (EDS) caused by loopback BPDU inconsistency and Port VLAN ID inconsistency. 6.2.1.1 Introduced. The following describes the show spanning-tree pvst command shown in the following examples.
PAGE 1215
Port 131 (TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.131 Designated root has priority 4096, address 0001.e805.e3:06 Designated bridge has priority 4096, address 0001.e805.e3:06 Designated port id is 128.
PAGE 1216
Related Commands ● spanning-tree pvst — configure PVST+ on an interface. spanning-tree pvst Configure a PVST+ interface with one of these settings: edge port with optional bridge port data unit (BPDU) guard, port disablement if an error condition occurs, port priority or cost for a VLAN range, loop guard, or root guard.
PAGE 1217
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.4.2.1 Introduced the loopguard and rootguard options on the E-Series, C-Series, and S-Series. 8.3.7.
PAGE 1218
spanning-tree pvst vlan 3 cost 18000 no shutdown DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)# end DellEMC# Related Commands ● show spanning-tree pvst — views the PVST+ configuration. spanning-tree pvst err-disable Place ports in an Err-Disabled state if they receive a PVST+ BPDU when they are members an untagged VLAN. Syntax spanning-tree pvst err-disable cause invalid-pvst-bpdu Defaults Enabled; ports are placed in the Err-Disabled state if they receive a PVST+ BPDU when they are members of an untagged VLAN.
PAGE 1219
tc-flush-standard Enable the MAC address flushing after receiving every topology change notification. Syntax tc-flush-standard To disable, use the no tc-flush-standard command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1220
Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-pvst) Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1221
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 1222
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced.
PAGE 1223
Related Commands Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced. ● vlan bridge-priority — sets the bridge-priority value.
PAGE 1224
44 Quality of Service (QoS) The Dell EMC Networking OS commands for quality of service (QoS) include traffic conditioning and congestion control. QoS commands are not universally supported on all Dell EMC Networking products. Topics: • • • • Global Configuration Commands Per-Port QoS Commands Policy-Based QoS Commands DSCP Color Map Commands Global Configuration Commands There is only one global configuration QoS command.
PAGE 1225
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced. By default, when rate policing and shaping, the system does not include the Preamble, SFD, or the IFG fields. These fields are overhead; only the fields from MAC destination address to the CRC are used for forwarding and are included in these rate metering calculations. service-class bandwidth-percentage Specify a minimum bandwidth for queues.
PAGE 1226
Parameters Defaults queue Enter a value from 0 to 7. For each dot1p Priority, the default CoS queue value is: ● Dot1p Priority : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ● Queue : 1 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1227
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. Usage Information trust dot1p, do1p-priority, service-class dynamic dot1; all these features work over the mapping in this command output. Related Commands ● service-class dot1p-mapping — Identifies the class map.
PAGE 1228
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
PAGE 1229
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1230
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.
PAGE 1231
dot1p Queue ID 5 5 6 6 7 7 Command Modes ● INTERFACE ● CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1232
Policy-Based QoS Commands Policy-based traffic classification is handled with class maps. These maps classify data traffic into one of eight classes eight classes. Dell EMC Networking OS enables you to match multiple class maps and specify multiple match criteria. Policy-based QoS is not supported on logical interfaces, such as port-channels, VLANS, or loopbacks. bandwidth-percentage Assign a percentage of weight to the class/queue.
PAGE 1233
buffer-stats-snapshot Enable the buffer statistics tracking utility and enter the Buffer Statistics Snapshot configuration mode. You must enable this utility to be able to configure the parameters for buffer statistics tracking. Syntax [No] buffer-stats-snapshot To disable the buffer statistics tracking utility, enter the disable command from the BUFFER-STATSSNAPSHOT mode. Default By default, buffer statistics tracking is disabled.
PAGE 1234
Defaults cpu-qos Enter the keyword cpu-qos to assign this Class Map to control plane traffic only (CoPP). layer2 Enter the keyword layer2 to specify a Layer 2 Class Map. The default is Layer 3. Layer 3 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1235
clear qos statistics Clear qos statistics clears statistics from show qos statistics. Syntax Parameters Defaults clear qos statistics interface-name interface-name Enter one of the following keywords: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 1236
description Add a description to the selected policy map or QoS policy. Syntax description {description} To remove the description, use the no description {description} command. Parameters Defaults description Enter a description to identify the policies (80 characters maximum). none Command Modes CONFIGURATION (policy-map-input and policy-map-output; conf-qos-policy-in and conf-qos-policy-out; wred) Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1237
Parameters seq sequence number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword seq then the sequence number. The range is from 1 to 100. By default, the sequence number are assigned in multiples of five. access-groupname Enter the ACL name whose contents are used as the match criteria in determining if packets belong to the class the class-map specifies. set-ip-dscp value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords set-ip-dscp then the IP DSCP value. The matched traffic is marked with the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63.
PAGE 1238
match ip dscp Use a differentiated services code point (DSCP) value as a match criteria. Syntax [seq sequence number] match {ip | ipv6 | ip-any} dscp dscp-list [set-ipdscp value] To remove a DSCP value as a match criteria, use the no [seq sequence number] match {ip | ipv6 | ip-any} dscp dscp-list [[multicast] set-ip-dscp value] command. Parameters seq sequence number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword seq then the sequence number. The range is from 1 to 100.
PAGE 1239
Usage Information To access this command, enter the class-map command. After the class map is identified, you can configure the match criteria. The match ip dscp and match ip precedence commands are mutually exclusive. Up to 64 IP DSCP values can be matched in one match statement. For example, to indicate IP DCSP values 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7, enter either the match ip dscp 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 or match ip dscp 0-7 command.
PAGE 1240
Usage Information Version Description 9.5(0.0) Added support for the ipv6 and ip-any options on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, MXL. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Added the keyword multicast . Added support for the DSCP Marking option for the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 1241
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Available on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Added support for the DSCP Marking option. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information To access this command, enter the class-map command.
PAGE 1242
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Available on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Added support for the DSCP Marking option. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information To access this command, enter the class-map command. After the class map is identified, you can configure the match criteria. Related Commands ● class-map — identifies the class map.
PAGE 1243
Related Commands ● class-map — identifies the class map. policy-aggregate Allow an aggregate method of configuring per-port QoS via policy maps. An aggregate QoS policy is part of the policy map (output) applied on an interface. Syntax policy-aggregate qos-policy-name To remove a policy aggregate configuration, use the no policy-aggregate qos-policy-name command. Parameters Defaults qos-policy-name Enter the name of the policy map in character format (32 characters maximum).
PAGE 1244
policy-map-input Create an input policy map. Syntax policy-map-input policy-map-name cpu-qos | [layer2] [cpu-qos] To remove an input policy map, use the no policy-map-input policy-map-name cpu-qos | [layer2] [cpu-qos] command. Parameters Defaults policy-map-name Enter the name of the policy map in character format (32 characters maximum). cpu-qos Enter the cpu-qos keyword to assign this ACL to control plane traffic only. layer2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword layer2 to specify a Layer 2 Class Map.
PAGE 1245
policy-map-output Create an output policy map. Syntax policy-map-output policy-map-name To remove a policy map, use the no policy-map-output policy-map-name command. Parameters Defaults policy-map-name Enter the name for the policy map in character format (32 characters maximum). none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.
PAGE 1246
Defaults cpu-qos (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cpu-qos keyword to assign this ACL to control plane traffic only. layer2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword layer2 to specify a Layer 2 Class Map. The default is Layer 3. Layer 3 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 1247
Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1248
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1249
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 1250
Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the resequence option for class-map on all the Dell EMC Networking OS platforms. If there is no option to create a new rule and to avoid reconfiguring class-map, use the resequence class-map command.
PAGE 1251
Usage Information Version Description 7.4.1.0 E-Series Only: Expanded to add support for Layer 2. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. You can attach a single policy-map to one or more interfaces to specify the service-policy for those interfaces. A policy map attached to an interface can be modified. NOTE: The service-policy commands are not allowed on a port channel.
PAGE 1252
Usage Information A single policy-map can be attached to one or more interfaces to specify the service-policy for those interfaces. A policy map attached to an interface can be modified. Related Commands ● policy-map-output — creates an output policy map. service-queue Assign a class map and QoS policy to different queues.
PAGE 1253
Usage Information There are eight queues per interface on the S6000 and four queues on the S-Series. This command assigns a class map or QoS policy to different queues. Related Commands ● class-map — identifies the class map. ● service-policy input — applies an input policy map to the selected interface. ● service-policy output — applies an output policy map to the selected interface. set Mark outgoing traffic with a differentiated service code point (DSCP) or dot1p value.
PAGE 1254
show qos class-map View the current class map information. Syntax show qos class-map [class-name] Parameters Defaults class-name (Optional) Enter the name of a configured class map. none Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.12(0.0) Introduced the seq option on all the Dell EMC Networking OS platforms.
PAGE 1255
Parameters 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. summary To view a policy map interface summary, enter the keyword summary and optionally one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 1256
Example (IPv4) Version Description 7.4.1.0 E-Series only: Added trust IPv6 diffserv . 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1257
Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1258
show qos policy-map-output View the output QoS policy map details. Syntax show qos policy-map-output [policy-map-name] [qos-policy-output qos-policyname] Parameters policy-map-name Enter the policy map name. qos-policyoutput qos- Enter the keyword qos-policy-output then the QoS policy name. policy-name Defaults none Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1259
show qos qos-policy-input View the input QoS policy details. Syntax Parameters Defaults show qos qos-policy-input [qos-policy-name] qos-policy-name Enter the QoS policy name. none Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148.
PAGE 1260
Defaults none Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.
PAGE 1261
wred-profile interface interface Defaults Enter the keywords wred-profile and optionally one of the following keywords and slot/po or number information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/ port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/ subport information.
PAGE 1262
Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1263
Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11.0.0 Introduced on the S6100 and Z9100. This command displays the details of total number of packets marked with ECN and the total number of packets that got dropped. The total number of packets includes both the packets marked with ECN and packets not marked with ECN.
PAGE 1264
Example Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1265
The following table describes the mapping between the threshold weight of the shared buffer on the queue. It also shows the percentage of the available shared buffer used by the queues for each of the corresponding threshold weights of the shared buffer: Example sharedthresholdweight on the queue % of available shared buffer that can be consumed by the queue 0 No dynamic sharing; shared buffer = 0. 1 0.77% 2 1.54% 3 3.03% 4 5.88% 5 11.11% 6 20% 7 33.33% 8 50% 9 66.
PAGE 1266
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 1267
threshold Specify the minimum and maximum threshold values for the configured WRED profiles. Syntax threshold min number max number max-drop-drop To remove the threshold values, use the no threshold min number max number command. Parameters min number Enter the keyword min then the minimum threshold number for the WRED profile. The range is from 1 to 9360. max number Enter the keyword max then the maximum threshold number for the WRED profile. The range is from 1 to 9360 KB.
PAGE 1268
trust Specify dynamic classification (DSCP) or dot1p to trust. Syntax trust {diffserv [fallback]| dot1p [fallback]} Parameters Defaults diffserv Enter the keyword diffserv to specify trust of DSCP markings. dot1p Enter the keyword dot1p to specify trust dot1p configuration. fallback Enter the keyword fallback to classify packets according to their DSCP or dot1p value as a secondary option in case no match occurs against the configured class maps.
PAGE 1269
Table 6.
PAGE 1270
Parameters yellow | green Enter the keyword yellow for yellow traffic. A DSCP value of xxx110 and xxx100, xxx101 maps to yellow. Enter the keyword green for green traffic. A DSCP value of xxx0xx are green and DSCP 111111 are red packets. profile-name Enter your WRED profile name in character format (32 character maximum). Or use one of the five pre-defined WRED profile names. Pre-defined Profiles: wred_drop, wred-ge_y, wred_ge_g, wred_teng_y, wred_teng_.
PAGE 1271
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820t. 8.3.11.
PAGE 1272
Command History Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.3.0.0 Introduced on the S6000 and Z9000 platforms If the average queue size is more than the maximum threshold of WRED, the packet is dropped.
PAGE 1273
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 6.1.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information Use the default pre-defined profiles or configure your own profile. You cannot delete the pre-defined profiles or their default values. This command enables WRED configuration mode —(conf-wred). Related Commands ● threshold — specifies the minimum and maximum threshold values of the WRED profile.
PAGE 1274
Packets Default (OPTIONAL) Enter the peak burst size as a count of packets. The range is from 1 to 1073000. The default is 50 packets. The default peak rate is regarded as the same value as the configured peak rate. Granularity for rate is Mbps unless you use the kbps option. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1275
Default wred Specify WRED curve parameters for a queue. green Specify green (low) drop precedence to a queue. weight Specify a weight factor to a queue. yellow Specify yellow (medium) drop precedence to a queue. pool0 Service-pool buffer 1 (default service-pool for PFC traffic) . pool1 Service-pool buffer 0 (default service-pool for both lossy and lossless traffic. traffic). number Enter a weight for the queue as a number in the range of 1 to 15.
PAGE 1276
To remove a color policy map profile, use the no dscp {yellow | red} [dscp-list] command. Parameters Defaults Yellow Enter the yellow keyword. Traffic marked as yellow delivers traffic to the egress queue which either transmits the packet if it has available bandwidth or drops the packet due to no ability to send. Red Enter the red keyword. Traffic marked as red is dropped. dscp-list Enter a list of IP DSCP values.
PAGE 1277
Parameters Defaults map-name Enter the name of the DSCP color map. The map name can have a maximum of 32 characters. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 1278
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. Version 9.5.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, and MXL.
PAGE 1279
Example Version Description 9.5.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, and MXL. Display summary information about a color policy on one or more interfaces. DellEMC# show qos dscp-color-policy summary Interface TE 1/10/1 TE 1/11/1 dscp-color-map mapONE mapTWO Display summary information about a color policy on a specific interface. DellEMC# show qos dscp-color-policy summary te 1/10/1 Interface dscp-color-map TE 1/10/1 mapONE Displayed detailed color policy information on an interface.
PAGE 1280
Example Display all DSCP color maps. DellEMC# show qos dscp-color-map Dscp-color-map mapONE yellow 4,7 red 20,30 Dscp-color-map mapTWO yellow 16,55 Display a specific DSCP color map.
PAGE 1281
45 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Routing information protocol (RIP) is a distance vector routing protocol. The Dell EMC Networking OS supports both RIP version 1 (RIPv1) and RIP version 2 (RIPv2). The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of RIP is based on IETF RFCs 2453 and RFC 1058. For more information about configuring RIP, see the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide.
PAGE 1282
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 1283
Usage Information Version Description 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. This command triggers updates of the main RIP routing tables. debug ip rip Examine RIP routing information for troubleshooting. Syntax debug ip rip [interface | database | events [interface] | trigger] To turn off debugging output, use the no debug ip rip command.
PAGE 1284
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. default-information originate Generate a default route for the RIP traffic.
PAGE 1285
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The default route must be present in the switch routing table for the default-information originate command to take effect. default-metric Change the default metric for routes. To ensure that all redistributed routes use the same metric value, use this command with the redistribute command.
PAGE 1286
Related Commands ● redistribute — allows you to redistribute routes learned by other methods. description Enter a description of the RIP routing protocol. Syntax description {description} To remove the description, use the no description {description} command. Parameters Defaults description Enter a description to identify the RIP protocol (80 characters maximum). none Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1287
Defaults ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address, in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D), of the host or network to receive the new distance metric. mask If you enter an IP address, also enter a mask for that IP address, in either dotted decimal format or /prefix format (/x). prefix-name (OPTIONAL) Enter a configured prefix list name. weight = 120 Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1288
● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Defaults Not configured.
PAGE 1289
Defaults interface (OPTIONAL) Identifies the interface type slot/port as one of the following: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 1290
ip poison-reverse Set the prefix of the RIP routing updates to the RIP infinity value. Syntax ip poison-reverse To disable poison reverse, use the no ip poison-reverse command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1291
Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.
PAGE 1292
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.
PAGE 1293
Related Commands Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● ip poison-reverse — sets the prefix for RIP routing updates. maximum-paths Set RIP to forward packets over multiple paths.
PAGE 1294
Usage Information Version Description pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. RIP supports a maximum of 16 ECMP paths. neighbor Define a neighbor router with which to exchange RIP information. Syntax neighbor ip-address To delete a neighbor setting, use the no neighbor ip-address command. Parameters Defaults ip-address Enter the IP address, in dotted decimal format, of a router with which to exchange information. Not configured.
PAGE 1295
network Enable RIP for a specified network. To enable RIP on all networks connected to the switch, use this command. Syntax network ip-address To disable RIP for a network, use the no network ip-address command. Parameters Defaults ip-address Specify an IP network address in dotted decimal format. You cannot specify a subnet. No RIP network is configured. Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1296
Parameters Defaults prefix-list-name Enter the name of an established Prefix list to determine which incoming routes are modified. offset Enter a number from zero (0) to 16 to be applied to the incoming route metric matching the access list specified. If you set an offset value to zero (0), no action is taken.
PAGE 1297
output-delay Set the interpacket delay of successive packets to the same neighbor. Syntax output-delay delay To return to the switch software defaults for interpacket delay, use the no output-delay command. Parameters Defaults delay Specify a number of milliseconds as the delay interval. The range is from 8 to 50. Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1298
● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number.
PAGE 1299
Parameters Defaults connected Enter the keyword connected to specify that information from active routes on interfaces is redistributed. static Enter the keyword static to specify that information from static routes is redistributed. Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 1300
level-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords level-2 to redistribute only IS-IS Level-2 routes. metric metric- (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric then a number as the metric value. The range is from 0 to 16. value route-map map- name Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of a configured route map. Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER RIP Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1301
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1302
Usage Information Example Related Commands Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. To enable RIP, assign a network address using the network command. DellEMC(conf)# router rip DellEMC(conf-router_rip)# ● network — enables RIP. ● exit — returns to CONFIGURATION mode. show config Display the changes you made to the RIP configuration.
PAGE 1303
router rip network 172.31.0.0 passive-interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1/1 DellEMC(conf-router_rip)# show ip rip database Display the routes that RIP learns. If the switch learned no RIP routes, no output is generated. Syntax Parameters show ip rip database [ip-address mask] ip-address (OPTIONAL) Specify an IP address in dotted decimal format to view RIP information on that network only. If you enter an IP address, also enter a mask for that IP address.
PAGE 1304
Example Field Description 150.100.0.0 redistributed Lists the routes learned through redistribution. 209.9.16.0/24... Lists the routes and the sources advertising those routes. DellEMC# show ip rip database Total number of routes in RIP database: 1624 204.250.54.0/24 [50/1] via 192.14.1.3, 00:00:12, TenGigabitEthernet 1/15/1 204.250.54.0/24 auto-summary 203.250.49.0/24 [50/1] via 192.13.1.3, 00:00:12, TenGigabitEthernet 1/14/1 203.250.49.0/24 auto-summary 210.250.40.0/24 [50/2] via 1.1.18.
PAGE 1305
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Example DellEMC# show running-config rip ! router rip distribute-list Test1 in distribute-list Test21 out network 10.0.0.0 passive-interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1/1 neighbor 20.20.20.
PAGE 1306
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.
PAGE 1307
Related Commands Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre- 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● ip rip receive version — sets the RIP version the interface receives.
PAGE 1308
46 Remote Monitoring (RMON) Dell EMC Networking OS RMON is based on IEEE standards, providing both 32-bit and 64-bit monitoring and long-term statistics collection.
PAGE 1309
interval Time, in seconds, the alarm monitors the MIB variables; this is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table. The range is from 5 to 3600 seconds. delta Enter the keyword delta to test the change between MIB variables. This is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table. absolute Enter the keyword absolute to test each MIB variable directly. This is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table.
PAGE 1310
rmon collection history Enable the RMON MIB history group of statistics collection on an interface. Syntax rmon collection history {controlEntry integer} [owner name] [buckets number] [interval seconds] To remove a specified RMON history group of statistics collection, use the no rmon collection history {controlEntry integer} command. Parameters controlEntry integer Defaults Enter the keyword controlEntry to specify the RMON group of statistics using a value.
PAGE 1311
rmon collection statistics Enable RMON MIB statistics collection on an interface. Syntax rmon collection statistics {controlEntry integer} [owner name] To remove RMON MIB statistics collection on an interface, use the no rmon collection statistics {controlEntry integer} command. Parameters controlEntry integer owner name Defaults Enter the keyword controlEntry to specify the RMON group of statistics using a value. Then enter an integer value from 1 to 65535 that identifies the RMON Statistic Table.
PAGE 1312
log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to generate an RMON event log. This option sets the eventType to either log or log-and-snmptrap in the RMON event table. The default is None. trap community (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword trap followed by the SNMP community string to generate SNMP traps for an RMON event entry. This option sets the eventType to either snmptrap or log-and-snmptrap in the RMON event table. In addition to the SNMP traps, this option also generates a syslog.
PAGE 1313
interval Time, in seconds, the alarm monitors the MIB variables; this is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table. The range is from 5 to 3600 seconds. delta Enter the keyword delta to test the change between MIB variables. This is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table. absolute Enter the keyword absolute to test each MIB variable directly. This is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table.
PAGE 1314
show rmon Display the RMON running status including the memory usage. Syntax show rmon Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 1315
brief Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON alarm table in an easy-to-read format. none Command Modes EXEC Command History Example (Index) Example (Brief) This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 1316
13 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 14 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 15 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 16 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 17 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 18 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 19 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 20 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 21 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 22 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 DellEMC# show rmon events Display the contents of the RMON event table. Syntax show rmon events [index] [brief] Parameters Defaults index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON event table in an easy-to-read format.
PAGE 1317
options DellEMC(conf)#do show rmon events RMON event entry 111 description: event type: none. event community: event last time sent: none event owner: event status: OK RMON event entry 112 description: event type: LOG. event community: event last time sent: none event owner: event status: OK RMON event entry 113 description: event type: SNMP TRAP. event community: private event last time sent: none event owner: event status: OK RMON event entry 114 description: event type: LOG and SNMP TRAP.
PAGE 1318
Parameters Defaults index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON High-Capacity alarm table in an easy-to-read format. none Command Modes EXEC Command History Example (Index) Example (Brief) 1318 This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 1319
show rmon history Display the contents of the RMON Ethernet history table. Syntax Parameters Defaults show rmon history [index] [brief] index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON Ethernet history table in an easy-to-read format none Command Modes EXEC Command History Example (Index) Example (Brief) This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1320
9001 134529054 9002 134529054 9003 134791198 9004 134791198 DellEMC# TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet 3/2/1 3/2/1 3/1/1 3/1/1 show rmon log Display the contents of the RMON log table. Syntax show rmon log [index] [brief] Parameters Defaults index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON log table in an easyto-read format.
PAGE 1321
Example (Brief) DellEMC# show rmon log br eventIndex description -----------------------------2 2 4 4 DellEMC# show rmon statistics Display the contents of RMON Ethernet statistics table. Syntax Parameters Defaults show rmon statistics [index] [brief] index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON Ethernet statistics table in an easy-to-read format.
PAGE 1322
CRC error: 0 under-size packets: 0 over-size packets: 0 fragment errors: 0 jabber errors: 0 collision: 0 64bytes packets: 0 65-127 bytes packets: 0 128-255 bytes packets: 0 256-511 bytes packets: 0 512-1023 bytes packets: 0 1024-1518 bytes packets: 0 owner: 1 status: OK HC packets received overflow: 0 HC packets received: 0 HC bytes received overflow: 0 HC bytes received: 0 HC 64bytes packets overflow: 0 HC 64bytes packets: 0 HC 65-127 bytes packets overflow: 0 HC 65-127 bytes packets:
PAGE 1323
47 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) The Dell EMC Networking OS implementation of rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) is based on the IEEE 802.1w standard spanning-tree protocol. The RSTP algorithm configures connectivity throughout a bridged local area network (LAN) that is comprised of LANs interconnected by bridges. Dell EMC Networking OS supports RSTP.
PAGE 1324
Related Commands Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● protocol spanning-tree rstp — enters rapid spanning tree mode. debug spanning-tree rstp Enable debugging of RSTP and view information on the protocol.
PAGE 1325
Example Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.
PAGE 1326
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. pre-7.7.1.0 Introduced. ● protocol spanning-tree rstp — enters SPANNING TREE mode on the switch. disable Disable RSTP globally on the system. Syntax disable To enable Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, use the no disable command. Defaults RSTP is disabled.
PAGE 1327
forward-delay Configure the amount of time the interface waits in the Listening State and the Learning State before transitioning to the Forwarding State. Syntax forward-delay seconds To return to the default setting, use the no forward-delay command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter the number of seconds that Dell EMC Networking OS waits before transitioning RSTP to the forwarding state. The range is from 4 to 30. The default is 15 seconds.
PAGE 1328
milli-second Defaults Enter the keywords milli-second to configure a hello time on the order of milliseconds. The range is from 50 to 950 milliseconds 2 seconds Command Modes CONFIGURATION RSTP (conf-rstp) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.
PAGE 1329
Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1330
Usage Information Example Related Commands Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. RSTP is not enabled when you enter RSTP mode. To enable RSTP globally on the system, use the no disable command from RSTP mode.
PAGE 1331
Example DellEMC(conf-rstp)# show config ! protocol spanning-tree rstp no disable bridge-priority 16384 show spanning-tree rstp Display the RSTP configuration. Syntax Parameters show spanning-tree rstp [brief] [guard] brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view a synopsis of the RSTP configuration information. guard (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword guard to display the type of guard enabled on an RSTP interface and the current port state.
PAGE 1332
Example (Brief) Field Description Instance RSTP instance. Sts Port state: root-inconsistent (INCON Root), forwarding (FWD), listening (LIS), blocking (BLK), disabled (DIS), or shut down (EDS Shut). Guard Type Types of STP guard configured (Root, Loop, or BPDU guard) DellEMC# show spanning-tree rstp brief Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 8192, Address 0001.e805.e306 Root Bridge hello time 4, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 16384, Address 0001.e801.
PAGE 1333
Example (Guard) DellEMC# show spanning-tree rstp guard Interface Name Instance Sts Guard type --------- -------- ------------------Te 1/1/1 0 INCON(Root) Rootguard Te 1/2/1 0 FWD Loopguard Te 1/3/1 0 BLK Bpduguard spanning-tree rstp Configure an RSTP interface with one of these settings: port cost, edge port with optional bridge port data unit (BPDU) guard, port priority, loop guard, or root guard.
PAGE 1334
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.4.2.1 Added support for the optional guard keyword on the C-Series, S-Series, and E-Series. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.
PAGE 1335
tc-flush-standard Enable the MAC address flushing after receiving every topology change notification. Syntax tc-flush-standard To disable, use the no tc-flush-standard command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-rstp) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1336
48 Security The commands in this chapter are available on Dell EMC Networking OS. For configuration details, see the Security section in the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide. NOTE: Dell EMC Networking OS implements LEAP with MSCHAP v2 supplicant. Topics: • • • • • • • • • • • • AAA Accounting Commands Authorization and Privilege Commands Obscure Password Commands Authentication and Password Commands RADIUS Commands TACACS+ Commands Port Authentication (802.
PAGE 1337
Defaults commands { level | role role-name } Enter the keyword commands then a privilege level for accounting of commands executed at that privilege level or enter the keyword role then the role name for accounting of commands executed by a user with that user role. name | default Enter one of the following: ● For name, enter a user-defined name of a list of accounting methods. ● For default, the default accounting methods used.
PAGE 1338
Example (TACACS+) DellEMC(conf)# aaa accounting exec default start-stop tacacs+ DellEMC(conf)# aaa accounting command 15 default start-stop tacacs+ DellEMC(conf)# aaa accounting command role secaadmin default start-stop tacacs+ Example (RADIUS) Related Commands DellEMC(conf)# aaa accounting dot1x default start-stop radius DellEMC(conf)# aaa accounting dot1x default stop-only radius ● ● ● ● enable password — changes the password for the enable command.
PAGE 1339
accounting Apply an accounting method list to terminal lines. Syntax Parameters Defaults accounting {exec | commands {level | role role-name} method-list exec Enter the keyword exec to apply an EXEC level accounting method list. commands { level | role role-name } Enter the keywords commands level to apply an EXEC and CONFIGURATION level accounting method list or enter the keyword role and then the role name for accounting of commands executed by a user with that user role.
PAGE 1340
Parameters Defaults group-name Enter the name of the RADIUS server group. none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 1341
Usage Information Example Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.5(0.1) Added support for roles on the Z9500. 9.5(0.0) Added support for roles on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, MXL. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 1342
Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1343
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1344
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. By default, the aaa authorization commands command configures the system to check both EXEC level and CONFIGURATION level commands.
PAGE 1345
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Added support for RADIUS. privilege level (CONFIGURATION mode) Change the access or privilege level of one or more commands. Syntax privilege mode {level level command | reset command} To delete access to a level and command, use the no privilege mode level level command command.
PAGE 1346
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. To define a password for the level to which you are assigning privilege or access, use the enable password command. privilege level (LINE mode) Change the access level for users on the terminal lines.
PAGE 1347
Obscure Password Commands To enable the obscure password, use the following commands. service obscure-passwords Enable the obscuring of passwords and keys. Syntax service obscure-passwords Enable the obscuring of passwords and keys, including RADIUS, TACACS+ keys, router authentication strings, VRRP authentication, use the service obscure-passwords command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1348
Authentication and Password Commands To manage access to the system, use the following the commands. aaa authentication enable Configure AAA Authentication method lists for user access to EXEC privilege mode (the “Enable” access). Syntax aaa authentication enable {default | method-list-name} method [... method2] To return to the default setting, use the no aaa authentication enable {default | method-list-name} method [... method2] command.
PAGE 1349
Usage Information Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. By default, the Enable password is used. If you configure aaa authentication enable default, Dell EMC Networking OS uses the methods defined for Enable access instead. Methods configured with the aaa authentication enable command are evaluated in the order they are configured.
PAGE 1350
Usage Information Version Description 9.11(0.0) Included a prompt to force the users to re-authenticate, when re-authentication is enabled. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0 Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.5(0.
PAGE 1351
To disable the re-authentication option, use the no aaa reauthenticate enable command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced this command.
PAGE 1352
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● line — applies an authentication method list to the designated terminal lines.
PAGE 1353
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1354
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON, S6000, S6000–ON, S5000, S4810, S4820T, S3048– ON, S4048–ON, MXL, FN IOM, C9010, S3100, and Z9100-ON. ● show running-config — views the current configuration. ● privilege level (CONFIGURATION mode) — controls access to the command modes within the switch.
PAGE 1355
enable secret Change the password for the enable command. Syntax enable secret [level level] [encryption-type] password To delete a password, use the no enable secret [encryption-type] password [level level] command. Parameters level level (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level then a number as the level of access. The range is from 1 to 15. encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 5 or 0 as the encryption type. Enter a 5 then a text string as the hidden password.
PAGE 1356
NOTE: The question mark (?) is not a supported character. Related Commands ● show running-config — views the current configuration. ● privilege level (CONFIGURATION mode) — controls access to the command modes within the switch. login authentication To configure authentication for console or remote access, apply an authentication method list. Syntax login authentication {method-list-name | default} To use the local user/password database for login authentication, use the no login authentication command.
PAGE 1357
● If you configure the default authentication list using the default keyword, the list applies it to all the local and remote connections globally, unless you have specified some another authentication list for a specific connection. ● If you configure an authentication lists other than default, you must apply those authentication lists to each connection. ● If you configure the aaa authentication login default command, the login authentication default command automatically is applied to all terminal lines.
PAGE 1358
Version Description pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information Dell EMC Networking OS prompts users for these passwords when the method for authentication or authorization used is "line". Related Commands ● ● ● ● enable password — sets the password for the enable command. login authentication — configures an authentication method to log in to the switch. service password-encryption — encrypts all passwords configured in Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 1359
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1360
Once you save the running-configuration, the secured CLI mode is enabled. If you do not want to enter the secured mode, do not save the running-configuration. Once saved, to disable the secured CLI mode, you need to manually edit the startup-configuration file and reboot the system. service password-encryption Encrypt all passwords configured in Dell EMC Networking OS. Syntax service password-encryption To store new passwords as clear text, use the no service password-encryption command.
PAGE 1361
show privilege View your access level. Syntax show privilege Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON.
PAGE 1362
Command History Usage Information Example 1362 Security This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1363
Related Commands ● username — enables a user. timeout login response Specify how long the software waits for the login input (for example, the user name and password) before timing out. Syntax timeout login response seconds To return to the default values, use the no timeout login response command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter a number of seconds the software waits before logging you out. The range is: ● VTY — range is from 1 to 30 seconds, the default is 30 seconds.
PAGE 1364
username Establish an authentication system based on user names. Syntax username name [access-class access-list-name] [nopassword | {password | secret | sha256-password} [encryption-type] password [dynamic-salt]] [privilege level] [role role-name] If you do not want a specific user to enter a password, use the nopassword option. To delete authentication for a user, use the no username name command. Parameters name Enter a text string for the name of the user up to 63 characters.
PAGE 1365
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Added support for the sha256-password option for S3100, S3048–ON, S4048– ON, S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, Z9100–ON, MXL, and Z9500. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.5(0.0) Added support for roles on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, MXL.
PAGE 1366
Parameters Defaults pap Enter the keyword pap to use the Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) for RADIUS authentication. This protocol uses the username and password attributes in the access-request message sent to the RADIUS server. mschapv2 Enter the keyword mschapv2 to use the Microsoft Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (MS-CHAPv2) for RADIUS authentication.
PAGE 1367
Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the S4810 and S4820T. 9.13(0.0) Introduced on the C9010, S3100, S3048–ON, S4048T-ON, S4048–ON, S5000, S6010–ON, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, S6000, Z9100–ON, Z9500, FM-IOM, and MXL. client-key Configures global shared key for the trusted DAC clients. Syntax client—key [encryption-type] key To remove the shared key configuration, enter the no client-key command. Defaults Parameters None.
PAGE 1368
Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the S4810 and S4820T. 9.13(0.0) Introduced on the C9010, S3100, S3048–ON, S4048T-ON, S4048–ON, S5000, S6010–ON, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, S6000, Z9100–ON, Z9500, FN-IOM, and MXL. coa-disable-port Configure NAS to reject disable-port requests from DAC. Syntax coa-disable-port To undo this configuration, enter the no coa-disable-port command. Defaults Enabled.
PAGE 1369
debug radius View RADIUS transactions to assist with troubleshooting. Syntax debug radius To disable debugging of RADIUS, use the no debug radius command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1370
Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the S4810 and S4820T. 9.13(0.0) Introduced on the C9010, S3100, S3048–ON, S4048T-ON, S4048–ON, S5000, S6010–ON, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, S6000, Z9100–ON, Z9500, FN-IOM, and MXL. disconnect-user Configure NAS to allow or reject DM requests corresponding to AAA users-sessions coming from the DAC. Syntax disconnect-user To undo this configuration, enter the no disconnect-user command. Defaults Enabled.
PAGE 1371
ip radius source-interface Specify an interface’s IP address as the source IP address for RADIUS connections. Syntax ip radius source-interface interface To delete a source interface, use the no ip radius source-interface command. Parameters Defaults interface Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 1372
port Configures NAS port number to accept CoA or DM requests. Syntax port port-number To remove the NAS port configuration, enter the no port command. Defaults Parameters 3799 port-number Enter the NAS port number to accept CoA and DM requests. The range is from 1 to 65535. Command Modes ● CONF-DYNAMIC-AUTH Usage Information ● Optionally specify dynamic authorization port number. Default port is 3799. Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1373
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. radius-server group Creates or deletes a group of radius servers. Syntax Parameters Defaults radius-server group group-name group-name Enter the group name that denotes the group of RADIUS servers. Not configured.
PAGE 1374
radius-server host Configure a RADIUS server host. Syntax radius-server host {hostname | ipv4-address | ipv6-address} [auth-port port-number] [acct-port port-number] [retransmit retries] [timeout seconds] [key [encryption-type] key] Parameters hostname Enter the name of the RADIUS server host. ipv4-address | ipv6-address Enter the IPv4 address (A.B.C.D) or IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X) of the RADIUS server host. auth-port port- (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords auth-port then a number as the port number.
PAGE 1375
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.4.1.0 Added support for IPv6. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Authentication key length increased to 42 characters. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1376
Parameters Defaults vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF to associate a RADIUS server group with that VRF. interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 1377
DellEMC(conf)#radius-server group group2 DellEMC(conf-radius-group)#radius-server vrf default radius-server key Configure a key for all RADIUS communications between the switch and the RADIUS host server. Syntax radius-server key [encryption-type] key To delete a password, use the no radius-server key command. Parameters Defaults encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter either zero (0) or 7 as the encryption type for the key entered.
PAGE 1378
Related Commands ● radius-server host — configures a RADIUS host. radius-server retransmit Configure the number of times the switch attempts to connect with the configured RADIUS host server before declaring the RADIUS host server unreachable. Syntax radius-server retransmit retries To configure zero retransmit attempts, use the no radius-server retransmit command. To return to the default setting, use the radius-server retransmit 3 command.
PAGE 1379
Parameters Defaults seconds Enter the number of seconds between an unsuccessful attempt and the Dell EMC Networking OS times out. The range is from zero (0) to 1000 seconds. The default is 5 seconds. 5 seconds Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1380
Version Description 9.14(1.0) Introduced on the S4810 and S4820T. 9.13(0.0) Introduced on the C9010, S3100, S3048–ON, S4048T-ON, S4048–ON, S5000, S6010–ON, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, S6000, Z9100–ON, Z9500, FN-IOM, and MXL. replay-protection-window Configure replay protection window period to drop the duplicate packets. Syntax replay-protection-window minutes To undo the configuration, enter the no replay-protection-window command. Defaults Parameters 5 Minutes.
PAGE 1381
TACACS+ Commands Dell EMC Networking OS supports TACACS+ as an alternate method for login authentication. tacacs-server group Creates a group of TACACS servers to be used for Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting.. Syntax aaa tacacsgroup group-name To delete a group of TACACS servers, use the no tacacs-server group group-name command . Parameters Defaults group-name Enter the name of the TACACS server group. Not configured.
PAGE 1382
Defaults Disabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1383
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
PAGE 1384
Usage Information Example Related Commands Version Description 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series and Z-Series. You can associate a TACACS server group with a VRF. DellEMC(conf)# tacacs-server group group1 DellEMC(conf-tacacs-group)# tacacs-server host 1.1.1.1 key secret DellEMC(conf-tacacs-group)# tacacs-server host 2.2.2.
PAGE 1385
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.4.1.0 Added support for IPv6. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Authentication key length increased to 42 characters. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 1386
key Defaults Enter a text string, up to 42 characters long, as the clear text password. Leading spaces are ignored. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 1387
● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. ● For a Null interface, enter the keyword null then the Null interface number. ● For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Defaults Not configured.
PAGE 1388
Important Points to Remember Dell EMC Networking OS limits network access for certain users by using VLAN assignments. 802.1X with VLAN assignment has these characteristics when configured on the switch and the RADIUS server. ● 802.1X is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. ● 802.1X is not supported on the LAG or the channel members of a LAG. ● If no VLAN is supplied by the RADIUS server or if 802.1X authorization is disabled, the port is configured in its access VLAN after successful authentication.
PAGE 1389
Related Commands ● dot1x authentication (Interface) — enable dot1x on an interface. dot1x authentication (Interface) Enable dot1x on an interface; dot1x must be enabled both globally and at the interface level. Syntax dot1x authentication To disable dot1x on an interface, use the no dot1x authentication command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1390
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1391
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. dot1x guest-vlan Configure a guest VLAN for limited access users or for devices that are not 802.1X capable. Syntax dot1x guest-vlan vlan-id To disable the guest VLAN, use the no dot1x guest-vlan vlan-id command.
PAGE 1392
NOTE: The layer 3 portion of guest VLAN and authentication fail VLANs can be created regardless if the VLAN is assigned to an interface or not. After an interface is assigned a guest VLAN (which has an IP address), routing through the guest VLAN is the same as any other traffic. However, the interface may join/leave a VLAN dynamically. Related Commands ● dot1x auth-fail-vlan — configures a VLAN for authentication failures. ● dot1x reauthentication — enables periodic re-authentication.
PAGE 1393
Defaults 2 Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1394
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The authenticator performs authentication only when port-control is set to auto.
PAGE 1395
dot1x reauthentication Enable periodic re-authentication of the client. Syntax dot1x reauthentication [interval seconds] To disable periodic re-authentication, use the no dot1x reauthentication command. Parameters Defaults interval seconds (Optional) Enter the keyword interval then the interval time, in seconds, after which re-authentication is initiated. The range is from 1 to 31536000 (1 year). The default is3600 (1 hour).
PAGE 1396
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 1397
Version Description 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. dot1x supplicant-timeout Configure the amount of time after which exchanges with the supplicant time-out. Syntax dot1x supplicant-timeout seconds To return to the default, use theno dot1x supplicant-timeout command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter a time-out value in seconds.
PAGE 1398
Parameters Defaults seconds Enter the interval time, in seconds, that EAPOL PDUs are transmitted. The range is from 1 to 65535 (1 year). The default is 30. 30 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1399
Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1400
Auth-Fail VLAN: Auth-Fail VLAN id: Auth-Fail Max-Attempts: Mac-Auth-Bypass: Mac-Auth-Bypass Only: Tx Period: Quiet Period: ReAuth Max: Supplicant Timeout: Server Timeout: Re-Auth Interval: Max-EAP-Req: Host Mode: Auth PAE State: Backend State: DellEMC# Disable NONE NONE Disable Disable 30 seconds 60 seconds 2 30 seconds 30 seconds 3600 seconds 2 SINGLE_HOST Initialize Initialize SSH and SCP Commands Dell EMC Networking OS supports secure shell (SSH) protocol version 2.0.
PAGE 1401
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.0 Added support for FIPS mode on the S4810. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. The host keys are required for key-exchange by the SSH server.
PAGE 1402
debug ip ssh Enables collecting SSH debug information. Syntax debug ip ssh {client | server} To disable debugging, use the no debug ip ssh {client | server} command. Parameters Defaults client Enter the keyword client to enable collecting debug information on the client. server Enter the keyword server to enable collecting debug information on the server. Disabled on both client and server. Command Modes EXEC Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1403
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1404
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1405
● ● ● ● ● Defaults aes192-ctr aes192-cbc aes128-ctr aes128-cbc 3des-cbc The default list of ciphers is in the order as shown below: ● aes256-ctr ● aes256-cbc ● aes192-ctr ● aes192-cbc ● aes128-ctr ● aes128-cbc ● 3des-cbc Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 1406
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1407
ip ssh hostbased-authentication Enable hostbased-authentication for the SSHv2 server. Syntax ip ssh hostbased-authentication enable To disable hostbased-authentication for SSHv2 server, use the no ip ssh hostbasedauthentication enable command. Parameters Defaults enable Enter the keyword enable to enable hostbased-authentication for SSHv2 server. Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1408
Parameters mac mac-list Enter the keyword mac then a space-delimited list of message authentication code (MAC) algorithms supported by the SSH client. The following MAC algorithms are available.
PAGE 1409
Defaults Enabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.
PAGE 1410
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, MXL ip ssh pub-key-file Specify the file used for host-based authentication.
PAGE 1411
The file contains the OpenSSH-compatible public keys of the host for which host-based authentication is allowed. An example known host file format: poclab4,123.12.1.123 ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEAox/ QQp8xYhzOxn07yh4VGPAoUfgKoieTHO9G4sNV+ui+DWEc3cgYAcU5Lai1MU2ODrzhCwyDNp05tK BU3t ReG1o8AxLi6+S4hyEMqHzkzBFNVqHzpQc+Rs4p2urzV0F4pRKnaXdHf3Lk4D460HZRhhVrxqeNx PDpEn WIMPJi0ds= ashwani@poclab4 NOTE: For rhostfile and pub-key-file, the administrator must FTP the file to the chassis.
PAGE 1412
Example Usage Information DellEMC#conf DellEMC(conf)# ip ssh rhostsfile flash://shosts DellEMC(conf)# This command specifies the rhost file used for host-based authentication. This creates/ file overwrites the flash:/ADMIN_DIR/ssh/shosts file and deletes the user-specified file. Even though this command is a global configuration command, it does not appear in the running configuration because you only need to run this command once.
PAGE 1413
ip ssh server Syntax NOTE: Some of the parameters in this command require licensing to access. For more information, contact your Dell EMC Networking representative. ip ssh server {ciphers cipher-list} {enable | port port-number} [kex keyexchange-algorithm] [mac hmac-algorithm][version 2] To disable SSH server functions, use the no ip ssh server {ciphers cipher-list} {enable | port port-number} [kex key-exchange-algorithm] [mac hmac-algorithm] command.
PAGE 1414
kex key-exchangealgorithm Enter the keyword kex and then a space-delimited list of key exchange algorithms supported by the SSH server. The following key exchange algorithms are available: ● diffie-hellman-group-exchange-sha1 ● diffie-hellman-group1-sha1 ● diffie-hellman-group14-sha1 When FIPS is enabled, the default key-exchange-algorithm is diffie-hellmangroup14-sha1.
PAGE 1415
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. This command enables the SSH server and begins listening on a port. If a port is not specified, listening is on SSH default port 22. NOTE: Starting with Dell EMC Networking OS Release 9.2(0.
PAGE 1416
Defaults vrf management Enter the keyword vrf followed by the keyword management to configure an SSH server on a management VRF. vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf followed by the VRF name to configure an SSH server on that VRF. None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 1417
● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number.
PAGE 1418
Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON.
PAGE 1419
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. This command is useful if the remote SSH client implements Strict Host Key Checking.
PAGE 1420
Example Related Commands Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC# show ip ssh SSH server : enabled. SSH server version : v2. SSH server vrf : default.
PAGE 1421
Usage Information Example Related Commands Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. This command displays the contents of the flash://ADMIN_DIRssh/knownhosts file. DellEMC# show ip ssh client-pub-keys 4.8.1.
PAGE 1422
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. This command displays the contents of the flash:/ADMIN_DIR/ssh/authorizedkeys.username file.
PAGE 1423
-c encryption cipher Enable the “FIPS mode enable", this mode will support the v2 client. "no fips mode enable"(disable) will support v1 & v2 client. This comment is applicable for both ciphers & HMAC algorithms: ● 3des-cbc: Force ssh to use 3des-cbc encryption cipher.
PAGE 1424
Version Description ● ● ● ● ● Usage Information Example aes128-ctr aes192-ctr aes256-ctr hmac-sha2-256 hmac-sha2-256-96 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.12.0 Added support for the -c and -m parameters on the S4810. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Added IPv6 support. Introduced on the C-Series. pre-6.1.1.
PAGE 1425
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series.
PAGE 1426
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. ip dhcp snooping Enable DHCP Snooping globally. Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 1427
Defaults vlan-id vlan-id Enter the keywords vlan-id then the VLAN to which the host belongs. The range is from 2 to 4094. ip ip-address Enter the keyword ip then the IP address that the server is leasing. interface type Enter the keyword interface then the type of interface to which the host is connected. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 1428
ip dhcp snooping database renew Renew the binding table. Syntax ip dhcp snooping database renew Defaults none Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 1429
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. ip dhcp source-address-validation Enable IP source guard. Syntax [no] ip dhcp source-address-validation Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1430
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1431
Related Commands Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.8.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. ● clear ip dhcp snooping — clear the contents of the DHCP binding table. Role-Based Access Control Commands With Role-Based Access Control (RBAC), access and authorization is controlled based on a user’s role.
PAGE 1432
Usage Information By default, access to commands are determined by the user’s role (if defined) or by the user’s privilege level. If the aaa authorization role-only command is enabled, then only the user’s role is used. Before you enable role-based only AAA authorization: 1. Locally define a system administrator user role.This will give you access to login with full permissions even if network connectivity to remote authentication servers is not available. 2. Configure login authentication on the console.
PAGE 1433
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, and MXL. ● userrole — creates user roles. show role Display information on permissions assigned to a command, including user role and/or permission level.
PAGE 1434
DellEMC# show role mode configure management route Role access: netadmin, sysadmin DellEMC# show role mode configure management crypto-policy Role access: secadmin, sysadmin Related Commands ● userrole — create user roles. show userroles Display information on all defined user roles.
PAGE 1435
Related Commands ● userrole — create user roles. userrole Create user roles for the role-based security model. Syntax userrole name inherit existing-role-name To delete a role name, use the no userrole name command. Note that the reserved role names may not be deleted. Parameters name Enter a text string for the name of the user up to 63 characters. It cannot be one of the system defined roles (sysadmin, secadmin, netadmin, netoperator).
PAGE 1436
NOTE: If you inherit a user role, you cannot modify or delete the inheritance. If you want to change or remove the inheritance, delete the user role and create it again. If the user role is in use, you cannot delete the user role. role mode { { { addrole | deleterole } role-name } | reset } command – Modifies (adds or deletes) command permissions for newly created user roles and system defined roles.
PAGE 1437
Table 8.
PAGE 1438
System Security Commands The following section lists the system security commands. boot-access password Set a password for the boot loader. Syntax boot-access password [encryption-type] boot-password To remove the GRUB access password, use the no boot-access password command. Parameters encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter an encryption type for the boot password. ● 0 directs the system to store the password as clear text. ● 7 directs the system to store the password with a dynamic salt.
PAGE 1439
generate hash Generate a hash checksum for the given file or the startup configuration using the MD5, SHA1, or SHA256 algorithm. Syntax Parameters Defaults generate hash {md5 | sha1 | sha256} {flash://filename | startup-config} md5 | sha1 | sha256 Enter the keyword md5, sha1, or sha256 to generate . flash:// filename Enter the keyword flash: and enter the filename to generate the hash checksum for any file in the flash drive using the MD5, SHA1, or SHA256 algorithm.
PAGE 1440
Usage Information Version Description 9.13(0.0) Introduced on the S3100 series, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, Z9100–ON, Z9500, C9010, MXL, and FN-IOM. If you configure the secure-cli command on the system, the Dell EMC Networking OS resets any previously-configured root access password to the default root password without displaying any warning message.
PAGE 1441
Parameters Defaults system-image {A: Enter the keyword system-image and A: or B:, depending on where the image | B:} is stored and then the hash value that is present on the iSupport page for your image. startup-config Enter the keyword startup-config and then the hash value for the startup configuration. You can get the hash value for the startup configuration using the generate hash command. hash value Enter the MD5, SHA1, or SHA256 hash.
PAGE 1442
49 Service Provider Bridging Service provider bridging is composed of virtual local area network (VLAN) Stacking, Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling, and Provider Backbone Bridging as described in the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide Service Provider Bridging section. This section includes command line information (CLI) for the Dell EMC Networking OS Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (L2PT). L2PT enables protocols to tunnel through an 802.1q tunnel. Dell EMC Networking OS supports L2PT on Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 1443
● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. ● For a port-channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then the port-channel ID. Defaults in | out | both Enter the keyword in, out, or both to debug incoming interfaces, outgoing interfaces, or both incoming and outgoing interfaces. vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID.
PAGE 1444
Defaults none Command Modes CONF-IF-VLAN Command History Example Related Command This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON.
PAGE 1445
Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100-ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series, and S-Series. 7.4.1.
PAGE 1446
Usage Information Version Description 7.4.1.0 Introduced Dell EMC Networking OS must have the default CAM profile with the default microcode before you enable L2PT. protocol-tunnel rate-limit Enable traffic rate limiting per box. Syntax protocol-tunnel rate-limit rate To reset the rate limit to the default, use the no protocol-tunnel rate-limit rate command. Parameters Defaults rate Enter the rate in frames per second. The range is from 75 to 3000. The default is 75. 75 frames per second.
PAGE 1447
Related Commands ● show protocol-tunnel — displays tunneling information for all VLANs. ● show running-config — displays the current configuration. show protocol-tunnel Display protocol tunnel information for all or a specified VLAN-Stack VLAN. Syntax Parameters Defaults show protocol-tunnel [vlan vlan-id] vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID to display information for the one VLAN. The range is from 1 to 4094.
PAGE 1448
50 sFlow The Dell EMC Networking OS supports sFlow commands. The Dell EMC Networking OS sFlow monitoring system includes an sFlow Agent and an sFlow Collector. ● The sFlow Agent combines the flow samples and interface counters into sFlow datagrams and forwards them to the sFlow Collector. ● The sFlow Collector analyses the sFlow Datagrams received from the different devices and produces a network-wide view of traffic flows.
PAGE 1449
sflow collector Configure a collector device to which sFlow datagrams are forwarded. Syntax sflow collector {ip-address | ipv6-address} agent-addr {ip-address | ipv6address} [number [max-datagram-size number]] | [max-datagram-size number] [vrf management] To delete a configured collector, use the no sflow collector {ip-address | ipv6address} agent-addr {ipv4-address | ipv6-address} [number [max-datagramsize number]] | [max-datagram-size number] [vrf management] command.
PAGE 1450
Usage Information Version Description 8.2.1.0 Introduced S-Series Stacking. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.5.1.0 Expanded the no form of the command to mirror the syntax used to configure. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. You can configure up to two sFlow collectors (IPv4 or IPv6). If two collectors are configured, traffic samples are sent to both.
PAGE 1451
Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced S-Series Stacking. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information sFlow is disabled by default. In addition to this command, sFlow needs to be enable on individual interfaces where sFlow sampling is desired.
PAGE 1452
sflow extended-switch enable Enable packing information on a switch only. Syntax sflow extended-switch enable To disable packing information, use the no sflow extended-switch [enable] command. Parameters Defaults enable Enter the keyword enable to enable global extended information. Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1453
Parameters Defaults extended Enter the keyword extended to copy 256 bytes from the sample packets to sFlow datagram. 128 bytes Command Modes CONFIGURATION INTERFACE Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100-ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 1454
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on S-Series Stacking. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1455
Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on S-Series Stacking. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information This command sets the counter polling interval for an interface. Related Commands ● sflow polling-interval (Global) — globally sets the polling interval. sflow sample-rate (Global) Change the global default sampling rate.
PAGE 1456
Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information Sample-rate is the average number of packets skipped before the sample is taken. This command changes the global default sampling rate. You can configure an interface to use a different sampling rate than the global sampling rate. If the value entered is not a correct power of 2, the command generates an error message with the previous and next power of 2 value.
PAGE 1457
Usage Information This command changes the sampling rate for an interface. By default, the sampling rate of an interface is set to the same value as the current global default sampling rate. If the value entered is not a correct power of 2, the command generates an error message with the previous and next power-of-2 value. Select one of these two number and re-enter the command. Related Commands ● sflow sample-rate (Global) — changes the sampling rate globally.
PAGE 1458
Usage Information Example Version Description 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The dropEvent counter (sFlow samples dropped due to sub-sampling) shown in the following example always displays a value of zero.
PAGE 1459
51 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) and Syslog This section contains commands to configure and monitor the simple network management protocol (SNMP) v1/v2/v3 and Syslog. Both features are supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • • SNMP Commands Syslog Commands SNMP Commands The following SNMP commands are available in the Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 1460
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 1461
Example Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.
PAGE 1462
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information Example Related Commands The following Example displays a group named ngroup.
PAGE 1463
RFC1213-MIB EtherLike-MIB SNMP-FRAMEWORK-MIB RADIUS-AUTH-CLIENT-MIB SNMP-MPD-MIB RMON-MIB --More— 1.3.6.1.2.1.35 1.3.6.1.6.3.10 1.3.6.1.2.1.67.1.2 1.3.6.1.6.3.11 1.3.6.1.2.1.16 show snmp supported-traps Display the list of SNMP traps supported by the platform. Syntax show snmp supported-traps Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1464
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 1465
snmp context Configure SNMPv3 context name to map multiple OSPFv3 VRF instances. Syntax snmp context {context-name} To clear snmp context, use the no snmp context {context-name} command. Parameters Defaults context-name Enter the SNMP context name. The maximum length is 32 alphanumeric characters. None. Command Modes IPv6 ROUTER OSPF Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1466
Example Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. unknown Introduced on the E-Series. DellEMC#config!------command run on host connected to switch: --------------! > snmpwalk -c public 10.10.10.130 .1.3.6.1.2.1.31 | grep -i alias | more IF-MIB::ifAlias.
PAGE 1467
Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.
PAGE 1468
DellEMC(config-std-nacl)#seq 10 deny any count ! DellEMC(conf)# snmp-server community guest ro snmp-ro-acl DellEMC(conf)# Related Commands ● ip access-list standard — names (or selects) a standard access list to filter based on IP address. ● ipv6 access-list — configures an access list based on IPv6 addresses or protocols. ● show running-config — displays the current SNMP configuration and defaults. snmp-server contact Configure contact information for troubleshooting this SNMP node.
PAGE 1469
To disable traps, use the no snmp-server enable traps [notification-type] [notification-option] command. Parameters notification-type Enter the type of notification from the following list: ● bgp — Enable BGP state change traps. ● config — Enable copy-config trap. ● ecmp — Enable ECMP traps. ● entity — Enable entity change traps. ● envmon — Enable SNMP environmental monitor traps. ● ets — Enable ETS traps. ● fips — Enable FIP Snooping state change traps. ● isis — Enable ISIS adjacency change traps.
PAGE 1470
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.1(0.0) Added support for copy-config and ECMP traps. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.0 Added support for VRRP traps. 7.6.1.0 Added support for STP and xSTP traps.
PAGE 1471
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1472
● v1v2creadg — maps to a community/security-name with ro permissions. ● 1v2cwriteg — maps to a community/security-name rw permissions. 1 | 2c | 3 (OPTIONAL) Enter the security model version number (1, 2c, or 3): ● 1 is the least secure version. ● 3 is the most secure of the security modes. ● 2c allows transmission of informs and counter 64, which allows for integers twice the width of what is normally allowed. The default is 1.
PAGE 1473
Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information The following example specifies the group named harig as a version 3 user requiring both authentication and encryption and read access limited to the read named rview. NOTE: The number of configurable groups is limited to 16 groups.
PAGE 1474
auth (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword auth to specify authentication of a packet without encryption. noauth (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword noauth to specify no authentication of a packet. priv (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword priv to specify both authentication and then scrambling of the packet. communitystring Enter a text string (up to 20 characters long) as the name of the SNMP community. NOTE: For version 1 and version 2c security models, this string represents the name of the SNMP community.
PAGE 1475
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.1(0.0) Added support for config and ecmp traps. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.0 Added support for VRRP traps. 7.6.1.0 Added support for STP and xSTP notification types. Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 1476
snmp-server location Configure the location of the SNMP server. Syntax snmp-server location text To delete the SNMP location, use the no snmp-server location command. Parameters Defaults text Enter an alpha-numeric text string, up to 55 characters long. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
PAGE 1477
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 1478
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 1479
vrf vrf-name Enter the keywords vrf and then the name of the VRF this is used to connect to the SNMP server. NOTE: Use this attribute to specify a VRF name that is used to connect to the remote host. If no VRF is specified, then the default VRF is used. udp-port port- Enter the keywords udp-port then the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) port number on the remote device. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is 162.
PAGE 1480
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.6.(0.0) Added aes 128 encryption algorithm parameter. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series.
PAGE 1481
SNMPv3 define two authentication hash algorithms, namely, HMAC-MD5-96 and HMAC-SHA1-96. These are the full forms or editions of the truncated versions, namely, HMAC-MD5 and HMAC-SHA1 authentication algorithms.
PAGE 1482
Example Related Commands DellEMC# snmp-server user privuser v3group v3 encrypted auth md5 9fc53d9d908118b2804fe80e3ba8763d priv aes128 d0452401a8c3ce42804fe80e3ba8763d ● show snmp user — Displays the information configured on each SNMP user name. snmp-server view Configure an SNMPv3 view. Syntax snmp-server view view-name oid-tree {included | excluded} To remove an SNMPv3 view, use the no snmp-server view view-name oid-tree {included | excluded} command.
PAGE 1483
Example Related Commands DellEMC# conf DellEMC#(conf) snmp-server view rview 1.3.6.1 included ● show running-config snmp — displays the SNMP running configuration. snmp-server vrf Configures an SNMP agent to bind to a specific VRF. Syntax snmp-server vrf vrf-name To undo the SNMP agent configuration, use the no snmp-server vrf vrf-name command. Parameters Defaults vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF to associate an SNMP agent with that VRF. Not Enabled.
PAGE 1484
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 8.3.19.
PAGE 1485
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 1486
default logging buffered Return to the default setting for messages logged to the internal buffer. Syntax default logging buffered Defaults size = 40960; level = 7 or debugging Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1487
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Related Commands ● logging console — set the logging console parameters.
PAGE 1488
Related Commands ● logging monitor — set the logging monitor parameters. ● terminal monitor — send system messages to the terminal/monitor. default logging trap Return to the default settings for logging messages to the Syslog servers. Syntax default logging trap Defaults level = 6 or informational Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1489
Defaults hostname Enter the name of a host already configured and recognized by the switch. udp Enter the keyword udp to enable transmission of log message over UDP followed by port number. The default port is 514 tcp Enter the keyword tcp to enable transmission of log message over TCP followed by port number. vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF to enable the logging process in VRF mode.
PAGE 1490
logging buffered Enable logging and specify which messages are logged to an internal buffer. By default, all messages are logged to the internal buffer. Syntax logging buffered [level] [size] To return to the default values, use the default logging buffered command. To disable logging stored to an internal buffer, use the no logging buffered command.
PAGE 1491
logging console Specify which messages are logged to the console. Syntax logging console [level] To return to the default values, use the default logging console command. To disable logging to the console, use the no logging console command. Parameters Defaults level (OPTIONAL) Indicate a value from 0 to 7 or enter one of the following parameters: emergencies, alerts, critical, errors, warnings, notifications, informational, or debugging. The default is 7 or debugging.
PAGE 1492
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1493
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● local7 (local use) lpr (line printer system) mail (mail system) news (USENET news) sys9 (system use) sys10 (system use) sys11 (system use) sys12 (system use) sys13 (system use) sys14 (system use) syslog (Syslog process) user (user process) uucp (Unix to Unix copy process) The default is local7. Defaults local7 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1494
To return to the default values, use the no logging history command. Parameters Defaults level Indicate a value from 0 to 7 or enter one of the following equivalent words: emergencies, alerts, critical, errors, warnings, notifications, informational, or debugging. The default is 4 or warnings. warnings or 4 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1495
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
PAGE 1496
Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 1497
Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Usage Information When you use the no logging on command, messages are logged only to the console. Related Commands ● ● ● ● logging logging logging logging — enable logging to the Syslog server. buffered — set the logging buffered parameters. console — set the logging console parameters. monitor — set the logging parameters for the terminal connections.
PAGE 1498
Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.5.1.0 Added support for 4-port 40G line cards on the E-Series. 7.6.1.
PAGE 1499
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.
PAGE 1500
Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series, S55. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series.
PAGE 1501
● 0 – Displays syslog messages format as described in RFC 3164, The BSD syslog Protocol ● 1 – Displays SYSLOG message format as described in RFC 5424, The Syslog Protocol Example DellEMC(conf)#logging version ? <0-1> Select syslog version (default = 0) DellEMC(conf)#logging version 1 show logging auditlog Displays an audit log. Syntax show logging auditlog Defaults None Command Modes EXEC Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1502
summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a table showing the number of messages per type and per slot. Slots *7* and *8* represent RPMs. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.
PAGE 1503
Oct 8 09:25:38: %RPM1:RP1 Oct 8 09:26:25: %RPM1:RP1 1.1.11.2 closed. Neighbor Oct 8 09:26:25: %RPM1:RP1 1.1.14.2 closed. Neighbor --More-Example (History) %BGP-5-ADJCHANGE: Neighbor 192.200.14.
PAGE 1504
1:Task(tUsrRoot): [ 338]PSU FanCtrl Drv ERR: ssnDrvPsuFanCtrlInit : 118 - Cannot enable psu -127228353 2:Task(tUsrRoot): [ 6876]EEPROM LIB ERR: f10EepromBlkRead@psu0eeprom: Main block failed checksum calulated checksum 0x1d actual chksum 0x0 3:Task(tUsrRoot): [ 61]EEPROM LIB ERR: f10EepromBlkRead@psu0eeprom: Main block failed errcode 6 4:Task(tUsrRoot): [ 89]EEPROM LIB ERR: f10EepromBlkRead@psu0eeprom: Redundant block failed checksum calulated checksum 0xc9a6 actual chksum 0x0 5:Task(tUsrRoot): [ 57]EEPROM
PAGE 1505
Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. E-Series legacy command Related Commands ● logging monitor — set the logging parameters on the monitor/terminal.
PAGE 1506
52 SNMP Traps This section lists the traps sent by the Dell EMC Networking OS. Each trap is listed by the fields Trap Type, Trap Name, Object Name, and MIB file. Table 9. SNMP Trap List TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation 1 TR_COLD_START 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1 COLDSTART rfc3418.mib SNMP COLD_START trap sent. 2 TR_WARM_START 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.2 WARMSTART rfc3418.mib SNMP WARM_START trap sent. 3 TR_LINK_DOWN 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3 LINKDOWN rfc3418.
PAGE 1507
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation 19 TR_CHM_RPM_U P 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.5 dellNetSysAlarmRp mUp DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib The primary RPM generate this trap when the primary RPM or the secondary RPM is up and running. 20 TR_CHM_RPM_D OWN 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.6 dellNetSysAlarmRp mDown DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.
PAGE 1508
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation the minor threshold. 28 TR_CHM_FANTRA 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 Y_BAD_CLR 6.1.5.1.14 dellNetSysAlarmFa nTrayClear DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib The driver/agent generate this trap when a fan tray is now operational. 29 TR_CHM_MIN_FA NBAD_CLR 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.15 dellNetSysAlarmMi norFanBadClear DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.
PAGE 1509
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME 42 TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation TR_STP_NEW_RO 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.1 OT newRoot BRIDGE-MIB.mib 802.1d new root trap support. 43 TR_STP_TOPOLO GY_CHANGE topologyChange BRIDGE-MIB.mib 802.1d topology change trap support. 44 TR_MSTP_NEW_R 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.20. OOT_BRIDGE 2.0.1 Not Available Not Available MSTP Not Supporting 45 TR_MSTP_NEW_R 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.20. OOT_PORT 2.0.
PAGE 1510
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation type. Implementation of this trap is optional 55 TR_VRRPV3_LEAV 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 E_MASTER 6.1.5.1.44 dellNetSysAlarmVrr DELLpGoMaster NETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib The VRRP generate this trap when it become a backup 56 TR_VRRPV3_GIVE UP_MASTER dellNetSysAlarmVrr DELLpGiveupMaster NETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.
PAGE 1511
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation MEP has a persistent defect, it may or may not generate a Fault Alarm to warn the system administrator of the problem, as controlled by the MEP Fault Notification Generator State Machine and associated Managed Objects. If a defect with a higher priority is raised after a Fault Alarm has been issued, another Fault Alarm is issued.
PAGE 1512
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation index into the MEP table (dot1agCfmMepTa ble). 62 TR_EOAM_THRSH 1.3.6.1.2.1.158.0.1 LD_EVT dot3OamThreshold Event stdeoam.mib "A dot3OamThreshold Event notification is sent when a local or remote threshold crossing event is detected.
PAGE 1513
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation detected by the reception of an Ethernet OAM Event Notification OAMPDU that indicates a nonthreshold crossing event. This notification should not be sent more than once per second. The OAM entity can be derived from extracting the ifIndex from the variable bindings. The objects in the notification correspond to the values in a row instance of the dot3OamEventLog Table.
PAGE 1514
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation 68 TR_FIPS_ENODE_ DROP 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 2.4.0.5 dellNetENodeDrop pedTrap DELLNETWORKINGFIPSNOOPINGMIB.mib This trap is sent when a new ENode discovered is dropped, as the maximum allowed ENodes limit in the system is already reached 69 TR_FIPS_SESSION 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 _DROP 2.4.0.6 dellNetSessionReq uestDroppedTrap DELLNETWORKINGFIPSNOOPINGMIB.
PAGE 1515
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation dellNetETSGlobalE nableTrap is enabled to send the trap for Peer Up or Peer Down 74 TR_ETS_OPER_ST 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.15 dellNetETSPortDcb DELLATE_CHANGE .4.0.4 xOperStateTrap NETWORKINGDCB-MIB.mib This trap is generated in the following conditions.
PAGE 1516
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation enabled to send the trap for Peer Up or Peer Down 78 TR_PFC_OPER_S TATE_CHANGE 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.15 dellNetPFCPortDcb DELL.4.0.8 xOperStateTrap NETWORKINGDCB-MIB.mib This trap is generated in the following conditions. Whenever there is a change in the PFC Operational State and the dellNetPFCGlobalE nableTrap is enabled to send the trap for PFC state machine state change 79 TR_MPLS_TUNNE L_UP 1.3.6.
PAGE 1517
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation 92 TR_CHM_MIN_AL ARM_PS_CLR 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.19 dellNetSysAlarmMi norPSClr DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib The agent generate this trap when a power supply minor alarm is cleared. 93 TR_CHM_MIN_FA NBAD 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.20 dellNetSysAlarmMi norFanBad DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib The agent generate this trap when fan is bad. 94 TR_SYSADM_CPU _THRESHOLD 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.
PAGE 1518
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation remote systems table maintenance polls. Note that transmission of lldpRemTablesChan ge notifications are throttled by the agent, as specified by the 'lldpNotificationInte rval' object. 103 TR_LLDP_MED_T OPOLOGY_CHAN GE lldp-ext-med.
PAGE 1519
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps. 108 TR_RMON_HC_RI SING_THRESHOL D 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.29.2.0. hcRisingAlarm 1 rfc3434.mib The SNMP notification that is generated when a high capacity alarm entry crosses its rising threshold and generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps.
PAGE 1520
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation conflict resolved during audit 113 TR_BATCH_CONFI 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5. batchConfigCommi G_IN_PROGRESS 1.2.0.4 tProgress DELLNETWORKINGCOPY-CONFIGMIB.mib The agent generate this trap when a configuration commit is initiated 114 TR_BATCH_CONFI 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5. batchConfigCommi G_COMPLETE 1.2.0.5 tCompleted DELLNETWORKINGCOPY-CONFIGMIB.
PAGE 1521
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID 129 TR_VLT_ICL_STA TUS_CHANGE Object Name MIB File Explanation 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.17 dellNetVLTIclStatu .2.0.2 sChange DELLNETWORKINGVIRTUAL-LINKTRUNK-MIB.mib The agent generates this notification to denote the change in InterConnect Link Status.The notification contains information on the new ICL status. The possible states are as follows: 1. NotEstabished 2. LinkUp 3. LinkDown 4. LinkError" 130 TR_VLT_PEER_ST 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.
PAGE 1522
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation in Bandwidth usage of ICL Link, when it crosses the threshold above 80 %. The possible states are as follows: 0. Below threshold 1. Above threshold" 133 TR_VLT_DOMAIN _CFG_ERROR 134 DELLNETWORKINGVIRTUAL-LINKTRUNK-MIB.mib The agent generates this notification to denote there is a error/conflict in the VLT domain config parameters (either locally or in remote node which prevent the peer up.
PAGE 1523
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation generated when the value of entLastChangeTim e changes. It can be utilized by an NMS to trigger logical/physical entity table maintenance polls. An agent should not generate more than one entConfigChange 'notification-event' in a given time interval (five seconds is the suggested default). A 'notification-event' is the transmission of a single trap or inform PDU to a list of notification destinations.
PAGE 1524
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation throttling or transmission loss. 139 TR_CHM_STACK_ UNIT_ROLE 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.46 dellNetSysAlarmSta DELLckUnitRoleChanged NETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib Trap generated when a stack unit's role in a stack changes to management/ standby/member 140 TR_CHM_VERSIO N_MISMATCH 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.23 dellNetSysAlarmCa DELLrdVersionMismatch NETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.
PAGE 1525
Table 9. SNMP Trap List (continued) TRAP TYPE TRAP NAME TRAP OID Object Name MIB File Explanation 148 TR_BRM_PE_UNI T_DOWN 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2 6.1.5.1.30 dellNetSysAlarmPE UnitDown DELLNETWORKINGCHASSIS-MIB.mib The driver/agent generate this trap when a PE Unit operational status is down 149 TR_SYSLOG_SER VER_CONNECTIO N_SUCCESSFUL 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3 0.1.1.2 Not Available Not Available Connecting to server with Valid configuration. 150 TR_SYSLOG_SER VER_CONNECTIO N_FAILURE 1.3.6.1.4.
PAGE 1526
53 Storm Control The Dell EMC Networking OS storm control feature allows you to limit or suppress traffic during a traffic storm (Broadcast/ Unknown Unicast Rate Limiting or Multicast on the C-Series and S-Series). Storm control is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Important Points to Remember ● Interface commands can only be applied on physical interfaces (virtual local area networks [VLANs] and link aggregation group [LAG] interfaces are not supported).
PAGE 1527
• • • storm-control multicast (Interface) storm-control unknown-unicast (Configuration) storm-control unknown-unicast (Interface) polling-interval You can set the time interval to poll the queue depth and egress counters. Syntax Parameters Defaults polling—interval {interval in milli-seconds} interval in milliseconds Enter the polling interval in milliseconds. The range is 200 to 1000. The interval should be entered in multiples of 100. The default interval value is 100 milliseconds.
PAGE 1528
of polling-intervals, then it would be detected as PFC storm condition. The ‘xoff’ state means no transmission of data happens out of a port/queue even though there are packets buffered in that queue. Example Use the storm-control pfc command in the configuration mode to enter the ‘storm-control-pfc' configuration mode. The commands provisioned in this mode are applicable for all the interfaces that have PFC storm enabled.
PAGE 1529
is not removed until it is explicitly cleared using the storm-control pfc in queue-drop-state clear command. Example Use the storm-control pfc command in the configuration mode to enter the ‘storm-control-pfc' configuration mode. The commands provisioned in this mode are applicable for all the interfaces that have PFC storm enabled.
PAGE 1530
Usage Information Example The storm-control pfc in queue-drop-state clear command is used to clear the queuedrop state on a particular interface where the PFC storm has been triggered. DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/1/1)# storm-control pfc in queue-drop-state clear disable storm-control pfc You can disable the PFC storm globally. Syntax disable Parameters None Defaults None Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-storm-control-pfc) Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1531
Example DellEMC#show storm-control pfc status stack-unit 1 port-set 0 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Interface Priority State Duration in discard state(in ms) Pkts Dropped(Ingress) Pkts Dropped(Egress) Pkts Dropped(Ingress,Cumulative) Pkts Dropped(Egress,Cumulative)---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Te 1/1/1 4 Drop 1194740 2389 135759218588 2389 135759218588 Te 1/1/1 0 4 Normal 0 0
PAGE 1532
Example DellEMC#show storm-control pfc statistics stack-unit 1 port-set 0 ----------------------------------------------------------------------Interface Priority Discard State Discard State Clear Count Count forced No rxPfc ----------------------------------------------------------------------Te 1/1/1 3 2 0 0 4 2 0 0 5 2 0 0 6 2 0 0 Te 1/1/1 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 Te 1/1/2 3 2 0 0 4 2 0 0 5 2 0 0 6 2 0 0 Te 1/1/3 3 2 0 0 4 2 0 0 5 2 0 0 6 2 0 0 Te 1/1/4 3 2 0 0 4 2 0 0 5 2 0 0 6 2 0 0 Te 1/1/5 3
PAGE 1533
Parameters Defaults interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following interfaces to display the interface-specific storm control configuration: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 1534
● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 50-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fiftyGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 100-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword hundredGigE then the slot/port information. ● For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number.
PAGE 1535
Parameters Defaults interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following interfaces to display the interface specific storm control configuration: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 1536
To disable broadcast rate-limiting, use the no storm-control broadcast [packets_per_second in] command. storm-control broadcast [percentage decimal_value in | out]| [wred-profile name]] [packets_per_second in] To disable broadcast rate-limiting, use the storm-control broadcast [percentage decimal_value in | out] | [wred-profile name]] [packets_per_second in] command.
PAGE 1537
To disable broadcast storm control on the interface, use the no storm-control broadcast [packets_per_second in] command. Parameters Defaults packets_per_sec ond in Enter the packets per second of broadcast traffic allowed into the network. The range is from 0 to 33554368. none Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-slot/port) Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1538
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
PAGE 1539
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-series and S-Series. storm-control unknown-unicast (Configuration) Configure the percentage of unknown-unicast traffic allowed in or out of the network.
PAGE 1540
Usage Information Unknown Unicast Storm-Control is valid for Layer 2 and Layer 2/Layer 3 interfaces. storm-control unknown-unicast (Interface) Configure percentage of unknown-unicast traffic allowed on an interface (ingress only).
PAGE 1541
Version Description 6.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1542
54 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) The commands in this section configure and monitor the IEEE 802.1d spanning tree protocol (STP) and are supported on the Dell EMC Networking switch/routing platform. Topics: • • • • • • • • • • • • bridge-priority bpdu-destination-mac-address debug spanning-tree description disable forward-delay hello-time max-age protocol spanning-tree show config show spanning-tree 0 spanning-tree bridge-priority Set the bridge priority of the switch in an IEEE 802.1D spanning tree.
PAGE 1543
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. bpdu-destination-mac-address Use the Provider Bridge Group address in Spanning Tree or GVRP PDUs.
PAGE 1544
To disable debugging, use the no debug spanning-tree command. Parameters stp-id Enter zero (0). The switch supports one spanning tree group with a group ID of 0. protocol Enter the keyword for the type of STP to debug, either mstp, pvst, or rstp. all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to debug all spanning tree operations. bpdu (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bpdu to debug bridge protocol data units. config (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword config to debug configuration information.
PAGE 1545
Parameters Defaults description Enter a description to identify the spanning tree (80 characters maximum). none Command Modes SPANNING TREE (The prompt is “config-stp”.) Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON.
PAGE 1546
Related Commands Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● protocol spanning-tree — enter SPANNING TREE mode on the switch.
PAGE 1547
Related Commands Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. ● max-age — changes the wait time before STP refreshes protocol configuration information. ● hello-time — changes the time interval between BPDUs. hello-time Set the time interval between generation of the spanning tree bridge protocol data units (BPDUs). Syntax hello-time seconds To return to the default value, use the no hello-time command.
PAGE 1548
max-age To maintain configuration information before refreshing that information, set the time interval for the spanning tree bridge. Syntax max-age seconds To return to the default values, use the no max-age command. Parameters Defaults seconds Enter a number of seconds the Dell EMC Networking OS waits before refreshing configuration information. The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds.
PAGE 1549
Command History Usage Information Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1550
Example Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.7.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1551
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1552
Example Field Description “Port path...” Displays the path cost, priority, and identifier for the interface. “Designated root...” Displays the priority and MAC address of the root bridge of the STG that the interface belongs. “Designated port...” Displays the designated port ID. DellEMC# show spann 0 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e800.
PAGE 1553
Te 1/1/3 8.28 DellEMC# Usage Information Example (Guard) 8 4 FWD 0 32768 0001.e800.0a56 8.28 The following describes the show spanning-tree 0 guard command shown in the example. Field Description Interface Name STP interface. Instance STP 0 instance. Sts Port state: root-inconsistent (INCON Root), forwarding (FWD), listening (LIS), blocking (BLK), or shut down (EDS Shut). Guard Type Type of STP guard configured (Root, Loop, or BPDU guard).
PAGE 1554
Command Modes INTERFACE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1555
55 SupportAssist SupportAssist sends troubleshooting data securely to Dell. SupportAssist in this Dell EMC Networking OS release does not support automated email notification at the time of hardware fault alert, automatic case creation, automatic part dispatch, or reports. SupportAssist requires Dell EMC Networking OS 9.9(0.0) and SmartScripts 9.7 or later to be installed on the Dell EMC Networking device. For more information on SmartScripts, see Dell EMC Networking Open Automation guide.
PAGE 1556
Usage Information ● When you run the command, the system displays a message with the information directing to the URL for further information. ● Even before you accept or reject the EULA, the configuration data is sent to the default centrally deployed SupportAssist Server. If you reject the EULA, the configuration data is not transmitted to the SupportAssist server. ● If there is an existing SupportAssist configuration, the configuration is not removed and the feature is disabled.
PAGE 1557
Related Commands ● support-assist — moves to the SupportAssist Configuration mode. support-assist Move to the SupportAssist configuration mode. Syntax support-assist To remove all the configuration of the SupportAssist service, use the no support-assist command. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.
PAGE 1558
support-assist activity Trigger an activity event immediately. Syntax support-assist activity {full-transfer | core-transfer} start now Parameters full-transfer Enter the keyword full-transfer to specify transfer of configuration, inventory, logs, and other information. core-transfer Enter the keyword core-transfer to specify transfer of core files. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1559
Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and FN IOM. Introduced the core-transfer and event-transfer parameters. Usage Information 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the C9010, Z9100–ON, S6100–ON, and S3100 series. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, Z9500, MXL. By default, each activity follows a set of default actions using a default schedule.
PAGE 1560
Parameters first-name (Optional) Enter the first name for the contact person. This is optional provided each contact person name is unique. To include a space, enter a space within double quotes. last-name Enter the last name for the contact person. To include a space, enter a space within double quotes. Command Modes SUPPORTASSIST Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1561
server Configure the name of the remote SupportAssist Server and move to SupportAssist Server mode. Syntax server {default | server-name} To delete a server, use the no server server-name command. Parameters Defaults default Enter the keyword default for the default server. server-name Enter the name of the custom server to which the logs would be transferred. To include a space, enter a space within double quotes. Default server has URL stor.g3.ph.dell.
PAGE 1562
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and FN IOM. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the C9010, Z9100–ON, S6100–ON, and S3100 series. 9.9(0.
PAGE 1563
Related Commands ● action-manifest get — copy an action-manifest file for an activity to the system. ● action-manifest show — view the list of action-manifest for a specific activity. ● action-manifest remove — remove the action-manifest file for an activity. action-manifest remove Remove the action-manifest file from Dell EMC Networking OS. Syntax Parameters action-manifest remove } local-file-name Enter the name of the local action-manifest file.
PAGE 1564
Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, Z9500, MXL. ● action-manifest get — copy an action-manifest file for an activity to the system. ● action-manifest install — configure the action-manifest to use for a specific activity. ● action-manifest remove — remove the action-manifest file for an activity. enable Enable a specific SupportAssist activity.
PAGE 1565
To remove the complete company contact information, use the no address command. Parameters city company- city province | region | state name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword city then the city or town for the company site. To include a space, enter a space within double quotes. (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword province, region or state then the name of province, region or state for the company site. To include a space, enter a space within double quotes.
PAGE 1566
Usage Information Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and FN IOM. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the C9010, Z9100–ON, S6100–ON, and S3100 series. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, Z9500, MXL. This command is optional for SupportAssist service configuration. territory Configure the territory and set the coverage for the company site.
PAGE 1567
Parameters primary email- address alternate emailaddress Enter the keyword primary then the primary email address for the person. Enter the keyword alternate then the alternate email address for the person. Command Modes SUPPORTASSIST PERSON Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and FN IOM.
PAGE 1568
Related Commands ● preferred-method — configure the preferred method for contacting the person. preferred-method Configure the preferred method for contacting the person. Syntax preferred-method {email | no-contact | phone] Parameters Defaults email Enter the keyword email to specify email as preferred method. no-contact Enter the keywords no-contact to specify that there is no preferred method. phone Enter the keyword phone to specify phone as preferred method.
PAGE 1569
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the C9010, Z9100–ON, S6100–ON, and S3100 series. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, Z9500, MXL. This command is optional for SupportAssist service configuration. SupportAssist Server Commands Dell EMC Networking OS supports the following SupportAssist Server mode commands. proxy-ip-address Configure a proxy for reaching the SupportAssist remote server.
PAGE 1570
Usage Information The passwords are stored encrypted in the running configuration. enable Enable communication with the SupportAssist server. Syntax enable To disable communication to a specific SupportAssist server, use the no enable command. Defaults Enabled Command Modes SUPPORTASSIST SERVER Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.
PAGE 1571
Usage Information The URL should be formatted to follow the ISO format. show eula-consent Display the EULA for the feature. Syntax Parameters show eula-consent {support-assist | other feature} support-assist | other feature Enter the keywords support-assist or the text corresponding to other feature. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1572
allow Dell to transmit and store the Collected Data from SupportAssist in accordance with these terms. You agree that the provision of SupportAssist may involve international transfers of data from you to Dell and/or to Dells affiliates, subcontractors or business partners. When making such transfers, Dell shall ensure appropriate protection is in place to safeguard the Collected Data being transferred in connection with SupportAssist.
PAGE 1573
preferred-method email time-zone zone +05:30 start-time 12:23 end-time 15:23 ! server Dell enable url http://1.1.1.1:1332 DellEMC# show support-assist status Display information on SupportAssist feature status including any activities, status of communication, last time communication sent, and so on. Syntax show support-assist status Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1574
56 System Time and Date The commands in this section configure time values on the system, either using the Dell EMC Networking OS, or the hardware, or using the network time protocol (NTP). With NTP, the switch can act only as a client to an NTP clock host. For more information, see “Network Time Protocol” of the Management section in the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide.
PAGE 1575
Defaults end-month Enter the name of one of the 12 months in English. You can enter the name of a day to change the order of the display to time day month year. end-time Enter the time in hours:minutes. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format; example, 17:15 is 5:15 pm. end-year Enter a four-digit number as the year. The range is from 1993 to 2035. offset (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of minutes to add during the summer-time period. The range is from 1 to1440. The default is 60 minutes.
PAGE 1576
● week-number: Enter a number from 1 to 4 as the number of the week in the month to start daylight saving time. ● first: Enter this keyword to start daylight saving time in the first week of the month. ● last: Enter this keyword to start daylight saving time in the last week of the month. Defaults start-day Enter the name of the day that you want daylight saving time to begin. Use English three letter abbreviations; for example, Sun, Sat, Mon, and so on. The range is from Sun to Sat.
PAGE 1577
Related Commands Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 7.4.1.0 Updated the start-day and end-day options to allow for using the three-letter abbreviation of the weekday name. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ● ntp trusted-key — configures a trusted key. ● clock summer-time date — sets a date (and time zone) on which to convert the switch to daylight saving time on a one-time basis. ● show clock — displays the current clock settings.
PAGE 1578
Usage Information Coordinated universal time (UTC) is the time standard based on the International Atomic Time standard, commonly known as Greenwich Mean time. When determining system time, include the differentiator between UTC and your local timezone. For example, San Jose, CA is the Pacific Timezone with a UTC offset of -8. debug ntp Display Network Time Protocol (NTP) transactions and protocol messages for troubleshooting.
PAGE 1579
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. You also must configure an authentication key for NTP traffic using the ntp authentication-key command. ntp broadcast client Set up the interface to receive NTP broadcasts from an NTP server.
PAGE 1580
ntp control-key-passwd Configure control key password for NTPQ authentication. NTP control key supports encrypted and unencrypted option. Syntax ntp control-key-passwd [encryption-type] password To delete the control key, use the no ntp control-key-passwd [encryption-type] password command. Parameters Defaults encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following numbers: ● 0 (zero) directs the system to store the password as clear text. It is the default encryption type when using the password option.
PAGE 1581
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. ntp master Configure the switch as NTP Server. Syntax Parameters Defaults ntp master ntp Enter the stratum number to identify the NTP Server's hierarchy.
PAGE 1582
Defaults Zero (0). Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3038–ON, S4048-ON, S3100 Series, S4810P, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, S6100–ON, Z9500, and Z9100–ON.
PAGE 1583
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.6(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.4.1.0 Added IPv6 support. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.
PAGE 1584
Parameters Defaults interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 1585
ntp trusted-key Set a key to authenticate the system to which NTP synchronizes. Syntax ntp trusted-key number To delete the key, use the no ntp trusted-key number command. Parameters Defaults number Enter a number as the trusted key ID. The range is from 1 to 65534. Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.
PAGE 1586
Defaults sha1 Specify that the authentication key is encrypted using SHA1 encryption algorithm. 0 Specify that authentication key is entered in an unencrypted format (default). 7 Specify that the authentication key is entered in DES encrypted format. key Enter the authentication key in the previously specified format. NTP authentication is not configured by default. If you do not specify the option [0 | 7], 0 is selected by default.
PAGE 1587
show clock Display the current clock settings. Syntax Parameters show clock [detail] detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to view the source information of the clock. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example Example (Detail) Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1588
show ntp associations Display the NTP master and peers. Syntax show ntp associations Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information 1588 This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Network OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series.
PAGE 1589
Example (without ntp master configuration) Example (with ntp master configuration) Field Description offset Displays the relative time of the NTP peer’s clock to the switch clock (in milliseconds). disp Displays the dispersion. LOCAL(0) Indicates that the local machine has synced with itself. Generally, only a NTP master syncs wit itself. Synchronization of the local machine takes place to this peer. .LOCL. Indicates the reference clock of the NTP master.
PAGE 1590
Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.4.1.0 Added IPv6 support. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. show ntp status Display the current NTP status. Syntax show ntp status Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Usage Information 1590 This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1591
Field Description “clock offset is...” Displays the system offset to the synchronized peer and the time delay on the path to the NTP root clock. “root dispersion is...” Displays the root and path dispersion. “peer mode is...” State what NTP mode the switch is. This should be Client mode. Example Related Commands DellEMC#> show ntp status Clock is synchronized, stratum 4, reference is 10.16.151.117, vrf-id is 0 frequency is 0.000 ppm, stability is 0.000 ppm, precision is -18 reference time dec0e68a.
PAGE 1592
57 Tunneling Tunneling is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • • • • • • • • • • ip unnumbered ipv6 unnumbered tunnel allow-remote tunnel destination tunnel dscp tunnel flow-label tunnel hop-limit tunnel keepalive tunnel-mode tunnel source ip unnumbered Configure a tunnel interface to operate without a unique IPv4 address and select the interface from which the tunnel borrows its address.
PAGE 1593
Usage Information The ip unnumbered command fails in two conditions: ● If the logical ip address is configured. ● If Tunnel mode is ipv6ip (where ip address over tunnel interface is not possible). To ping the unnumbered tunnels, the logical address route information must be present at both the ends. NOTE: The ip unnumbered command can specify an interface name that does not exist or does not have a configured IPv6 address.
PAGE 1594
tunnel allow-remote Configure an IPv4 or IPv6 address or prefix whose tunneled packets are accepted for decapsulation. If you do not configure allow-remote entries, tunneled packets from any remote peer address is accepted. This feature is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS. Syntax tunnel allow-remote {ip-address | ipv6-address} [mask] To delete a configured allow-remote entry use the no tunnel allow-remote command. Any specified address/mask values must match an existing entry for the delete to succeed.
PAGE 1595
Parameters Defaults ip-address Enter the destination IPv4 address for the tunnel. ipv6–address Enter the destination IPv6 address for the tunnel. none Command Modes INTERFACE TUNNEL (conf-if-tu) Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1596
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the C9010. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the S6000, S4810, S4820T, Z9000.
PAGE 1597
tunnel hop-limit Configure the method to set the IPv4 time-to-live or the IPv6 hop limit value in the outer tunnel header. Syntax tunnel hop-limit value To restore the default tunnel hop-limit, use the no tunnel hop-limit command. Parameters Defaults value Enter the hop limit (ipv6) or time-to-live (ipv4) value to include in the tunnel header. The range is from 0 to 255. The default is 64.
PAGE 1598
Defaults Tunnel keepalive is disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE TUNNEL Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1599
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Added the decapsulate-any command. 9.3(0.1) Introduced on the S6000 and Z9000. To enable a tunnel interface, use this command.
PAGE 1600
Command History Usage Information 1600 Tunneling This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1601
58 Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) Uplink failure detection (UFD) provides detection of the loss of upstream connectivity and, if you use this with NIC teaming, automatic recovery from a failed link.
PAGE 1602
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50. ● downstream — assigns a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as a downstream interface.
PAGE 1603
description Enter a text description of an uplink-state group. Syntax Parameters Defaults description text text Text description of the uplink-state group. The maximum length is 80 alphanumeric characters. none Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10.0.2 Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 1604
Where port-range and port-channel-range specify a range of ports separated by a dash (-) and/or individual ports/port channels in any order; for example: gigabitethernet 1/1-2,5,9,11-12 port-channel 1-3,5. A comma is required to separate each port and port-range entry. Defaults none Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1605
Related Commands Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50. ● downstream — assign a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as a downstream interface.
PAGE 1606
Related Commands ● downstream — assigns a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as a downstream interface. ● uplink-state-group — creates an uplink-state group and enables the tracking of upstream links. enable Enable uplink state group tracking for a specific UFD group. Syntax enable To disable upstream-link tracking without deleting the uplink-state group, use the no enable command. Defaults Upstream-link tracking is automatically enabled in an uplink-state group.
PAGE 1607
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50.
PAGE 1608
Uplink Uplink Uplink Uplink Uplink State State State State State Group: Group: Group: Group: Group: 3 Status: Enabled, Up 5 Status: Enabled, Down 6 Status: Enabled, Up 7 Status: Enabled, Up 16 Status: Disabled, Up DellEMC# show uplink-state-group 16 Uplink State Group: 16 Status: Disabled, Up DellEMC# show uplink-state-group detail (Up): Interface up (Dwn): Interface down (Dis): Interface disabled Uplink State Group : 1 Status: Enabled, Up Upstream Interfaces : Downstream Interfaces : Uplink State Group
PAGE 1609
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.2.3 Introduced on the S-Series S50.
PAGE 1610
example: gigabitethernet 1/1-2,5,9,11-12 port-channel 1-3,5. A comma is required to separate each port and port-range entry. Defaults none Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10.0.2 Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1611
59 VLAN Stacking With the virtual local area network (VLAN)-stacking feature (also called stackable VLANs and QinQ), you can “stack” VLANs into one tunnel and switch them through the network transparently. The Dell EMC Networking OS supports this feature. For more information about basic VLAN commands, see the Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands section in Layer 2.
PAGE 1612
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. When packets are colored green; no packets are dropped.
PAGE 1613
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. Enable DEI before using this command. dei mark Set the DEI value on egress according to the color currently assigned to the packet. Syntax Parameters Defaults dei mark {green | yellow} {0 | 1} 0|1 Enter the bit value you want to map to a color. green | red | yellow Choose a color: ● Green: High priority packets that are the least preferred to be dropped.
PAGE 1614
To remove an interface from a Stackable VLAN, use the no member interface command. Parameters Defaults interface Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel, and then a number. ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information. ● For a 25-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword twentyFiveGigE then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 1615
stack-group-id Enter the stack group ID. The range is from 0 to 16. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 1616
Version Description 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.2.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. E-Series original Command Usage Information Prior to enabling this command, to place the interface in Layer 2 mode, enter the switchport command.
PAGE 1617
Version Description E-Series original Command Usage Information Prior to disabling the stackable VLAN feature, remove the members. To view the stackable VLANs, use the show vlan command in EXEC Privilege mode. Stackable VLANs contain members, designated by the M in the Q column of the command output. If you enabled VRF, you cannot enable the stacked VLAN feature using this command. If you enabled IGMP snooping, you cannot enable the stacked VLAN feature using this command.
PAGE 1618
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. You can separate the C-Tag values by commas or dashed ranges. In the case of conflicts, dynamic mode CoS overrides any Layer 2 QoS configuration.
PAGE 1619
Usage Information For specific interoperability limitations regarding the S-Tag TPID, see the Dell EMC Networking OS Configuration Guide. The four characters you may enter are shown in the following table. Related Commands Number Resulting TPID 1 0x0001 10 0x0010 81 0x0081 8100 0x8100 ● portmode hybrid — sets a port (physical ports only) to accept both tagged and untagged frames. A port configured this way is identified as a hybrid port in report displays.
PAGE 1620
Version Description E-Series original Command Usage Information Prior to using this command, to place the interface in Layer 2 mode, use the switchport command. To remove the trunk port designation, first remove the port (using the no member interface command) from all stackable VLAN-enabled VLANs. In Example 1, a VLAN-Stack trunk port is configured and then made part of a single-tagged VLAN. In Example 2, the tag protocol identifier (TPID) is set to 88A8.
PAGE 1621
DellEMC(conf-if-te-5/1/1)# vlan-stack trunk DellEMC(conf-if-te-5/1/1)# exit DellEMC(config)# interface vlan 10 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)# vlan-stack compatible DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)# member Te 4/1/1, Te 3/10/1, TenGi 5/1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)# exit DellEMC(config)# interface vlan 30 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)# untagged TenGi 5/1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)# exit DellEMC(config)# DellEMC(config)# interface vlan 40 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)# tagged TenGi 5/1/1 DellEMC(conf-if-vlan)# exit DellEMC(config)# VLAN Stacking 162
PAGE 1622
60 Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) Virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) allows multiple instances of a routing table to coexist on the same router at the same time. Topics: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ip unknown-unicast ipv6 unknown-unicast description ip vrf forwarding ip http vrf ip route-export ip route-import ipv6 route-export ipv6 route-import match source-protocol redistribute interface management maximum dynamic-routes show ip vrf show run vrf ip unknown-unicast Enable IPv4 catch-all route.
PAGE 1623
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S–Series. Use this command to add the IPv4 catch-all route (0.0.0.0/0) in the LPM route forwarding table if it was deleted using the no ip unknown-unicast command previously. This will be the default configuration after reload. ipv6 unknown-unicast Disable soft forwarding of unknown IPv6 destination packets.
PAGE 1624
Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S-Series. ip vrf forwarding Attach an interface to a VRF.
PAGE 1625
You can configure an IP subnet or address on a physical or VLAN interface that overlaps the same IP subnet or address configured on another interface only if the interfaces are assigned to different VRFs. If you assign two interfaces to the same VRF, you cannot configure overlapping IP subnets or the same IP address to them.
PAGE 1626
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, and Z9500. To make the HTTP clients VRF-aware, use the ip http vrf command. The HTTP client uses the VRF name that you specify to reach the HTTP server. If you do not specify a VRF name, the HTTP client uses the default VRF. ip route-export Enables route leaking between VRFs. This command exports or shares IPv4 routes corresponding to one VRF with other nondefault VRFs.
PAGE 1627
Related Commands ● ip route-import — imports routes from another VRF. ip route-import Imports IPv4 routes that another VRF leaks using the VRF tag during the export of these routes. Syntax Parameters ip route-import tag [route-map—name] route-import Enter the keywords route-import to import routes into the VRF. tag Enter a tag (ASN number) to specify an import route target for importing routes from another VRF.
PAGE 1628
Defaults tag Enter a tag (ASN number) as the export route target to expose routes to other VRFs. This tag acts as an identifier for exported routes. Use this identifier while importing these routes into another nondefault VRF. route-map-name (Optional) Enter the name of the route-map to filter the exported routes. You can leak global routes to be made available to VRFs.
PAGE 1629
route-map-name Defaults Enter the name of the route-map to filter the imported routes. NOTE: Use the route-map attribute while importing routes from the global RTM. Route-maps allow you to filter routes at the import end based on the matching criteria that you define in the route-map. N/A Command Modes ● VRF mode ● CONFIGURATION mode Command History Usage Information Related Commands This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1630
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S5000, S6000, S6000–ON, and Z9500. Specify the matching criteria only after defining a route-map. Before using this command, you must enter Route Map mode using the route-map route-map-name command.
PAGE 1631
interface management Associates a management port with a management VRF. Syntax interface management To delete the association between a management port and a management VRF, use the no interface management command. Command Modes VRF MODE Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1632
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1633
Ma Ma Ma Ma Ma Nu 0, test1 test2 management 1 2 64 DellEMC# show ip vrf test1 VRF-Name test1 DellEMC# 2/1, 3/1, 4/1, 5/1, 6/1, Vl 1 Te 1/25/1,1/28/4-1/29/3 Te 1/32/1 VRF-ID Interfaces 1 Te 1/29/4,1/30/1-1/31/3 show run vrf Displays configuration information corresponding to all the VRFs in the system. Syntax Parameters show run vrf vrf-name vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF.
PAGE 1634
61 VLT Proxy Gateway The virtual link trucking (VLT) proxy gateway feature allows a VLT domain to locally terminate and route L3 packets that are destined to a Layer 3 (L3) end point in another VLT domain. Enable the VLT proxy gateway using the link layer discover protocol (LLDP) method or the static configuration. For more information, see the Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1635
proxy-gateway static Enables the proxy-gateway feature using static configurations. Syntax [no] proxy-gateway static Command Modes VLT DOMAIN Command History Usage Information Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 1636
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000.
PAGE 1637
Usage Information Example Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000. You must configure the VLT port channel interface which is connecting to the remote VLT domain as peer-domain-link. You can also configure the VLANs you want to exclude from the VLT proxy gateway.
PAGE 1638
vlt-peer-mac transmit Enables the device to transmit the peer MAC address along with its own MAC address in LLDP TLV packets to the remote VLT domain. Syntax [no] vlt-peer-mac transmit Command Modes VLT DOMAIN PROXY GW LLDP Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1639
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the S4810, S4820T, S6000, and Z9000. The proxy-gateway feature may go operationally down for any of the following reasons: ● ● ● ● LLDP is globally disabled.
PAGE 1640
62 Virtual Link Trunking (VLT) Virtual link trunking (VLT) allows physical links between two chassis to appear as a single virtual link to the network core. VLT eliminates the requirement for Spanning Tree protocols by allowing link aggregation group (LAG) terminations on two separate distribution or core switches, and by supporting a loop-free topology.
PAGE 1641
back-up destination Configure the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the management interface on the remote VLT peer used as the VLT backup link endpoint for sending out-of-band (OOB) hello messages. Syntax Parameters Defaults back-up destination {[ipv4–address] | [ipv6 ipv6–address] [interval seconds] vrf [management vrf-name | vrf-name]} ipv4–address Enter the IPv4 address of the backup destination. ipv6 Enter the keyword ipv6 then an IPv6 address in the X:X:X:X::X format.
PAGE 1642
clear vlt statistics Clear the VLT operation statistics. Syntax clear vlt statistics [arp | domain | igmp-snoop | mac | multicast | ndp] Parameters domain Clear the VLT statistics for the domain. multicast Clear the VLT statistics for multicast. mac Clear the VLT statistics for the MAC address. arp Clear the VLT statistics for ARP. igmp-snoop Clear the VLT statistics for IGMP snooping. ndp Clear the VLT statistics for NDP.
PAGE 1643
delay-restore Configure the delay in bringing up VLT ports after reload or peer-link restoration between the VLT peer switches. Syntax Parameters Defaults delay-restore delay-restore Enter the amount of time, in seconds, to delay bringing up the VLT ports after the VLTi device reloads or after the peer-link restores between VLT peer switches. The range from 1 to 1200. The default is 90 seconds. Not configured. Command Modes VLT DOMAIN Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1644
This delay restore timer applies only during reload/boot-up and not in other scenarios (for example, during ICL flap). Defaults 60 seconds Command Modes VLT DOMAIN Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 1645
Usage Information Version Description 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Added port-channel parameter on the S4810. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. LACP on the VLT ports (on a VLT switch or access device), which are members of the VLT, are not brought up until the VLT domain is recognized on the access device.
PAGE 1646
Command Modes VLT DOMAIN (conf-vlt-domain) Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.
PAGE 1647
Usage Information Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. This command is supported in ProgrammableMux (PMUX) mode only. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Added support for the peer-down-vlan option. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. To configure the VLAN from where the VLT peer forwards packets received over the VLTi from an adjacent VLT peer that is down, use the peer-down-vlan option.
PAGE 1648
peer-routing-timeout Configure the delay after which peer routing disables when the peer is unavailable. This command is applicable for both IPv6 and IPv4. Syntax peer-routing-timeout value To restore the default value, use the no peer-routing-timeout command. Parameters value Enter the timeout value (in seconds). The range is from 1 to 65535. The default value is infinity. Command Modes VLT DOMAIN (conf-vlt-domain) Default Infinity Command History This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1649
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
PAGE 1650
Usage Information Example (Brief) Version Description 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. The version shown in the show vlt brief output command displays the VLT version number which is different from the Dell EMC Networking OS version number. VLT version numbers begin with odd numbers.
PAGE 1651
Example Version Description 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. Dell_VLTpeer1# show vlt backup-link VLT Backup Link ----------------Destination: Peer HeartBeat status: HeartBeat Timer Interval: HeartBeat Timeout: UDP Port: HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: 10.11.200.18 Up 1 3 34998 1026 1025 show vlt counters Displays counter information.
PAGE 1652
Usage Information Example Example (igmpsnoop) Example (igmpsnoop interface port-channel) If you do not add a parameter such as arp or mac, the output displays all the counters.
PAGE 1653
Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 1654
-----------------------(22.22.22.200, 225.1.1.2) VLAN 5 (*, 225.1.1.2) VLAN 15 DellEMC# --------VLAN 6 te 1/5/1 show vlt mismatch Display mismatches in VLT parameters. Syntax show vlt mismatch Command Modes EXEC Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.13(0.0) Updated to show mismatch in VXLAN instance parameters. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1655
VLAN to VNI config mismatch -------------------------------------Vlan-ID Local VNID Peer VNID -----------------------------10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 - VXLAN enabled status on VLT Port Channels ------------------------------------------Local-Lag Status Peer-Lag Status -----------------------------300 Disable 100 Disable 700 Enable 812 Disable 999 Disable 888 Disable Local VTEP IP mismatch ------------------------------------------------------------------Local Node “Local VTEP IP” Remote Node “Local VTEP IP”
PAGE 1656
Local Lag --------128 Peer Lag Local VLANs -------- ----------128 4094 Peer VLANs ---------100 DellEMC# show vlt role Displays the VLT peer status, role of the local VLT switch, VLT system MAC address and system priority, and the MAC address and priority of the local VLT device. Syntax show vlt role Default Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Command History Example This guide is platform-specific.
PAGE 1657
show vlt statistics Displays VLT operations statistics. Syntax Parameters Default show vlt statistics [arp | domain | igmp-snoop | mac | multicast | ndp] arp Enter the keyword arp to display the ARP VLT statistics. domain Enter the keyword domain to display the domain VLT statistics. igmp-snoop Enter the keywords igmp-snoop to display the IGMP snooping VLT statistics. mac Enter the keyword mac to display the VLT MAC addresses VLT statistics.
PAGE 1658
VLT MAC Statistics ---------------L2 Info Pkts sent:6, L2 Mac-sync Pkts Sent:0 L2 Info Pkts Rcvd:3, L2 Mac-sync Pkts Rcvd:2 L2 Reg Request sent:1 L2 Reg Request rcvd:2 L2 Reg Response sent:1 L2 Reg Response rcvd:1 VLT Igmp-Snooping Statistics ------------------------------IGMP Info Pkts sent: 4 IGMP Info Pkts Rcvd: 1 IGMP Reg Request sent: 1 IGMP Reg Request rcvd: 2 IGMP Reg Response sent: 1 IGMP Reg Response rcvd: 1 IGMP PDU Tunnel Pkt sent: 5 IGMP PDU Tunnel Pkt rcvd: 10 IGMP Tunnel PDUs sent: 10 IGMP Tun
PAGE 1659
Example Version Description 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.1) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.12.0 Introduced on the S4810.
PAGE 1660
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. When you create a VLT domain on a switch, the Dell EMC Networking OS automatically assigns a unique unit ID (0 or 1) to each peer switch. The unit IDs are used for internal system operations. To explicitly configure the unit ID of a VLT peer, use the unit-id command. Configure a different unit ID (0 or 1) on each peer switch.
PAGE 1661
Parameters Defaults id-number Enter the respective VLT port-channel number of the peer device. Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.
PAGE 1662
63 Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) is supported on Dell EMC Networking OS.
PAGE 1663
Usage Information Use this command to clear the remote VTEP and access port statistics. clear mac-address-table dynamic Clear the MAC address table of specific or all MAC address learned dynamically.
PAGE 1664
Defaults Disabled Command Modes VXLAN INSTANCE Command History Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.10(0.1P10) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S4048–ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S6000.
PAGE 1665
Version Description 9.10(0.1P10)) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S4048–ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S6000. Usage Information You must configure feature VXLAN to configure VXLAN-instance. Related Commands vxlan-instance — Enable VXLAN Instance configuration on the platform. fail-mode Configures failure-mode on the platform. Syntax fail-mode secure To disable the fail-mode secure, use the no fail-mode securecommand.
PAGE 1666
Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.10(0.1P10) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S4048–ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S6000. vxlan-instance — Enable VXLAN Instance configuration on the platform. local-vtep-ip Set the local IP Address to be used as the source IP for VXLAN tunnels.
PAGE 1667
Version Description 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the S4048–ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.4.(0.0) Introduced on the S6000. Usage Information The retry interval value caps at the value configured on the max-backoff. Related Commands vxlan-instance — Enable VXLAN Instance configuration on the platform. peer-ovsdbserver-ip Specify the IP address of the peer OVSDB server in a VLT setup.
PAGE 1668
Usage Information Use this command to associate a specific VNID to a remote VTEP. Provide a valid profile name while associating to the remote VTEP. NOTE: The remote VTEP IP Address cannot be any of the local IP Addresses configured in the switch. vnid Associate a range of VNID numbers to a specific VNI profile. Syntax vnid VNID-Range To remove the association, use the no vnid command. Parameters Defaults VNID-Range Enter the range of VNIDs that need to be members of the specific VNI profile.
PAGE 1669
vxlan-instance Enable VXLAN Instance configuration on the platform. Syntax vxlan-instance instance ID [nsx | nuage | static] To delete vxlan-instance from the system, use no vxlan-instance instance ID command. Parameters instance ID Enter the VXLAN instance ID. The platform supports only the instance ID 1. nsx Enter the keyword nsx to connect to an NSX controller. NOTE: When no keyword is specified, the nsx option is applied. Defaults nuage Enter the keyword nuage to connect to a Nuage controller.
PAGE 1670
To unconfigure VAP, use the no vxlan-instance 1 command. Parameters Defaults instance ID Enter the VXLAN instance ID. The platform supports only the instance ID 1 in the initial release. Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON.
PAGE 1671
Internal Loopback: DellEMC(conf-if-te-1/2/2/3)#sho c ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/2/2/3 description connected IXIA card 1 port 14 vxlan-instance 1 Disable VXLAN Instance: DellEMC(conf)#no vxlan-instance 1 Related Commands feature vxlan — Enable VXLAN configuration globally on the platform. vxlan-instance static Enable VXLAN instance configuration to be static on the platform.
PAGE 1672
vxlan-vnid Associate VNID to VLAN. Syntax vxlan-vnid VNID To remove the association, use the no vxlan-vnid command. Parameters Defaults VNID Enter the logical network identifier. None Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the S4048, S4048T, S6000, S6010, S6100, and Z9100.
PAGE 1673
remote-vtep-ip 2.2.2.2 vni-profile ni1 Controller Mode: DellEMC#show running-config vxlan ! feature vxlan ! vxlan-instance 1 gateway-ip 3.3.3.3 fail-mode secure controller 1 192.168.122.6 port 6632 ssl no shutdown Related Commands vxlan-instance- Enable VXLAN Instance configuration on the platform. show vxlan vxlan-instance Displays information related to Network Virtualization Overlay (NVO) Gateway. Syntax Parameters show vxlan vxlan-instance instance ID instance ID Enter the VXLAN instance ID.
PAGE 1674
show vxlan vxlan-instance logical network Displays logical network information related to Network Virtualization Overlay (NVO) Gateway. Syntax show vxlan vxlan-instance instance ID logical-network [name name] Parameters instance ID Enter the VXLAN instance ID. The platform supports only the instance ID 1 in the initial release. name name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword name and enter the name of VXLAN logical network up to a length of maximum 30 characters.
PAGE 1675
A.B.C.D Defaults Enter the IP address of the VTEP. Disabled Command Modes VXLAN INSTANCE Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced the static mode on the S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S6000–ON, S6010– ON, S6100–ON, and Z9100–ON. 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.
PAGE 1676
● EXEC Privilege Command History Example This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.11(0.0) Introduced on the S4048–ON, S4048T-ON, S6000–ON, S6010–ON, S6100–ON, and Z9100–ON.
PAGE 1677
show vxlan vxlan-instance unicast-mac-local Displays the information of the local unicast MAC associated with the logical network related to Network Virtualization Overlay (NVO) Gateway. Syntax Parameters show vxlan vxlan-instance instance ID unicast-mac-local [logical—network name | vnid VNID] instance ID Enter the VXLAN instance ID. The platform supports only the instance ID 1 in the initial release. name (Optional) Enter the name of VXLAN logical network with a maximum length of 30 characters.
PAGE 1678
name (Optional) Enter the name of VXLAN logical network with a maximum length of 30 characters. vnid VNID (Optional) Enter the keyword vnid and then enter the ID of the VXLAN. The range is from 1 to 16777215. Command Modes ● EXEC ● EXEC Privilege Command History Example Related Commands This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.13(0.
PAGE 1679
Example DellEMC# show vxlan 1 vtep-vni-map Remote Vtep IP : 10.10.10.10 VNI profile : Profile1 VNID count : 4 VNID list : 100, 200, 300, 400 Remote Vtep IP VNI profile VNID count VNID list : : : : 10.10.10.
PAGE 1680
64 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) is supported by the Dell EMC Networking OS. Topics: • • IPv4 VRRP Commands IPv6 VRRP Commands IPv4 VRRP Commands The following are IPv4 VRRP commands. advertise-interval Set the time interval between VRRP advertisements. Syntax advertise-interval {seconds | centisecs centisecs } To return to the default settings, use the no advertise-interval command. Parameters seconds Enter the number of seconds.
PAGE 1681
Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. Dell EMC Networking recommends keeping the default setting for this command. If you do change the time interval between VRRP advertisements on one router, change it on all routers. authentication-type Enable authentication of VRRP data exchanges.
PAGE 1682
Usage Information The system encrypts the password and the show config command displays the encrypted text string. clear counters vrrp Clear the counters maintained on VRRP operations. Syntax clear counters vrrp [vrrp-id] [ipv6] Parameters vrrp-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of the VRRP group ID to clear the group’s counters. The range is from 1 to 255. ipv6 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv6 to clear counters from the IPv6 VRRP group.
PAGE 1683
between 1 and 4, specify the port range as clear counters interfaces interfacetype 1/1/1 - 1/1/4. debug vrrp Enable VRRP debugging. Syntax debug vrrp [vrrp-id] {all | bfd | database | interface | ipv6 | packets | state | timer} To disable debugging, use the no debug vrrp [vrrp-id] {all | bfd | database | interface | ipv6 | packets | state | timer} command. Parameters vrrp-id (OPTIONAL) Enter a number from 1 to 255 as the VRRP group ID. all Enter the keyword all to enable debugging of all VRRP groups.
PAGE 1684
Usage Information Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. If you do not specify an option, debug is active on all interfaces and all VRRP groups. description Configure a short text string describing the VRRP group.
PAGE 1685
disable Disable a VRRP group. Syntax disable To re-enable a disabled VRRP group, use the no disable command. Command Modes VRRP Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.
PAGE 1686
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.
PAGE 1687
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810. 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. priority Specify a VRRP priority value for the VRRP group. The VRRP protocol uses this value during the MASTER election process.
PAGE 1688
Usage Information To guarantee that a VRRP group becomes MASTER, configure the VRRP group’s virtual address with same IP address as the interface’s primary IP address and change the priority of the VRRP group to 255. If you set the priority command to 255 and the virtual-address is not equal to the interface’s primary IP address, an error message appears. show config View the non-default VRRP configuration.
PAGE 1689
show vrrp View the VRRP groups that are active. If no VRRP groups are active, the Dell EMC Networking OS returns No Active VRRP group. Syntax Parameters show vrrp [vrrp-id][brief][interface type][ipv6][interface type][vrf vrfname] vrrp-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the virtual router identifier for the VRRP group to view only that group. The range is from 1 to 255. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view a table of information about the VRRP groups.
PAGE 1690
Usage Information Example (Brief) Usage Information Version Description 7.6.1.0 Introduced on the S-Series. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the C-Series. 6.2.1.1 Introduced on the E-Series. The following describes the show vrrp brief command. Item Description Interface Lists the interface type, slot, and port of the configured VRRP group. Grp Displays the VRRP group ID. Pri Displays the priority value assigned to the interface.
PAGE 1691
Item Description ● Adv sent displays the number of VRRP advertisements sent on the interface. ● Gratuitous ARP sent displays the number of gratuitous ARPs sent. Virtual MAC address Displays the virtual MAC address of the VRRP group. Virtual IP address Displays the virtual IP address of the interface’s VRRP router. Authentication:... States whether authentication is configured for the VRRP group. If it is configured, this lists the authentication type and password. Tracking states..
PAGE 1692
track Monitor an interface and lower the priority value of the VRRP group on that interface if it is disabled. Syntax track interface [priority-cost cost] To disable monitoring, use the no track interface command. Parameters Defaults interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and the interface information: ● For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port/subport information.
PAGE 1693
To delete one or more virtual IP addresses, use the no virtual-address ip-address1 [... ip-address12] command. Parameters Defaults ip-address1 Enter an IP address of the virtual router in dotted decimal format. The IP address must be on the same subnet as the interface’s primary IP address. ... ip-address12 (OPTIONAL) Enter up to 11 additional IP addresses of virtual routers in dotted decimal format. Separate the IP addresses with a space.
PAGE 1694
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.1) Introduced on the S6010-ON and S4048T-ON. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 9.0.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.
PAGE 1695
Usage Information Version Description 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.8.0 Introduced on the S4810. This command applies to all the VRRP interfaces on a system. When you use this command with the vrrp delay minimum command, the later timer rules VRRP enabling. For example, if vrrp delay reload is 600 and vrrp delay minimum is 300: ● When the system reloads, VRRP waits 600 seconds (10 minutes) to bring up VRRP on all interfaces that are up and configured for VRRP.
PAGE 1696
Related Command ● virtual-address — assigns up to 12 virtual IP addresses per VRRP group. version Set the VRRP protocol version for the IPv4 group. Syntax version {2 | 3 | both} To return to the default setting, use the no version command. Parameters Defaults 2 Enter the keyword 2 to specify VRRP version 2 as defined by RFC 3768, Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol. 3 Enter the keyword 3 to specify VRRP version 3 as defined by RFC 5798, Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol.
PAGE 1697
IPv6 VRRP Commands The following are IPv6 VRRP commands. ● clear counters vrrp ipv6 ● debug vrrp ipv6 ● show vrrp ipv6 ● vrrp-ipv6-group The following commands apply to IPv4 and IPv6: ● advertise-interval ● description ● disable ● hold-time ● preempt ● priority ● show config ● virtual-address clear counters vrrp ipv6 Clear the counters recorded for IPv6 VRRP groups.
PAGE 1698
Usage Information NOTE: You can also clear the port configurations corresponding to a range of ports. For Open Networking (ON) platforms, the notation for specifying the port range in the command is different from how you specify the port range in non-ON platforms. ● For non-ON platforms, you can specify multiple ports as slot/port-range.
PAGE 1699
Usage Information Version Description 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.10.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.4.1.0 Introduced on E-Series, C-Series, and S-Series. Support was added for IPv6 VRRP groups in nondefault VRF instances. 8.3.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1700
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S3148. 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON. 9.8(2.0) Introduced on the S3100 series. 9.8(1.0) Introduced on the Z9100–ON. 9.8(0.0P5) Introduced on the S4048-ON. 9.8(0.0P2) Introduced on the S3048-ON. 9.7(0.0) Added support for VRF. Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.2(1.0) Introduced on the Z9500. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820T. 8.3.10.0 Introduced on the S4810. 8.3.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series.
PAGE 1701
TenGigabitEthernet 5/6/1, IPv6 VRID: 255, Version: 3, Net: fe80::201:e8ff:fe7a:6bb9 VRF: 0 default-vrf State: Master, Priority: 101, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe7a:6bb9 (local) Hold Down: 0 centisec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 100 centisec Accept Mode: FALSE, Master AdvInt: 100 centisec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 64 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:02:ff Virtual IP address: 1::255 fe80::255 vrrp-ipv6-group Assign an interface to a VRRP group.
PAGE 1702
NOTE: For all routers to interoperate, configure the same VRID on neighboring routers (Dell EMC Networking or non- Networking) in the same VRRP group. Related Commands 1702 ● virtual-address — assigns up to 12 virtual IP addresses per VRRP group.
PAGE 1703
65 X.509v3 X.509v3 is a standard for public key infrastructure (PKI) to manage digital certificates and public key encryption. This standard specifies a format for public-key certificates or digital certificates. Dell EMC Networking OS supports X.509v3 standards.
PAGE 1704
crypto ca-cert install Downloads and installs the certificate of a Certificate Authority (CA) on to the device. Syntax crypto ca-cert install path Parameters Defaults path Enter the path where the CA certificate is available for download. The format that you use to specify the location of the CA certificate also includes the protocol that is used to contact the CA.
PAGE 1705
● secadmin The certificate matching the current FIPS state is deleted. If the system is in FIPS mode, the FIPS certificate is deleted. If the system is in non-FIPS mode, the non-FIPS certificate is deleted. Before deleting the system’s trusted certificate, the system prompts you to specify whether to proceed with deletion. If you proceed, the system deletes the certificate and also the private key.
PAGE 1706
email email- address Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword email followed a valid email address used for communication with the organization. validity days (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword validity followed by the number of days for which the certificate is valid. NOTE: For CSRs, validity has no effect. For self-signed certificates, if validity is not specified, it defaults to 3650 days, or 10 years. length length (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword length followed by a bit length value.
PAGE 1707
Parameters cert-file Enter the keyword cert-file to specify that the certificate needs to be downloaded. cert-path Enter the path where the certificate is locally stored. The path can be a full path or a relative path. If the system accepts this path, a notification is sent indicating the location where the certificate file is stored. Following are example of a path that you can specify: flash://certs/s4810-001-request.crtand usbflash:/certs/s4810-001-cert.
PAGE 1708
If the system is in non-FIPS mode, the certificate will be installed as the non-FIPS certificate. When FIPS mode is enabled/disabled, the certificates (and keys) are switched by the system. Related Commands ● crypto ca-cert install crypto x509 ocsp Configures the OCSP behavior. Syntax crypto x509 ocsp [nonce] [sign-requests] Parameters Defaults nonce Enter the keyword nonce to use the nonce feature for the OCSP requests to OCSP responder communication.
PAGE 1709
Command Modes ● CONFIGURATION Mode Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell EMC Networking OS version history for this command: Related Commands Version Description 9.11.0.0 Introduced this command.
PAGE 1710
tcp Enter the keyword tcp to enable TCP. udp Enter the keyword udp to enable UDP. vrf vrf-name Enter the keyword vrf followed by the name of the VRF. sha1 fingerprint Enter the keyword sha1 followed by the finger print. This option is only available when the secure option is configured. This new option enables the Syslog feature to compare the received certificate’s sha-1 fingerprint against this configured sha-1 fingerprint.
PAGE 1711
Usage Information Version Description 9.11.0.0 Introduced this command. The following RBAC roles are allowed to issue this command: ● sysadmin ● secadmin When you use this command, the device maps the current certificate context in the certificate store to a CA certificate through the subject key identifier field. The subject key identifier field contains the SHA-1 hash of the CA’s public key. This configuration provides a way to uniquely identify a CA and associate it with any CA-specific settings.
PAGE 1712
Related Commands ● crypto x509 ocsp ocsp-server prefer Configures OCSP responder preference. You can configure the preference or order that the CA or a device should follow while contacting multiple OCSP responders. Syntax ocsp-server prefer Defaults None. Command Modes CERTIFICATE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell EMC Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
PAGE 1713
show crypto cert Displays the certificate information that is specified. Syntax Parameters Defaults show crypto cert {path} path (OPTIONAL) Enter the path to a local file where a certificate chain is stored in PEM format. If a path is not specified, display the certificate that is currently installed on the system. None. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History This guide is platform-specific.